3.2 - Electrical System, System Diagrams (OCR)

Saab 900
SERVICE MANUAL
3:2 Electrical system, system diagrams,

operation and fault tracing
M 1989 1990
Power supply
aa
Engine electronics
Lighting systems
Windscreen and headlamp wipers
SERVICE
Instruments and warning systems
MANUAL
Heating and ventilation systems

Other systems
3:2 Electrical system,

system diagrams,
operation and
fault-tracing
Accessories
List of components
M 1989 - 1990
Units
The basic and derived units used throughout the Service Manual are in
accordance with the SI system. '
For users not familiar with the SI units, some non-Continental units are
given in brackets after the respective SI unit.
The following symbols and abbreviations are used:
SI unit
Equivalent unit ?and

symbol
mm
kg
N
Nm
bar
I, (liter)
C
inch (in)
pound (Ib)
pound-force (Ibf)
pound-force foot (Ibf ft)
pound-force per square inch (Ibf/irf)
(Also abbreviated: psi)
US liquid quart (liq qt)
(Also abbreviated: qts)
US gallon (USgal)
of
Conversion factors
1 in = 25.4 mm
1 Ib = 0.45 kg
1 Ibf =4.45 N
1 Ibf ft = 1.36 Nm
1 psi = 0.07 bar
1 US Iiq qt = 0.83 UKqt
OF = C x 9/5 + 32
1 mm = 0.039 in
1
1
1
1
1
1
kg = 2.20 Ib
N = 0.23 Ibf
Nm = 0.74 Ibf ft
bar = 14.5 Ibf/in2
I == 1.05 Iiq<qt
USgal<'7',;Q.83 U~~;~.I
,'"
X,Syg7
Market codes
The codes refer to market specifications
AT
AU
BE
CA
CH
DE
DK
ES
EU
FE
FI
FR
Saab
Austria
Australia
Belgium
Canada
Switzerland
Germany
Denmark
Spain
Europe
Far East
Finland
France
GB
GR
IS
IT
JP
ME
NL
NO
SE
US
UC
Automobile AB 1990
Production: Technical Publications, Saab Automobile' AB, Trollhiiltan, Sweden
Gr~~t
(jre~ce
Iceland
Italy
Japan
Middle East
Netherlands
Norway
Sweden
i.4$A
iUS California
';t-.-
t,
/'
")
Contents
Contents
Introduction
Safety instructions
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable codes
Abbreviations
Using the wiring diagram
Using a universal instrument for fault-tracing.
Connectors
4
4
4
5
5
6
8
10
Power supply
Positive supply
12
12
Electrical distribution box
Relays
13
Fuses
,..
14
Extra electrical distribution box (Convertible) . 15
Ignition switch and positive supplies. . . . . . . . . . . 15
Distribution terminal +30
18
Distribution terminal +X
20
22
D' 'b .
. I 54
24
Eartl~~~~~~~~i~~:I.~~ . ~ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :: 27
Earthing point 3, fascia
28
30
Earthing point 7, radiator cross-member
Earthing point 9, luggage compartment
32
Earthing point 65, back seat and earthing
point 300, brake unit (1990 model)
34
Earthing point 93, amplifier and earthing
point 300, brake unit (1989 model)
.36
Earthing point 117, between the ignition
38
switch and the handbrake lever
Negative distribution terminal 158,
in-the electrical distribution box
" . . . .. 40
Earthing point 201, engine
42
Reversing lights
Rear fog lights, 1989 model
Direction indicators, hazard warning lights SE, FI, EU, GB, ME, FE, AU
Direction indicators, hazard warning IightsUS, CA and 1989 JP
:
Lighting for controls - SE. FI, EU, GB, ME, FE, AU
and 1990 JP
Lighting fohr ~ontrols - US. CA and 1989 for JP ..
Interior Iightmg
~Iterior Iig ting - c~~ve~lle.
Love compartment I u~llma~lon
uggage compartment I ummatlon
.
'b'
128
132
134
138
142
146
115
50
4
i~~
164
Windscreen and headlamp wipers
Windscreen wipers
Headlamp wipers
168
, 172
Instruments and warnll'lg.,systems
Horn
:'
Seatbelt warning lamp
Seat-belt and ignition key warnmg
Combined instrument
\
Coolant temperature warni!(lg buzzer
Cigarette lighter
" ,',,,., .. ,
, 1176
. 80
, 184
188
198
.
Heating and ventilation systems
Cooling system fan, 1989 models ............

Cooling system fan. 1990 models
" ...
.
Ventilation fan
..1.08
Air Conditioner (AC) with time-delay relay ..
'h~~2
Air Conditioner (AC) (CU14) ................... f:t4 .
Electrically heated front seats
~
21St'
Engine electronIcs
,.,,/.'_glectrically heated front seats with rheostat
':
~;.~'-;44r- control fortliedriver's seat
.
Start'In g syst
em .;.....
.'
48
Electric heating for the rear window .. ","~
Fuel system, carbur
ngine
: .';. .
EI' h . ~ h
. d
C "'" ..
CI fuel system: 1819 0 model, 1989 modelectnc eatmg lor t e rear wm ow,.. ~q.r:1V~
ME, FE CI: T81989 model- FI, EU, GB
52
Other systems
CI fuel system: 18 Lambda - SE, EU.
Electric window regulators ..................
1990'inodel- F1;GB
56
Electric window regulators, COlwertiblle . c;;;:,.\c
CI fuel syster:o:.1989 model T8 Lambda - EU
58
Electrically operated rear-view mirrors
.
LH 2.2fuel~ystem: 116 - FI, EU, GB, ME, FE
64
Electrically operated sunroof
.
'LH 2.2 fuel system: 1989 model Ti6 Electrically operated Convertible top.
FI, I;U, GB, ME, FE
~ .. . .. . . .. . ..
66
Central locking
,
.
'. 'LH 2.4 fU,el system: Ti6 Lambdc:l- US, CA, AU
Central locking - Convertible
.
1989 model- SE" EU, JP. 116'La'mbda- US, CA,
Cruise Control system ...: ............
AU. JP, SE, EU
'
,
.. .. .
72
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
, .. ';. '" .
CU14 fuel system
78
Power supply, hydraulic pressure'and)
Ignition system (with tachometer) C8, 18,
monitoring functions .. ;
~ .... ; .. '! ..'.
18 Lambda, Ti6, Ti6 Lambda 1989 model of
Passive seat belts, 1989 model
278
T8, T8 Lambda
84
Airbag
'.' . . .. 184
EZK iltnition system (with tachometer),
Accessories
88
1989 model'
Heaqlamp beam adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
EZK ignition system (with tachometer),
RaaTo installation
292
90
1990 model
Radio installation -US, CA
294
Battery-charging system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 94
Burglar'alarm - US, CA and 1989 for JP
298
APC system
98
Burgl'ar alarm, 1989 model Convertible
302
Ughtlng systems
Burglar alarm, 1990 model Convertible
304
- Headlamps
102
LIst of components
Dim dipped beam - GB 1989 model
106
Component in numerical order
308
Daylight driving lights - CA .,
',.' . . . . . . .. 110
Extra fog lamps
114
Parking lights
118
. Brake lights, 1989 model ................... 122
Brake lights, 1990 model
,124
Saab900
Introduction
Introduction
This Service Manual deals with the electrical systems of the 1989 and 1990 models ofthe Saab 900.
This Manual is a supplementtothe Service Manual,
Group 3:1, Electrical system, Instruments.
This Manual also deals with the Saab 900 Convertible, for which some of the functions are described
separately. Other functions are the same as on the
2-door and 4-door models.
CautIon - hIgh voltage.

The ignition system of the car is of electronic type,
operating at voltages of more than 30 000 V. This
voltage may be fatal to persons with a weak heart and
persons who have a pacemaker. So treat the entire
ignition system with great caution.
Before starting work on the electrical system:
Take off your wrist-watch and any rings you may be
wearing.
The purpose of this Manual is to facilitate fault tracing and service work on the electrical system of the
car. So each electrical sub-system, such as the ignition system, hazard warning lights, etc., is described
individually, and a separate wiring diagram is shown
for each sub-system. Each such diagram is an extract
from the comprehensive wiring diagram for the car.
A list of the electrical components of the car is included at the end of this Manual.
The comprehensive diagram for the entire electrical
system of the car is presented in a separate bookGroup 3:4.
Disconnect the cable from one terminal of the

battery if any electrical components are to be re.,
moved.
"
Always follow the instructions and recommendations in the Service Manual, Group 3:1, Electrical
system, Instruments.
Wiring diagrams
This Manual is applicable to cars delivered to all

markets. Note that certain cars delivered to the European market, for instance, may be equipped in
accordance with the "USA specification". This
Manual should not be used for the Saab 90, Saab 99
and earlier models of the Saab 900, even though
many of the electrical systems may be very similar.
Note
Follow carefully the installation instructions for extra
equipment, since electronic and control units may
otherwise maloperate or may sustain serious damage.
Safety instructions
CautIon - arcing may cause Injull'les.
Although the system voltage is only 12 V, injuries may
be caused by flash-over or fire in the car, since the
energy content of the battery is very high. Shortcircuit may give rise to very high currents.
Saab900
Each wiring diagram generally consists of two

spreads, Le. a total offour pages. A typical example
of a wiring diagram, explanations of the symbols
used, etc. are shown on the next spread.
On the first spread, the wiring diagram for the relevant sub-system is shown on the left-hand side, anda
brief description of the operation as well as faulttracing hints are given on the right-hand side.
The second spread shows how the relevant cables are
run in the car and where the electrical components
are located. In addition, a picture is shown of each of
the electrical components involved in the sub-system. A supplementary description of the location of
each component is given on the left-hand side of the
spread.
Introduction
Cable codes
Abbreviations
As a general rule, each cable in the electrical system

of the car has a code consisting of three parts, as
H1ustrated by the example below:
The Manual includes the following abbreviations:
122A GN 0.75
Item number
Colour code
1
~
Cross-sectional area of the conductor, mm 2

Item number. Every cable is designated by a unique
number, which is usually followed by a letter designation. Cables designated with the same number,
e.g. 122, 122A, 122B, etc. usually belong to the
same sub-system.
Colour code. The following colour codes are used in
. the wiring diagrams as well asin the comprehensive
wiring diagrams. The colour codes can also be used
in various combinations, e.g. BURD, GUVT, etc.
Code
Colour
BL
BR
GL
GN
GR
OR
Blue
Brown
Yellow
Green
Grey
Orange
Pink
Red
Black
Violet
White
RA
RD
SV
VL
VT
ABS
AC
AIC
Anti-lock Brake System

Air Conditioning
(Automatic Idling Control) Automatic adjustment of the engine idling speed
(Automatic Performance Control) Automatic
APC
control of the turbocharger Qoost pressure
AUT . Automatic transmission
Carburettor
C
Cabriolet (Convertible)
CAB
Cruise Control
CC
Continuous Injection
CI
CONY Convertible (Cabriolet)
(Driver) Driver's side
D
(Elektronische Zilndung mit Klopfkontrolle)
ElK
Breakerless ignition system with knock sensor
Injection engine
I
Intelligent 5MB Tester
ISAT
(Luftmassenmesser Hitzdraht) Air mass
LH
measuremep,-l>by means of a hot filament
LHD
, Left-hand d~ve
LHF
Left-hand front
LHR
Left-hand rear
LHS
Left-hand side
MAN
Manual gearbox
P
Passenger side, co-driver's slde
T
Turbocharged engine
TSI
Timing Service Instrument
RHD
Right-hand drive
RHF
Right-hand front
RHR
Right-hand rear
RHS
Right-hand side
Cross-sectional area of the conductor. The crosssectional area of the conductor is specified in square
mill imetres (mm 2 ). The current that the cable is capable of carrying is dependent on the cross-sectional
area of the conductor.
Saab900
Example: T8 indicates that the engine is turbocharged and has 8 valves

116 = 16-valve injection engine
3-D = two-door hatchback (Combi Coupe)
ngdlagram
spreads for a sub-system - in this
or lighting - is shown below, together
fions of the designations used, etc.
:therwise specified, switches are shown in
tiJated condition and relays in de-energised
.0I'1dition.
+30
I
LB
In the wiring diagrams, every sub-system

is generally shown from the appropriate
fuse in the electrical distribution box, up
to each consumer or sub-system, and
then to the appropriate earthing point
(chassis connection).
Most of the earthing points in the car

have a component number, and each of
rh~75 the various earthing points in each diagram is marked with the appropriate
number. The locations of the earthing
points with component numbers are
specified in the section of this Manual
entitled "Earth connections".
1:
73
The supply to each fuse is shown separately in the section entitled Positive
supply, which also deals with the electrical distribution box, ignition switch, etc.
of the car.
If "+30" for instance, is shown above a
fuse, this denotes that the supply from
the battery to the relevant fuse is described in the section entitled "Positive
supply, Distribution terminal +30".
Component number. Every component has an identity

number adjacent to the symbol for that particular
component on the wiring diagram. The same number
is also used in the comprehensive wiring diagram for
the car..ln addition, the component number is given:
inthe description of the location of the component
at the place in the car where the component is
located
on the appropriate exterior picture of the component.
Spread 1
APCsystem
Operatlon
Fault-tracing hints
The engine Is equipped with an Automalic Perlorm
Always lake the following mea5\Jres before fault-lrac-
anceControl (APe) system. Which enablestheenglne

to adjust itself automallcally 10 the grade of luel
ing in the APe S)'Slem:
supplied to it at any particular time.

The APe system is conlrolled by control unit 177.
which Is supplied 1+54) from fuse 10. The unit re.
ceives signals from various sensors. processes the
signals and then controls the boost pressure olllle
tulbochargervia solenoid valve 179.
1. Disconnect the connector from the conuol unit.

2.
DiSConnect the connector from the component

which is suspected to be fault)'.
3.
Use an ohmmeter to check the wifing ror any

open circuits. etc.
Th.".'r-----------------------I..
:;: A = crimped connectionlbran9h-off point directly in
V
the cable harness.
.....
The SISplifier 146 are fed continuously Into the con.

tern ami. On IhIt Mc:I.o:; nt Ihp. p.lp.ctril".al F:ipn.:>.lc ...
tIo!unlt.... utllllhf!nl".tU'IlmlF:lhA!<I\I/>f'Inirt""'I
.
...""."""
~""
The cable code consists of:

. e Item number of the cable (see under the heading
Cable codes on the preceding spread)
"",.
177
equip
byw.
Colour code of the cable, consisting of letter combinations in accordance with the table on the preceding spread
conta
boost
III
Cross-sectional area of the conductor in mm 2
Components and cables underlined with blue or enclosed within a blue frame are only included on cars
for a specific market, etc. The markets are specified
by abbreviations, e.g. CA for Canada,,,in accordance
with the list of abbreviations on page 2. (In this
example, component 233 is included only on cars
with the Cruise Control system.)
.
-187
."
$'11.5
Saab900
Introduction.
<Spread 2
Components
locations of components
1
22A
Earthingpoinlon the radiatOfcross-member
FusehoJder
in the electrical diSUibutionbol. lntheeo.

gine compartment. on the left-hand wheel
housing
29
.Brake light switch

al the brake pedal
59
2poleconneclor
inthe enginecompanmenl. oothe lefthand
wheel housing
93
EaMing poii'll on the lefthanlJ wheel hous-
ingmember
146
Amplifier for the elecuonic jgnnion system

in the engine compartment. forward ot the
lefthand wheel housing
152A
29poIe white conneclor
1S2e
29pole black connector

in the electrical distribution bOll. In the en
gine compartment, on the lefthand

housing The. tonneClors af
Knock sensor
on the engine. below the inlake manifold
-rtl.
. . ~~~
-".
179
Solenoid valve
'on Ihe radiator fan casing
180
Pressure transmitter
. 'under the fascia. to the left of the steering
187
Vacuum pump for Cruise Control

in Ihe engine compartment. forward of lhe
lefthand wheel hOUsing
233
Vacuum swilch
In the engine compartment. on the lefthand
wheel housing
COlum~
lbehind the knee shield)
Saab900
Introduction
Using a universal instrument for

fault-tracing
Measuring equipment
A voltmeter and an ohmmeter are suitable instruments for fault-tracing in the car.
Use a voltmeter for measuring the voltage at various
points in a circuit. If the voltmeter is of analog type, it
should have an internal resistance of at least
200000hmN.
The ohmmeter is used for carrying out measurements

in cable harnesses and on connectors, switches and
contacts. An ohmmeter must not be used for measurements on components or relays containing semiconductors, such as control units, time delay relays,
etc.
Since the ohmmeter incorporates a battery which
energises the cirClJi.tto be measured, the battery of
the car should be disconnected while measurement
is in progress. This will ensure that no current is
already flowingthrdtighthe relevant circuit and that
the correct readingwillbe obtained.
Voltage measurement
1. Connect the negative lead of the voltmeter to a
reliable earthing point on the car or directly to
the negative pole of the battery.
2.
Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the

point in the circuit at which you wish to measure
the voltage.
3.
If a reading is obtained on the voltmeter, this

indicates that current is flowing to the relevant
point. The voltage reading should not deviate by
more than 1 volt from the measured battery voltage. A deviation greater than 1 volt indicates a
fau It. One of the reasons may be poor contact at
a connection to some component or in a connector. Carry out further measurements in the
circuit to pin-point the location of the fault.
Checking the voltage drop

This measurement is carried out to determine
whether the voltage drop is too high, e.g. along a
cab!~orapross a switch.
1.
Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the

end of the cable or the side of the switch which
is nearest to the battery.
2.
Connect the negative lead of the voltmeter to

the other end of the cable.
3.
When the circuit is energised, i.e. when current

flows through it, the voltmeter will show the
difference in voltage between the two points. If
the circuit is in good condition, the voltage drop
should not be greater than about 1 V. In simple
circuits, such as across connectors and short
cables, the voltage dr.op should not exceed
about 0.5 V.
Saab900
Introduction
(lhecking for short-circuit to earth
,rt.{Sll1g a voltmeter
Remove the fuse which has blown and disconnect the load.
Connect the voltmeter across the fuse terminal
pins in the fuse box.
Move the relevant cable harness while observing the voltmeter. Start at the electrical distribution box and then continue out towards the relevant components/load. If a voltmeter reading is
obtained, this indicates that the cable is
short-circuited to earth.
Using an ohmmete
1.
Hold the ohmmeter cables in contact with one

another. Adjust the ohmmeter until the reading
isOohm.
2.
Remove the fuse which has blown, and disconnect the load and the battery.
3.
Connect one of the ohmmeter leads to the fuse

terminal pin on the load side.
4.
Connect the other ohmmeter h~ad to a reliable

earthing point in the car.
5.
Move the relevant cable harness while observing the ohmmeter. Start at the electrical distribution box and then move out towards the appropriate components/load. Ifthe ohmmeter reads
infinite resistance, there is no short circuit. On
the other hand, if it reads low resistance or none
at all, this indicates that the cable is short-circuited to earth.
Checking for open-circuit

Use an ohmmeter
1.
Hold the ohmmete"r cables in contact with one

another. Adjust the ohmmeter until the reading
isOohm.
2.
Disconnect the battery of the car.
3.
Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one end of

the cable to be tested.
4.
Connect the other ohmmeter lead to the other

end of the cable.
5.
If the ohmmeter reads a low resistance or none

at all, this indicates that the cable is in good
condition.
Saab900
10
Introduction
Connectors
The table below shows examples ofthe connectors
included in the car. If a new connector must be fitted
in the engine compartment, bear innifhd that it must
be of hose-proof design.
Component
number-
Number' .
ofplqs
The three connectors designated 152A, 1528 and

152C are discussed under the heading Positive supply, Electrical distribution box.
Appearance
Not hose-proof
57
58
12
59
60
67
98
10
122
123
29
29
29
Saab900
Hose-proof
Introduction
Crimped connections
To reduce the number of connectors and improve the
contact properties, many connections are crimped
(distribution block 192). An illustration of the appearance of a crimped connector and the symbol
used for it on the wiring diagrams are shown to the
right.
Saab900
11
12
Positive Supply
II
The + 12 V supply of the cari'~r;;distrjbuted to the

various consumers, etc. acrossan'electrical distribution box.
Electrical distribOliioi;j,lI'iii.
The electrical distribution box is easily. accessible
and is located under the bonnet, on theleft~hand
wheel housing. All ofthe fuses and mosfofthe relays
are located in the electrical distribution box.
e supply
To enable the~e,~~r~e connectors to
tinguished, they are co.lour-coded.
be easily dis-
152A = White
152B = Red
152C = Black
The picture below shows the locations of the pins in
the connectors, viewed from the interior of the car.
Item L in the drawing ofthe electrical distribution box

is the socket for the Timing Service Instrument (TSI)
and item M is the holder for spare fuses.
FiV~ble harnesses are connected to the electrical
distri, ution box. The front and rear cable harnesses
in e engine compartment are connected directly to
the electrical distribution box, whereas the cables to
the fascia and to the rear of the car are connected
across three 29-pole connectors designated 152A,
152B and 152C. These are permanently mounted on
the bulkhead between the engine compartment and
the interior of the car.
Saab900"
Positive supply
13
Relays
The following tables show the locations of the relays
in the electrical distribution box. In addition to the
relays in the electrical distribution box, several other
relays are located in different places in the car. The
locations of these relays are specified in the corresponding sub-system descriptions.
Europe and other markets
Relay
location
A, B
C
D
E
Component
number
8
113
Function
Remarks
Headlamp full beam and

dipped beam
Heater element for the
rear window
With timing function on certain

markets
F, G
21
102
Ignition switch
Fuel pump
102
Fuel pump (1989 model)

Radiator fan (1990 model)
156
155
68
AC compressor
Radiator fan for AC
Horn
T8, T8 Lambda (1989 model)

18, 18 Lambda (1990 model)
18, 18 Lambda (M1989)
With timing function for certain
markets (1990 model)
Air conditioning
Air conditioning
USA, Canada and 1989 for Japan
Relay
location
A, B
Component
number
8
113
107
21
174
156
155
68
E
F
H
Remarks
Function
Headlamp full beam and

dipped beam
Heater element for the
rear window
Extra fog lamps
Ignition switch
Daylight driving lights (CA)
AC compressor
Radiator fan for AC
Horn
Saab900
With timing function on certain

markets
Air conditioning
Air conditioning
14
Positive supply
fuses
The locations of the fuses are shown in the illustration of the electrical distribution box.
Fuse Rating Function

No.
Fuse Rating Function

No.
1
2
3
4
4
5
10A
30A
15A
10A
20A
15A
6
7
30A
15A
10A
9
10
30A
10A
11
12
30A
20A
13
20A
14
15
15A
15A
16
17
18
15A
15A
10A
19
10A
20
15A
21
15A
22
10A
23
10A
24
25
26
10A
30A
25A
Lambda sensor preheating

Rear window regulators, Convertible
Ignition system
Dim dipped beam (GB) (1989:model)
Daylight driving lights (CA)
Windscreen wipers, head lamp wipers,
seat belt reminder lamp, buzzer for
coolant temperature
Air conditioner (AC)
Direction indicators, tachometer,
warning lamps for battery charging
and choke/check engine, oil pressure
warning lamps and (1990 model) SRS
Airbag
Headlamp wipers, rear-view mirrors,
Cruise Control
Ventilation fan
APC system, ABS system (1989
model), headlamp beam control
(1990 model)
Window regulators, sunroof
Electric heating pads for the front
seats, delayed interior lights, top actuation (Conv.), seat-belt warning
(buzzer)
Reversing lights, cigarette lighter
lighting, passive seat belts (1989
model)
Right-hand head lamp, full beam
Left-hand headlamp, full beam and
full beam warning lamp
Right-hand head lamp, dipped beam
Left-hand head lamp, dipped beam
Right-hand parking light, right-hand
rear light, number plate illumination,
right-hand side marker lights
Left-hand parking light, left-hand rear
light, left-hand side marker light
Radio, corner lights (US, CA, 1989
model JP), burglar alarm (1990
model), burglar alarm for Conv.
(1989/90 model)
Rear fog lights, rear fog-light warning
lamp, extra fog lamps (US, CA, 1989
model JP)
Fuel system, temperature gauge,
handbrake warning lamp, warning
lamp for foot brake and ABS, fuel level
gauge, speed sensor
Lighting'for controls, glove compartment illumination
Central locking, burglar alarm
Radiator fan
Horn
27
28
15A
15A
29
30
31
20A
20A
15A
310D 25A
310P 25A
Hazarcj.warflibg Ii ~bts
Interior lighting, clock, radio, electrically operateda~ri.~I, luggage compartment illumination
Heater element for the rear window
Fuel pump
Brake lights, ABS system (1990
model)
Passive seat belts (1989 model)
Passive seat belts (1989 model)
ThE! fuses are of blade type and, together with the

connectors used, cause a lower voltage drop in the
system than the earlier fuse type. In addition, the
fuses are more resistant to corrosion.
Colour-coding of the blade fuses:

Colour
Rating
Red
Blue
Yellow
Transparent
Green
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
Checking the blade fuses
Every blade fuse has test tappings, so that it can be

checked withoufthe need for removing it from the"
fuse box. If both tappings are live, the fuse is intact.
Saab900
When the fuse has been removed, it will be clearly

visible whether or not the fuse wire has melted.
Positive supply
Extra electrical distribution box

(Convertible)
15
Ignition switch
The ignition switch has four positions:
The Saab 900 Convertible is equipped with an extra

electrical distribution box on the left-hand side, under the back seat.
L
P
o
S
Relay locations
The table below shows the ignitiO'n switch terminals

which are live in the various positions of the ignition
switch. The incoming supply (+30) from the battery
is connected to terminal 30.
A Relay for automatic window-r~gulator function

(287)
8 Relay for delayed interior lighting (151)
C Relay for Convertible top operation (277)
D Relay for Convertible top operation (278)
E Relay for seat belt/ignition key warning buzzer
(82)
F Relay for burglar alarm ,(313)
Locked position
Parked position
Drive position
Start position
Position
Circuit closed
between ...
30-X
30-15
30-54
30-50
30 S1)
1) Although all ignition switches have terminal S,

this terminal is only used on cars destined for the
U.S.A. and Canadian markets.
Example: Terminal 15 is live in the drive and start (S)
positions.
The picture below shows the terminals 'ofthe ignition
switch.
Ignition switch and positive

supplies
The supplies provided in the car are designated "+",
followed by a digit combination. Some Of these supplies are live only on certain occasions, such as when
the engine is being started or when the car is travelling.
The positive supplies are as follows: +30, +X, +15,
+54, +50 and +S. The +30 supply is taken directly
from the battery, and the components supplied from
"+30" are therefore permanently energised. The
other supplies are taken from the ignition switch and
are dependent on the ignition switch setting. Note
that the numerals In the designations have nothing to
do with the system voltage.
U.S.A. and Canadian markets
On these cars, terminal S is used for the ignition key

warning system. The terminal is always energised
when the key is in the ignition switch, regardless of
its position.
.
Saab900
16
Positive supply
Distribution temllnals
The followi ngfour spreads show the consumers/components that are supplied from the following distribution terminals:
Distribution terminal
+30
+X
+15
+54
The various consumers are supplied eitherd irectly or

across fuses.
. .
The wiring diagrams show all components which are
supplied from each distribution terminal. Sorriecomponents are thus not included on certain markets/
versions.
No wiring diagram is shown for distribution terminal
+50, since this is used only for a few sub-systems.
The terminal is live only when the ignition switch is in
the start position, and this is described in the corresponding sub-system description. For particulars of
distribution terminal +S, see the section entitled
"Instruments and warning systems - Seat-belt and
ignition switch warning".
;~
-r
;~
rj:
Saab900
Saiab900
18
Positive supply
RD 25.0
RD 16.0
10 VT 6.0
10
VT 4.0
823 GR 2.5
823A RD 2.5
30
310P
21
M89: US
290
CAB
ABS
15~
r--------t---------+----j)5~__u10
..
.l3
'-'
'"'-'
on
'"
152A
>-__7,--",-GR,-,2"".5~_-P29
20 GR 1.5
280 GR 1.5
7 GR 2.5
30
30
73
'"
'"'-'
'"on
'"
'"
'-'
:I:
20
on
....
0
'"'-'
'"
'-'
on
'-'
w
on
'"
a::
'-'
...on
a::
C!
a::
'-'
'-'
'"
on
US,CA,
M89: JP
015H 001
A
Saab900
Positive supply
19
'0pemtlon
Fault-tracing hints
The positive supply is taken from battery 1 directly to

starter motor 4, and then further to B+ on alternator
2 and to distribution block 75.
1.
Check the battery voltage.
2.
Check the terminals of distribution block 75 and

29-pole connectors 152.
From distribution block 75, supplies are then taken

to the following components and to fuses 24 - 31.
3.
Checkthatthe supply to each component is live.
e Ignition switch relay 21
4.
Check the relevant wiring.
Timing service instrument socket 73

Fuel pump relay 102, control unit 200 and main
relay 229 for the' LH fuel injection system on cars
powered by the 16-valve engine. (On cars with the
8-valve fuel injection engine, fuel pump relay 102
is connected instead to fuse 30.)
CD
Lighting relay 8
CD
Light switch 10, across 29-pole red connector

152B
CD
Ignition switch 20, across 29-pole white connector 152A.
CD
Fuses for the anti-lock brakes (ABS) 302 A.
CD
Fuses 310P and 310D forthe passive seat belts on

cars destined for the US market (1989 model)
CD
Fuse 290 (for the Convertible top)
On cars destined for the USA, Canada and Japan

(1989 model), fuse 21 for the extra fog lamps is also
connected to this distribution block.
Saab900
20
Positive supply
Distribution termlnal-+.It
BL 16.0
BL 25.0
211
RD 16.0
75
152A
5 GR 4.0
7 GR 2.5
29
7 GR 2.5
20
to
N
0
a::
I")
152A
o
a::
oo
I")
30B RD 1.5
30B RD 1.5
30A RD 1.5
30A RD 1.5
o
a::
o
I")
678
RD 0.75
5 122
289
M89: US,CA,JP
015H 483
A
Saab900
Positive supply
21
Operation
fault-tracing hints
The positive supply is taken from battery 1 to ignition

switch 20, across distribution block 75 and 29-pole
white connector 152A.
1.
2.
Check the terminals of distribution block 75.
3.
Check the terminals in 29-pole connector 152.
4.
Check that the supply to each component is live.
5.
When the ignition switch is set to the parked, drive or

start position, terminals 30 and X of the ignition
switch will be interconnected. The +X supply will
then be connected to fuses 20 and 23.
On certain markets, the +X supply is also used for
the burglar alarm (connector 289) (1989 model).
Saab900.
Positive supply
22
75
i--!'R!!.0--!1!l'6.0~
-< )-'7'--G""R'-'2"-'.5'--_-b294-_~~_.e;:.:._::L~~'__
-E;=::a-~5!..:G~R!...:4~.0~
__
_,
20
-l!23""BUG~N!LV!!..!T..Jle;;.5'-----~;:====~>-lR.Q!!.l":!lll_t
123 GN T 1.5
28et-......!f"'"--"'!L!!..!.-~--< '>-_~~:c!.LJd.---./
123K
GN/VT 1.0
1230
GN/VT 1.0
-I
A'-
'~i
~I\
C8. 18, 18A,

T16,T16A.M89:T8.T8>'
1~~;eVT
1 6
SE,FI,EU,GB,
ME,FE,AU,
M90: JP
12(M89)
123P(M90)
GR/VT 1.5
73
128 GR VT 0.5
918
GN/VT 0.5
116. 116A
~~;eVT
1.5
1.5
.M.@Q
M90
~~.....Iw~
MS9
,..:
123M
GN/VT 1.0
146
390
146
176
47A,47B,47C,
47F,47M,47Q
320
US,CA, M89: JP
M90(T): SE,FI,EU,
GB,ME,FE,JP
159
159
+15
+15
159
546
GN/VT 1.0
667
ci
6~H-,:-.2--~~:;
26
"l 1
:J:::;
200
200
..(w
.... w
u"-
viw
140
CB
MS9
u:::;
uin.
:J ...,
Saab900
+15
61:]
123A
546
GN/VT 0.75
0:
-,<
306
AU, M89: SE,FI,EU,

GB,ME,FE,M90(I,C):
SE,FI,EU,GB,ME,
FE,JP
331
22122A
C)
~ ~
838
GN/VT 0.75
200
BL RO 0.75
123N
GN/VT 0.75(M89)
GN/VT 0.5(M90)
123F
GN RO 0.75
102
152C
Positive supply
23
Operation
Fault-tracing hints
The positive supply is taken from battery 1 to ignition

switch 20, across distribution block 75 and 29-pole
white connector 152A in the electrical distribution
box.
1.
2.
Check the terminals of distribution block 75 and

29-pole connectors 152.
3.
Set the ignition switch to the drive position and

check that the supply from fuse 22 is live.
4.
When the ignition switch is in the drive or start position, the +15 supplywill betaken from terminal 15 of
the ignition switch to the following components:
.. Light switch 10, across 12-poleconnector 58
.. Fuses 3 and 22 in fuse holder 22A
CD
Timing service instrument socket 73
Control unit 306 for the passive seat belts, across

3-pole connector 57 (1989 carS for the USA market).
The following components are then supplied from
fuse 3. Some of the components are included only on
certain car variants.
5
146
176
320
390
Ignition coil
Amplifier for the electronic ignition system
Control unit for the EZK ignition system
Ignition coil with integrated amplifier (1989
model)
Modulating valve, LH 2.4 Lambda (1990
model: UC)
The following components are then supplied from

fuse 22, across distribution terminal 159. Some of
the components are included only on cars for certain
markets, on cars with 8 or 16 valve engines, etc.
Time-delay relay 26 for the radiator fan (1989
model)
.. One half of the combined instrument 47 across
the red 29-pole connector 1528 in the electrical
distribution box
Relay 156 for the AC compressor
Time-delay relay 113 for the electrically heated
rear window
Carburettor float chamber valve 114
Carburettor fuel shut-off valve 140
Control unit 200 for the LH fuel system (6-pole
connector 67 in the engine compartment, to the
right beside the air intake)
Fuel pump relay 102 (18, 1989 T8). On turbocharged cars, the relay is connected across boost
pressure switch 144.
Saab900
24
Positive supply
75
+ I-'R"",D~1,-,6,,-,.0<---
SL 16.0
-t>_-<k---"'-='---'--"~(~"'!-:~.t;;
10
VT 6.0
St. 25.0
211
30
86
11
VT 2.5
880
118
VT 2.5
GR 0.5
'J
llH
VT 2.5
l1C
VT 2.5
11G
11K
11L
VT 2.5 VT 2.5 VT 2.5
11M
VT 2.5
15
117C
VT 0.5
86
26
68
M90: US.CA.
ME FE AU JP
015H 503
B
75
+ I--'R.;;;D,-,-,16,,-,.0~
SL 16.0
152A
-D_-eJ,-....:5::......::G,-,-R....:4"-,.0'---O..-...:.7_G",-R,---",2.",5-D29
7 GR 2.5
10
VT 6.0
BL 25.0
20
211
M90: ABS
30
86
M90: US.CA,
FE,AU,JP
11
B80
GR 0.5
llH
VT 2.5
VT 2.5
15
,.---"f--'11
26
VT 2.5
11 VT 2.5
liE
l1F. l1G
11K
VT 2.5 VT 2.5 VT 2.5 VT 2.5
llL
VT 2.5
117C
VT 0.5
86
68
Saab900
Positive supply
25
fJ)peration
Fault-tracing hints
The positive supply is taken from battery 1 across

distribution block 75 to:
1.
2.
Check the terminals of distribution block 75,

and check that terminal 30 of ignition switch
relay 21 is live.
3.
Set the ignition switch to the drive position and

check that ignition switch relay 21 operates.
Terminal 87 of the relay should then be live.
4.
Check that fuses 4 -13 in fuse holder 22A are

live (fuses 2 and 4 -13 on the Convertible).
5.
-the contacts (terminal 30) of ignition switch relay

21
terminal 30 of ignition switch 20, across white
29-pole connector 152A.
When the ignition switch is set to the drive position,
terminals 30 and 54 of the ignition switch will be
interconnected. Current will then flow through the
coil of ignition switch relay 21 across whUe 29-pole
connector 152A, and the relay will be energised. The
relay contacts will close, and currentwill flowthrough
the three distribution blocks (crimped connections)
to fuses 4-13 in fuse holder 22A (fuses 2 and 4-13
on the Convertible).
The contacts of horn relay 68 and (1990 model)
time-delay relay 26 for the radiator fan will also' be
energised when the ignition switch relay has been
energised.
Anti-lock brakes (ABS) on the 1990 models
On cars with the ASS anti-lock brakes, fuse 10A in

ASS fuse holder 302A will also be energised from the
white 29-pole connector 152A when the ignition
switch is set to the drive position.
Saab900
Earth connections
conn"".. . . . .Ions
III
General
The car has certain earthing points which have "component numbers" and other earthing points at which
the component is earthed directly to the chassis,
such as temperature transmitters, oi I pressure transmitters, etc. The locations of the earthing points with
component numbers are the same in the Combi
Coupe, the Sedan and the Convertible.
3
7
9
65
93
117
158
201
211
257
300
334
400
Earthing point in the fascia

Earthing point on the radiator cross-member
Earthing point in the luggage compartment
Earthing point under the back seat
Earthing point on the amplifier
Earthing point between the ignition switch
and the handbrake lever
Negative distribution terminal in the electrical distribution box
Earthing point, engine (two)
Earthing point, gearbox
Earthing point, alternator bracket
Earthing point, brake unit
Earthing point for the airbag electronic unit
Redudndant earthing point for the airbag
electronic unit
The battery is earthed by means of a 16 mm2 conductor to earthing point 7. The engine is connected
directly to the negative pole of the battery by means
of a 25 mm2 conductor.
From earthing point 7, a cable then runs to distribution ~rminal158 in the electrical distribution box on
the left-hand front wheel housing.
Saab900
27
28
Earth connections
Earthing point 3, fascia

312A
sv
SE, FI, EU, GB, M90: JP
O;~~I 31
10
sv 0.75L.!.124
373 SV 0.75
ME, FE, AU
5161
312A
373 SV 0.75
312A SV 0.75
US, CA, M89: JP

72 SV 0.75
69 SV 0.75
43B SV 0.75
193 SV 0.75
193A SV 0.75
460 SV 0.75
CA
313 SV 0.75
615 SV 1.0
614 SV 0.5
409 SV 0.75
3186 SV 0.75
(~V 0.75
148
48
215r_
$V 0.75L2116
~6::5=SV====,0.==75=-_153
SE, FI, EU, ME,

US, CA, JP
L..--"6.=..2.=.sv,-=0.,-,,75:-_
154
-;:::==="7"" 48
r~120'.8-",S-,-V-",0.",75,,--
215r.
sv 0.75L2116
65 SV 0.75
62 S"/0.75
GB, FE, AU
31BB
SV 0.75
153
154
148
0.=.......=
I
1318
SV 0.75
160
[~123
318A : :
1----'-'10~7A"--""SV~2."'-5
;;r
36
5_L:~1 74
OlSH 272
Saab900
M89;,J,e.)
Earth connections
29
Components connected
Earthing point 3 is located to the left of the steering
wheel, below the fascia, behind the knee shield (on
the front side of the instrument cross-member, behind the flasher relay).
The following components are connected (by means
of screw terminals) to this earthing point. Some of
the components Iisted below are fitted only to cars of
certain versions or for certain markets.
10
18
23
25
36
38
47
48
49
74
83
88
98
110
116
124
125
127
131
132
143
Light switch
Combined instrument lighting
Flasher relay
Hazard warning light switch
Motor for the ventilation fan
Motor for the AC recirculation valve
Combined instrument
Cigarette lighter
Clock
Resistor (half-speed) for the ventilation fan
Relay for intermittent operation of the windscreen wipers
Switch for extra fog lamps (US, CA)
10-pole connector
Tachometer
Switch for the electrically heated rear window
Switch for the left-hand electrically operated rear-view mirror
Switch for the right-hand electrically operated rear-view mirror
Motor for the right-hand electrically operated rear-view mirror (across 4-pole connector 123 in the engine compartment at
the right-hand door pillar and in the
right-hand door)'
Electronic control unit for Cruise Control
Sensor for the speed transmitter
Recirculation switch, AC
Saab900
148
153
154
160
161
169
207
Ashtray illumination (across a 2-pole connector)

Lighting for the cigarette lighter
Lighting for the heater controls
Switch for glove compartment illumination'
Switch for the rear fog lights
Switch, AC
Electrically-heated rear-view mirrors (US"
CA)
30
Earth connections
Earthing poin t 7, radiator cross-member
28 SV 1.5
11 , 12 (LHS)
29 SV 1.5
....
11
12 (RHS)
149A SV 0.5
13, 118 (RHS)

149 SV 0.75
"
2 8 (RHF)
2 34 (RHS)
'.
..
149B SV 0.5
119 (RHS)
149 SV 0.5
13 (RHS) A
2 8 (RHF )59
112 SV 2.5
sv
37
889 SV 0.5
3 9 (M90)
118A SV 1.0
40 _
118 SV 1.0
40
92 SV 0.75
57
99 SV 0.75
57
99A SV 0.75
r;:;"1
63
SV
31
66 (LHS)
SV
31
66 (RHS)
472 SV 1.0
85 (LHS)
470 SV 1.0
85 (RHS)
3 SV 2.5
158
59
112A SV 2.5
SV
172
482 SV 1.5
179
280 (M90)
281 (M90)
785B SV 0.75
785 SV 0.75
785C SV 0.75
152C
785A SV 0.75
[23] 785A SV 0.75
BL 16.0
BL 25.0
r.'77
r; 7211
Saab900
282 (M90)
Earth connections
31
Earthing point 7 is located belowthe radiator, on the
right-hand side of the radiator cross-member. The
following components are connected (by means of
screw terminals) to this earthing point. Some of the
components listed below are fitted only to cars of
Negative distribution terminal 158 in the electrical
distribution box is also connected to earthing
point 7.
.
Connections marked with "A" apply to cars without
integrated bumpers.
1
11
12
13
28
37
39
40
63
66
85
118
119
158
172
179
211
234
280
Battery
Headlamp full beam
Headlamp dipped beam
Parking lights
Direction indicator lamp, right-hand front
Radiatorfan motor (across 2-pole connector
59 at the radiator)
Temperature switch for: radiator fan (1990
model)
.
Horn
Washer motor
Headlamp wiper motor (across 3-pole connector 57 in the engine compartment at the
corresponding motor) .
Extra fog lamps
Corner lights
Side reversing light (RHS)
Negative distribution terminal
Radiator fan for the AC (across 2-pole connector 59 at the radiator fan motor)
Solenoid valve for the APC system
Earthing point on the gearbox
Side marker lights (RHS)
Motor for left-hand head lamp beam control
(1990 model)
Saab900
281
282
Motor for left-hand head lamp beam control

(1990 model)
Switch for head lamp beam control (across
black 29,;pole connector 152C in the electrical distribution box in the engine compart-'
ment) (1990 model)
32
Earth connections
Earthing point 9, luggage compartment

57
191 SV 0.75
~SV
46
~~J.,_ ,
~sv
101 (M89: 18,T8, T16: ME,FE)

(M90: 18,18'\)
c:::........:::
262 SV 2.5
262A
SV 1.5
59
262 SV 2.5
1103 (18,18'\,M89: T8, T8,\, T16, T16'\)1

1323 (116,116'\,M90: T16, T16,\)
.
. '----
3-0 , 5-0
1890 SV 1.0
14, 30, 32 (LHS)

27 (LHR)
189E sv 1.0
14, 30, 32 (RHS)

28 (RHR)
US, CA, JP,

AU, ME, FE
1890 SV 0.75
M89
14, 30 (LHS)
189E
SV 0.75
L~60
109
189
SV 0.75
1890 SV 0.75
189E
SV 0.75
L~60
14, 33 (LHS)
109
M89
189
SV 0.75
15 (RHS)
18ge
SV 0.75
15 (LHS)
189B
SV 0.75
1890 SV 0.75
211A SV 2.5
~
c:::........:::
211A SV 1.5
1/189A SV 0.75
)b
109
(M]Q)
14, 30/33 (RHS)
2-0 , 4-0
189 SV 1.0
14, 14, 30, 30/33 , 32 (LHS)
.......---- 27 (LHR)
189
SV 1.5
14, 14, 30, 30/33 , 32 (RHS)

28 (RHR)
015H 253
A
r. 79
Saab900
Earth conn~ctiPrt~
Earthing point 9 is located under the spare wheel
hatch in the luggage compartment, at the extreme
rear on the centre member. The following components are connected (by means of screw terminals) to
this earthing point. Some of the components listed
below are fitted only to cars of certain versions or for
certain markets.
46
101
103
323
Fuel level transmitter (across 3-pole connector 57, under the luggage compartment
floor, beside the transmitter)
Fuel feed pump (across 2-pole connector 59
under the luggage compartment floor)
Fuel pump (across 2-pole connector 59 Under the luggage compartment floor)'
Fuel pump with integrated feed pump
3-D and 5-D cars
The tailgate lighting is earthed to the tailgate which,

in turn, is earthed to earthing point 9 across cable
211A SV 2.5 (across 3-pole connector 57 in the
luggage compartment, at the left-hand air outlet).
14
15
27
28
30
32
33
109
Rear lights
Number plate illumination
Direction indicator lamps, left-hand
.Direction indicator lamps, right-hand
Brake lamps
Reversing lamps
Rear fog lights
High-level brake light (across single-pole
connector 60 inthetailgate, atthe left-hand
rear light cluster) (1989 model)
2-D and 4-D cars
14
27
28
30
32
33
Rear lights
Direction indicator lamps, right-hand
Brake lamps
Reversing lamps
Rear fog lights
Saab900
34
Earth connections
Earthing point 65, back seat and

earthing point 300, b~ke unit (1990 model)
MS.9.
'853,SV 0.5
59
852 SV 0.5
59
853
sit
0.5
852 SV 0.5
60
SV 0.5
2080
60
SV 0.5
208P
824 SV 1.0
804 SV 0.75
BOB SV 0.75
817 SV 0.5
B31 SV 0.5
13
306
SV 0.5
122
5
}39 7O
SV 0.5
SV 0.5
122
5
}307P
SV 0.5
SV 0.75
122
5
}3080
SV 0.75
SV 0.75
122
5
}308P
SV 0.75
819 SV 2.5
87A
B19A
SV 2.5 87A
829 SV 2.5
B7A
B29A
SV 2.5 87A
3110
3120
311P
312P
65
M.9.O.
716 SV 2.5
2 91
717 SV 0.75
'85
717A SV 0.75
743 SV 0.75
746 SV 4.0
745B SV 0.75
-...,
292
B7
2 94
2 97
3 038
59
998 SV 0.5
20
3 97
742 SV 1.0
m300
n765
t-_ _7,-"4~2B"--""SV,-0,,,,.7::.5,--
--,2,;,..
295
t-_ _7,-"4~2A~SV,-0",,.7::.5,--
---,3L
299
742 SV 1.0
65
300
Saab900
0151-1 242
A
A_..J
,/
Earth connectieJ'1s .
Earthing point 65 is located under the back seat, in
the centre. The following components are connected
to this earthing point. For passive seat belts (1989
model).
208D
208P
306
307D
307P
308D
308P
311D
311P
312D
312P
Door lock, reed switch, driver's door

Door lock, reed switch, cq-driver's door
Logic box for passive seat belts
Belt reel for passive seat belts, driver's side
Belt reel for passive seat belts, co-driver's
side
Motor with limit switches for passive seat
belts, driver's side
belts, co-driver's side
Motor relay for passive seat belts, driver's
side
Motor relay for passive seat belts, codriver's side
side
For ABS anti-lock brakes (1990 model)

291
Control unit
System relay
292
294 . Pressure switch
297
Hydraulic pump motor
3038 Diode
397
Diagnostic test socket
Earthing point 300 is located on the front ofthe brake
unit and, in turn, is earthed at earthing point 65
(1990 model). The following components are connected to this earthing point:
295
299
ABS master valve

ABS brake fluid level sensor
Saab900
36
Earth connections
Earthing point 93, amplifier and

earthing point 300, brake unit (1989 model)
148 SV 0.5
13, 118 (LHS)

13 (LHS) A
27 (LHF)~
148A SV 0.5
597 SV 0.5
31
148A SV 0.5
27 (LHF)
234 (LHS)
1488 SV 0.5
119 (LHS)
123
IQIQI
648A SV 1.5
648 SV 1.5
145
2
Cllf2.
CA
116.1)
146 (M90: 116, 11 60)
r- -...,
393 SV 1.5
392 SV 0.5
6{ 390
ON 0.5
391 BR 0.5
('113
's
487 SV 1.5
716 SV 2.5
146
16
\,
M89
26 (M89 US
I
I
I
C8, 18, 18A, T16,

T16A,M8 9: T8, T8A
L:..._......I
177
291
717 SV 0.75
OJ.6_ 116A
85 - - ,
717A SV 0.75
743 SV 0.75
294
746 SV 4.0
297
7458 SV 0.75
I
..J
292
87A_
3038
742 SV 1.0
rh 300
14793
7428 SV 0.75
742A SV 0.75
295
299
742 SV 1.0
rf, 93
147300
015H 036
A
Saab900
MRS TR
TRA)
Earth connections
Earthing point 93 is located at the left-hand wheel
housing, beside the amplifier for the electronic ignition system.
The following components are connected to this
earthing point. Some of the components are only
fitted to cars of certain versions or for certain markets.
Connections marked with "A" apply to cars without
integrated bumpers.
13
26
27
118
119
145
146
177
234
291
292
294
297 .
3038
Parking lights, LHS

Time-delay relay for radiator fan
Direction indicator lamp, LHF
Corner lamp, LHS
Side reversing lamp, LHS
ElK test tapping
.Amplifier for electronic ignition system
Control unit for APC system
Side marker lights, LHS
Control unit for the ASS system (1989
model)
ASS system relay (1989 model)
ASS pressure switch (1989 model)
ASS hydraulic pump motor (1989 model)
Diode for the ASS system (1989 model)
Earthing point 300 is located on the front of the brake

unit and is connected to earthing point 93 (1989
model). The following components are connected to
this earthing point:
295
299
ASS master valve

ASS brake fluid level sensor
Saab900
37
38
Earth connections
earthing point 117, between the Ignition

switch and the handbrake lever
168 SV 075
141 SV 1.0
57
r;;"1
57
141 SV 1.0
64
"-
53
254
141C
sv
1.0
121
'-=----=-'
141A SV 0.5
98
10
141A SV 0.5
141 SV 1.0
64} A
141C SV 1.0
252
121
232 SV 0.75
31
82 ( US, CA, ME, M89: JP)
656 SV 0.5
31
151
456A SV 1.5
456~G} 162
SV 1.5
456C SV 1.5
(T16, T16'\,M89: T8, T8,\)

(116,\: US, CA, AU,M89: Jp)
456~~} 163
SV 1.5 8
456 SV 1.5
IA.
iV'
456K SV 1.5
456E SV 1.5
189
456~~} 190
SV 1.5 8
456G SV 1.5
456~~} 191
SV 1.5 8
510 SV 1.0
175
2A
~~1 15
r:
SV 1.0
501
SV 1.0
57
3
501
BR 1.0
592~G} 181
592 SV 2.5
SV 2.5
592 SV 0.75
501A SV 1.0
24
57R
3
501 BR 1.0
57R
SV
181
(CAB)
183 (RHO) .
...0.-......
341 SV 1.5
343 SV 0.75
--=-go
342 SV 1.5
::-:roo
}267
677 SV 0.75
675 SV 0.75
682 SV /GR 0.75
288 (US, CA, M89: JP)

122
289 (US, CA, M89: JP)
20
30
r. 7117
313 (CAB)
015H 233
A
Saab900
57
3
SV
183 (LHO)
Earth connections
39
183
Earthing point 117 is located between the ignition

switch and the handbrake lever.
The front seat must be removed before access can be
gained to the earthing point.
The following components are connected to this
earthing point (at the rear gear-lever mounting).
Some of the components are only fitted to cars of
189
Connections marked with "A" apply to non-adjustable, electrically-heated front seats.
191
53
57
57R
59
64
82
98
121
122
151
152A
162
163
175
181
Interior lighting switch

3-pole connector
3-pole connector for the central locking system (RHD)
2-pole connector
Heating pad with thermostat (across 2-pole
connector 59 under the corresponding front
seat)
Seat belt/ignition key warning relay
10-pole connector
Seat switch for the heating pad (across 2pole connector 59, under the right-hand
front seat)
8-pole connector
Time-delay relay for delayed interior lighting
White 29-pole connector
Switch for the driver's door electric window
regulator
Switch for the co-driver's door electric window regulator
Electronic unit for the central locking system
Switch for the electrically operated top/sunroof
190
252
254
267
288
289
313
Saab900
Key switch for the central locking system,

RH drive cars (across 3-pole connectors 57R
in the rigl1t-hand front door and forward of
the right-hand A-pillar, beside the upper .
hinge)
Switch for the rear-door electric window regulators
Switch for the left-hand rear electric window
regulator
Switch for the right-hand rear electric window regulator
Rheostat for the driver's seat heating pad
Temperature sensor for the driver's seat
heating pad
Radio connections (10-pole connector 98)
Burglar alarm switch (US)
Burglar alarm connector (US) (8-pole connector 122)
Burglar alarm relay (CAB)
40
Earth connectioRS
Negative distribution terminal 158, in the

electrical distribution box
2.5
3 SV
13
90
0.5
SV
192
85 21
0.5
SV
42
1.5
SV
281
31
0.75
SV
81
SV
0.75
82
SV
0.75
62
2 73
89
90
515
SV
0.75
31
410
SV
0.5
31 106 ~
410
SV
0.5
31
104 (M89: 18, T8: ME,FE)
106
41O~1
0.5
31
SV
212
SV
138
(M89: T8A)
.
.
3~~85 113
0.5
SV
SV
0.5
31
26~~
8
0.5
85
41~r--
(CA)
174
SV 0.5
31 102 (18,18A,M89: T8,T8A)
42~1107 (M89: 116A, T16A: US,CA,JP)
SV 0.5
I
113A
SV 0.5
SV
113A
314
SV
SV
420
0.5
0.75
314
SV
86
155
--
85 155 (M90: T16, T16A:

SE,FI,EU,GB,JP,ME,FE)
0.5
123
1
156
0.75
123
3
::C
015H 223
A
126
207 CUS,CA)
854
SV
0.5
30- .,
854~Ck85_.J1259
sv 0.5
571
SV
0.75.
59
1"'2'"
rl1158
Saab900
(M89: GB)
271 (18\M89: T8A)
Earth connections
41
Distribution terminal 158 consists of a ring of flat
pins and is connected to earthing point 7 on the
radiator cross-member by means of cable 3 SV.
The terminal is located on the underside of the electrical distribution box. The following components are
connected to the terminal. Some of the components
listed below are fitted only to cars of certain versions
or for certain markets.
7
8
21
42
62
73
89
90
102
104
106
107
113
126
138
155
156
174
207

Lighting relay
Ignition switch relay
Brake warning switch
Windscreen wiper motor
Timing service instrument socket
Side direction indicator, left-hand
Side direction indicator, right-hand
Fuel pump relay
Hot start relay (1989 model)
Time-delay relay
Relay for extra fog lamps (US, CA, JP) (1989
model). (Note: Relay 107 is not earthed at
distribution terminal 158. It is only the other
terminals of the relay socket that are used.)
Relay for the electrically heated rear window
Motor for the left-hand electrically operated
rear-view mirror (across 4-pole connectors
123 in the engine compartment at the lefthand door upper hinge and in the left-hand
front door)
Engine speed relay, Turbo with manual gearbox (1989 model)
Relay for the AC radiator fan
Relay for the AC compressor
Relay for daylight driving lights (CA)
Electrically-heated rear-view mirrors
Saab900
259
271
Reverse-current protection relay (GB) (1989

model)
Preheater for the Lambda senser (across 2pole connector 59 under distribution block
75, on the right-hand side of the engine
compartment)
EadHing point 201, engine

18, M89: T8
18A, M89: T8A
1---f2!!!66LS~V!...!0!!c.7~5,---
~1
95
266 sv 0.75
1:-f2!!!681....S~V~0!!c.7~5'---
~2
96
268 SV 0.75
~40,!l1-"S~V~0~.7=-5- - - - - - - - - - 1 4 2 (AC)
499 SV 0.5
~40,!llA~SV~0.=-5----------173
(M89: AC)
352 BR 0.75
99
I 1351
~--'
212 (M89: AUT: ME,FE)

401 SV 0.75
1:7201
96
r:--I
5
351 SV/VT 0.75

1-233~5LS~V~0~.7~5
95
142 (AC)
401A SV 0.5
173 (M89:AC)
498 SV 0.5
116
266 SV 0.75
108A SV 0.75
401 SV 0.75
1':7201
95
13
14 2
401A SV 0.5
<..Mi,FE)
(AC)
173 (M89: AC)

649 SV 1.5
Y
488 GN 0.5
178{ 489 BR 0.5
57'
I 176 1
I
() ~
649A SV 0.75
551 SV NT 2.5
--'
J11
60
547A SV 0.75
S53 SV 0.75
/I
566 SV 0.75
136
551 SV NT 2.5
_.J
555 SVIVT 0.75
22 02
2
2 03
552 SV 0.75
648 SV 1.5
488 GN 0.5
Y BR 0.5
178{ 489
SV 0.75
'-~
1
ol-1I13 176 1
I;, 1
I..!l._-,
i
5 -I
566A SV 0.75
562 1.0
2
11 4
3 20 (M89)
555 SV/VT 0.75
552 SV 0.75
1
59
2
571 SV 0.75
'IT
I': '7
142 (AC)
401A sv 0.5
57
30 322
900 SV 0.75
98
100 347
(M22
201
-...,
r5
1 2001
25
LH 2.21
551 SV NT 2.5
T16A (LH 2.4A)
III
534;SV 1.5
L _-I
553 sv 0.75
555 SV /VT 0.75
202
552 SV 0.75
401A SV 0.5
566 SV 0.75
203
136
205
1 73 (M89: AC) .
566A SV 0.75
SV
60
5621.0
551 SV/VT 2.5
1:'7201
M90:T16, T16A (CU14)

10BA SV 0.75
130 (ME, FE)
401A sv 1.0
566 SV 0.75
566A SV 1.0
649 SV 1.0
,
534 SV 1.5
555 SV/VT 0.75
552 SV 0.75
SV
5621.0
59
'IT
d..=..
~ -'23 _ - J
271
900 SV 0.75
98
100 347
547 SV 0.75
59
T16>'
015H 352
A
10368
I: '7201
Saab900
203
205
271
57
30 322
900 SV 0.75
98
100 347
1:7201
'-
5~ 'IT
_--1
20"2
547 SV 0.75
959 SV 0.75
I
I
17
2
571 SV 0.75
'27-""
140 2001
1,14 CU 14 ,I
--,
. ; 124 2 0 0 '
'-I LH 2.4 1
553 SV 0.75
173 (AC)
551 SV/VT 2.5
571 SV 0.75
320
173 (AC)
566 SV 0.75
136
205
547 SV 0.75
95
130 (ME, FE)
202
203
271
648 SV 1.5
M89: T16
401 sv 0.75
200 1
LH 2.41
L_-I
553 SV 0.75
1
1
4(1
1
I
I: '7 201
266 SV 0.75
r-;;
2
649A SV 1.5
2 05
108A SV 0.75
(~.PIEl
1 73 (M89: AC)
649
LH 2.21
--'15
iJ
67
2001
1 30
649 SV 1.5
I
I
125
547 SV 0.75
401A SV 0.5
-I
AUT
108A SV 0.75
., 13
649 SV 0.75
534 SV 1.5
116A
r;;; - I
649A SV 1.5
203
389 (M90: UC)
Earth connections
43
2
Earthing points 201 (two) are located on the engine
cylinder head at the lifting lug. The following components are connected to this earthing point. Some of
the components are only fitted to cars of certain
versions or for certain markets.
Cars with 8-valve engine
95
96
99
135
142
173
203
212
Auxiliary air valve

Control pressure valve
Temperature switch II, Lambda
Lambda control unit
Solenoid valve for raising the idling speed,
AC
Diode for the AC compressor (1989 model)
Throttle angle transmitter for the CI fuel injection system, Lambda
cars with auto. transmission (1989 model)
Cars with 16-valve engine
95
130
142
173
176
200
202
203
205
271
320
Auxiliary air valve

Radiator coolant temperature warning
switch (ME, FE)
AC
Diode for the AC compressor
Control unit for EZK ignition system (across
3-pole connector 57/6-pole connector 67 in
the engine compartment, on the right-hand
side at the air intake)
Control unit for the fuel injection system
Engine temperature transmitter for the fuel
injection system
Throttle angle transmitter for the fuel injection system
Air mass meter for the fuel injection system
Preheater for the Lambda sensor
Ignition coil with integrated amplifier (1989
model)
Saab900
322
347
368
389
Connector, Auto/Man, LH 2.4 fuel injection

system
Test connector, diagnostics
Connector, cold-starting valve, LH 2.4
NTC resistor, LH 2.4 Lambda (1990 model:
UC)
44
Starti ng system
Starting system
75
152A
+ k-~R",-D--,-1""6."'-0--l:l--....q.---,5"--,,,GR-,--,-4.,,,,0_-<
>-_7",---"G,,-R...=2"".5'---b29 cI------~
7
GR 2.5
BL 25.0
211
BL 16.0
30
RD 25.0
20
50
122
GL 1.5
122
GL/RD 2.5
122
GL/RD 2.5
122
GL/RD 2.5
152A
ct-
-----'1.::;22:....;::GL:o...=;2.""S-< >----=..:12=2:..:-A--=G:=-L--=2;.::.S'-tJ 27 cj-_ _----:-=_~

015H 152
Saab900
AUT
Starting systeiiili
ration
fault-tracing hints
supply to ignition switch 20 is taken from b~ttery

ross white 29-pole connector 152A, and a supply
Ie is also run directly from the battery to terminal
of starter motor 4.
.en the ignition switch is turned to the start posin, the solenoid coil in the starter motor will be
ergised (+50). The coil will close the starting conts, so that current will flow from the battery
rough the startermotor, and the starter motorwill
~rt to rotate.
matle tranmlsslon
ars with automatic transmission are also equipped
ith start inhibitor switch 77 which prevents the enine from being started when one of the gears is
engaged.
Saab900
1.
Check that terminal 30 of starter motor 4 is live.
2.
Check the energising voltage to the starter motor solenoid when the ignition switch is in the
start position .
3.
Check start inhibitor switch 77 on cars with automatic transmission.
4.
Check that the engine is earthed to the chassis

of the car.
5.
Check the connectors and the wiring.
46
Starting system
1
Battery
on the right-hand side of the engine compartment
Starter motor
on the left-hand side of the engine (intake
side)
Earthing point, radiator cross-member
>Q0"
Ignition switch
on the centre console between the front
seats
60
Single-pole connector (only on cars with automatic transmission)

under the centre console, between the front
seats
.
75
Distribution block
in the engine compartment, on the righthand side
77
Start inhibitor switch (only on cars with automatic transmission)

at the selector lever
152A
29-pole white connector

in the engine compartment, in the electrical
distribution box on the left-hand wheel
housing. The connector is accessible from
211
Saab900
Starting system
mponents
m-
ke
mt
IU-
It0-
al
el
m
15
Saab900
47
46
Starting system
Locations of components
1
Battery
Starter motor
side)
7
., 20

Ignition switch
seats
60
Single-pole connector (only on cars with automatic transmission)

>:underthe centre console, between the front
'.seats
75
Distribution block
77
Start inhibitor switch (only on cars with automatic transmission)

at the selector lever
152A

211
Saab900
Starting system
Saab900
47
48
Fuel system, carburettor engine
Fuel sy
m, ca
rettor en ne
+15
I
1
123K
GN/VT 1.0
123M
GN/VT 1.0
+15
159
382
BL/RD 0.75
382A BL/RD 0.75
015H 012
A
Saab900
Fuel system, carb
fault-tracing hints
e fuel system of a car powered by a carburettor
gine comprises fuel shut-off valve 140 and float
camber valve 114. The fuel shut-off valve prevents
e engine from running on and the float valve prents fuel vapour from escaping when the ignition is
itched off.
e valves are energised across fuse 22 when the
nition switch is in the start or drive position, i.e. the
Ives are open when the engine is running.
The valves should open when the

set to the drive position.
ignitit.rp~
1.
Check fuse 22 and check that the supply

live.
2.
Check that the supply to the fuel shut-off valve

and the float chamber valve is live.
3.
Check the connectors, wiring and earth connections.
Saab900
50
Fuel system, carburettor engine
22A
Saab900
Fuse holder
in the electrical distribution box, in the engine compartment, on the left-hand wheel
housing
114
Float chamber valve

on the left-hand side of the float chamber
140
Fuel shut-off valve

on the intake manifold
159

housing
9n-
er
Saab900
--,...-------=
52
CI fuel system: 181990 model, 1989 model- ME, FE CI: T81989 model- FI, EU, GB
m: 18
CI fuel
mel,
m
1model -- FI, EU, GB
E,
+30
+54
I
I
I
50
I1E
GR 1.5
VT 2.5
152A
123 eN
1231<
1 1.5
GN/VT 1.0
122
[0;;
~
N
o
152C
M89: T8
23B23A
BLIRD 0.5
152A
2j
P 144
AUT
122
GL/RD 1.5
60
122
GLtRD 2.5
123F'
GN/RO 0.5
""'=-~'--i>22
79
272A BR 0.75
122A
GL 2.5
28.
BI. 0.5
+54
M89: AUT: ME,FE
I
I
102
11M
VT 2.5
261A
13122A
GR 1.5
135
Vi 1.0
282A
Gl 0.75
152A
273
GN 0.75
135
Vi 1.0
104
76
M89: ME,FE
261B
CR/RD 1.5
/ 261
OR
152A
02.5
152C
33'
OR 0.75
96
OI5H 36~
M89: ME,FE
M90: FI,EU,GB
Saab900
3B
'stem: 181990 model, 1989model- ME, FE CI: T81989 model- FI, EU, GB
53
Turbo (1989 model)
ntinuous Injection) fuel injection system is

nical type and is used for 8-valve engines.
.11'1 is permanently energised across fuse 30
fibution terminal +30, and is also supplied
tribution terminal +15 when ignition switch
the start or drive position.
Ion
e ignition key is turned to the start position,
owing components will be energised across
te 29-pole connector 152A:
pump relay 102
On cars powered by the Turbo engine, an additional

function of the relay is to trip the fuel pump relay if
the frequency of the ignition pulses should be higher
than that corresponding to an engine speed of about
6000 r/min. (The relay includes additional pin 50.)
On these cars, the control signal for the fuel pump
relay is not connected directly to the relay, but is
wired across boost pressure switch 144. The switch
will open if the boost pressure is too high, thus interrupting the supply to the relay and tripping the fuel
pump.
Fault-tracing hints
perature time switch 92

102 will be energised and fuel pump 103,
is supplied across fuse 30, will start to run (on
r certain markets (1989 model), also fuel feed
101). At the same time, the heating coils in
'ary air valve 95 and control pressure valve 96
Iso be energised.
engine is cold, i.e. if its temperature is below
5C (113F), temperature time switch 92 will be
$ed. Starting valve 94, which is energised from
inal15a of starter motor 4, will then be earthed.
e valve will thus be open, and the engine will be
upplied with additional fuel during the period when
e starter motor is energised (although no longer
an about 9 seconds).
For further particulars of fault-tracing in the fuel system, see the Service Manual, Group 2:3, Fuel system, injection engine.
The fuel system will be energised as soon as the
ignition switch is set to the drive or start position.
1.
Check fuses 22 and 30 and check that the supply to them is live (also fuse 13 on cars with
automatic transmission for the FE and ME markets (1989 model)).
2.
Check that the supply to eaGIi component is live

when the ignition switch is ii", the start or drive
position. Note the differences between cars with
and without turbocharger (1989 model).
On cars intended for the ME and FE markets, the
hot start relay must be energised when the ignition switch is in the start position (1989model).
cuum switch (79) is used for controlling the fuel

prichment during acceleration.
3.
ars for the Middle East and Far East (1989 model)
rs delivered to these markets are equipped with

t start relay 104. The relay will be energised when
the ignition switch is in the start position and will
Ipulse starting valve 94, even if the engine temper(ature is above +45 C (113F) (temperature time
(switch 92 is open).
,Cars with automatic transmission for these markets
are also equipped with solenoid valve 212, which
'iraises the engine idling speed. The valve opens when
the selector lever is set to position 0 and switch 76 is
thus closed.
Drive position
If the ignition switch is in,the drive position, fuel
pump relay 102 will be energised (+15) only across
fuse 22.
.
The relay is supplied with ignition pulses from igni~
tion system amplifier 146. If the engine should stop,
the pulses will cease, and the relay will then trip, thus
interrupting the supply to the fuel system components.
Saab900
4
98
101
Lighting relay
in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, relay positions A, B.
Fuel feed
in the fuel tc1t
ment floor
102
Fuel pump relay,

in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, relay positions F, G (T8)
or relay position G (18)
103
Fuel pump
in the fuel tank, under the luggage compartment floor
, 20
Ignition switch
seats
Fuse holder
in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, on the left-hand wheel
housing
Hot start relay (ME, FE) (1989 model)

in the engine compartment, on the left-hand
wheel housing
113
Relay/time delay relay for the electrically

heated rear window
in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, relay position C
144
Boost pressure switch (T8) (1989 model)

under the fascia, to the left of the steering
wheel, behind the knee shield (behind the
flasher relay holder)
146

in the engine compartment, forward of the
left-hand wheel housing
152A
152C

29-pole black connector (1989 model)
housing. The connectors are accessible
from the interior of the car.
158
Start inhibitor sWitqh (auto.)

under the centre console, at the selector
lever

housing
,
159
Vacuum switch
in the engine compartment on the inside of
the left-hand inner wheel housing, at the
fuel filter

housing
212
Solenoid valve for raising the idling speed

(auto.) (1989 model)
at the engine throttle housing, in the hose
for the auxiliary air valve
Relay position F
in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment
Reversing light switch (1989 model)

lever
59
2-pole connector
one in the electrical distribution box in the
engine compartment, on the left-hand
wheel housing
two at the fuel pumps under the luggage
compartment floor
76
77
79
))~~~:~,f,~)
,ur@~t~l1e luggage compart-
104
'31
60
ct()r (1989 model)

'~~ring column, under the
,,'Knee shield)
Starter motor
side)
22A
10-pole c
to the Ie.
fascilf{b~
Single-pole connector
wheel housing
two (1990 model) or one (1989 model) under the centre console, at the selector lever
(auto.)
Switch for raising the idling speed, auto.
transm. (1989 model)
un'der the centre console, at the selector
lever
92
Temperature time switch

at the extreme front of the engine thermostat housing
94
Starting valve
on top of the engine throttle housing
95
Auxiliary air valve

at the front of the engine, beside the thermostat housing
96

,
at the front of the engi ne, on the thermostat
housing
Saab900 '
is
55
ystem: 181990 model, 1989 model"": ME, FE CI: T81989 model-Ill, EU, GB
le
rt-
n8)
t-
ld
Iy
1- ,
146
79
Ig
Ie
n
Ie
1-
~I
1-
~I
)~I
L.:.:..:...:....;:..=--
77
-----l
79
L..-_--..:...:...:....--=~..:..::..:....---I
101,103
102.
-----l L...-
L...---.:.-
-----l
95
IIUBm]
146
147
92
Saab900
96
212 M1989
94
CI fuel system: 18 Lambda - SE, EU. 199Qmodel- FI, GB
56
CI fuel system: 18 Lambda ..... SE, EUII 1990 model ..... FI, GB
M90
+54
+30
I
I
I
I
llE
50,
GR 1.5
VT 2.5
VT 0.75
20
261A
AUT
77
146
I'j-LI
363
RO/VT 0.75
122
GL/RO 2.5
30
284A
aL 0.75
60
284C
alO.5
122
GL/RO 2.5
' GL/RO 2.5
27
152A
.1.
'~
158
261C
GR 0.75
'""d
'"
OJ
'"
""'" "dz
0
96
136
"'"
"'"
M90
"'"d
393
SV
-'
>
278
BR/VT 0.75
277E
...
'"'"
.!J
361A GR 1.5
92
15
362 BR VT 0.5
17
353 GL
01.5
277 BR 0.75
339
TRK
M8
106
26
,442
GL 0.5
31
410
SV 0.5
494
RO/VT 0.5
135
412
RO 0.5
12
58
-'-
111-......:4:!.!12...!R~Dc.cO~.5~
--l
015H 372.
351
SV/VT 0.75
Saab900
"
CI fuel system: 18:!bt~tffiJmaa - SItii;dEU. 1990 model - FI, GB

\
1990 model
J (Continuous Injection) fuel injectiol(l; 9~~el:Jl

exhaust emission control (Lambda) for~liJ.ls of
nical type and is used for 8-valve er;J~;i;m~9for
e. It consists basically of the cOr;J\{~mti!?nal
. CI system, although it is supplern, " 'wJth
ment for more accurate adjustmenl0"f.uell
,ixture.
Temperature switch 97 senses the engine temperature. It opens at a temperature above +25C
(77 oF) and closes at + 19C (66 OF). The switch is
connected ill series with the temperature time
switch.
Vacuum switch 79 is used for controlling the fuel
enrichment during acceleration. When the engine is
cold, the switch will open starting valve 94. When the
engine is hot, a signal is applied instead to timedelay relay 106 which actuates the control unit to
increase the fuel supply (active up to 2 minutes after
starting). Diode 339 prevents energising of relay
106:50 when switch 79 is closed.
,f)lsystem
~ the ignition switch is turned to the ~~~89Si
,;starter motor 4 and temperaturetilTle'9"V\~ch 92
be energised (+50).
," ,. ,
e engine is cold, Le. if its temperq~Hr~i'9,;pelow'

c (113 OF), temperature time sWit()~~~Will be
d. Starting valve 94, which is e~.~.~~i~q from
inal15a of starter motor 4, will then;b El earthed.
valve will thus be open, and tlie er;Jgine will be
, ' plied with additional fuel during the period when
e starter motor is energised (although no longer
an about 9 seconds).
5.0
~4
1990 model
Temperature switch 393 opens at a temperature of

55C (131F) and closes at +48 C (118 OF). The
function of the switch is switch out time-delay relay
106 at a temperature above 55C (131F).
Full-load enrichment is prOVided when the throttle
angle is the greater than 72. In this case, pin 12 of
control unit 135 is earthed and provides a fixed timing ratio of 60%. At the same time, the AC compressor is disconnected to provide maximum engine
power. Throttle angle transmitter 203 closes the circuit between pins 1 and 2 only when the throttle is in
the idling position (throttle angle of 0), 'and closes
the circuit between pins 2 and 3 when the throttle
angle is greater than 72.
hen the ignition switch is in the start or drive posi~

n, fuel pump relay 102 will be energised (+15)
9cross fuse 22. Relay 102 will be energised and fuel
wump 103, which is supplied across'fuse 30, will
&tart to run. At the same time, the heating coils in
guxiliary air valve 95 and control pressure valve 96
will also be energised.
The fuel pump relay and the Lambda system are both
supplied with ignition pulses from ignition pulse am,plifier 146. If the engine should stop, the pulses will
cease, and the relay will then trip, thus interrupting
the supply to the fuel system components.
-. Temperature switch 99 opens at +25 C (77 oF) and

closes at +19 c (66 oF). One of its functions is to
improve the fuel enrichment.
. Lambda
The Lambda equipment includes a Lambda sensor
136 which continuously supplies information to control unit 135 on the oxygen content of the exhaust
gases. On the basis of this information, and the
signals received by the control unit from the various
sensors and relays of the Lambda system, the CQfltrol
unit adjusts the quantity of fuel injected through
timIng valve 139. (The valve is controlled by earthing
.of terminal 15.) The Lambda sensor is heated by
preheater 271, across fuse 1.
Control unit 135 and relay 106 are supplied across
t.he contacts of relay 102, from terminal 87.
Time-delay relay 106 is used during the starting
stage and is energised (+50) when ignition switch
20 is in the start position. The time-delay relay actuates the control unit and timing valve 139, to in.crease the fuel supply to the engine.
1989 model
TeDlperature switch 97 senses' the engine temperature.lt opens at a temperature above +45 c
(113 OF) and closes at +38 c (100 OF). The switch is
connected in series with the temperature time
switch.
Saab900
Connector 120 is intended for a special instrument

and is used for adjusting the timing ratio. The connector is energised when the ignition switch is fn the
drive position.
Fault..tracing hints
For particulars of fault-tracing in the fuel system with
the Lambda system, see the Service Manual, Group
2:3, Fuel system, injection engine.
The system includes several components that demand special care during fault-tracing and replacement. So read all of the instructions in the Service
Manual before carrying out fault-tracing work on the
comporientsand in the wiring.
"
The locations/of the components are the same for
1990 model is Lambda SE, EU as for 1989 model T8
Lambda EU (see pages 62 - 63).
58
(l)1 fuel system: 1989 modeLT8 Lambda -"- BU.
CI
m: 19
el
m elTS
-EU
+54
+30
I
I
I
I
50
liE
GR 1.5
vT 2.5
AUT
363
RO/VT 0.75
260
BR 2.5
122
146
GL/RO 2.5
IJ-LI
7
122
Gl./I'l0
284
2,~
'--y--J
BlO.5
~02S
.27
1-~~~~7
152A
2840
BL 0.5
4
261C
GR 0.75
158
139
on
"
d
'"
lD
o
on
"
dZ
<>
~ ~
96
on
"d
..
'5
..,on
361A GR 1.5
17
15
362 BR VT 0.5
353 GL
0 1.5
26
442
GL 0.5
31
135
AC
111-_4:::1.>.2..:;R"'0....:0"'.5'--_-'-
---'
0150 382
351
SV/VT 0.75
SaaIl9.QQ
tion
(Continuous Injection) fuel injection system
haust emission control (Lambda) for EU is of
'nical type and is used for 8-valve engines for
. It consists basically of the conventional
CI system, although it is supplemented with
ment for more accurate adjustment of the fuel/
ixture.
I system
the ignition switch is turned to the start positarter motor 4, temperature time switch 92 and
ump relay 102 will be energised (+50).
engine is cold, i.e. if its temperature is below
C (113 OF), temperature time switch 92 will be
d. Starting valve 94, which is energised from
inal15a of starter motor 4, will then,be earthed.
valve will thus be open, and the engine will be
plied with additional fuel during the period when
starter motor is energised (although no longer
.n about 9 seconds).
.
Time-delay relay 106 is used during the starting

stage and is energised (+50) when ignition switch
20 is in the start position. The time-delay relay actuates the control unit and timing valve 139 to increase the fuel supply to the engine.
.
Temperature switch 97 senses the engine temperature. It opens at a temperature above +45C
(113 OF) and closes at +38 C (100 OF). The switch is
connected in series with temperature time switch 92.
Vacuum switch 79 is used for controlling the fuel
enrichment during acceleration. When the engine is
cold, the switch will open starting valve 94. When the
engine is hot, a signal is applied instead to timedelay relay 106 which actuates the control unit to
increase the fuel supply (active up to 2 minutes after
starting). Diode 339 prevents energising of relay
106:50 when switch 79 is closed.
en the ignition switch is in the start or drive posin, fuel pump relay 102 will be energised (+15)
ross fuse 22. Relay 102 will be energised and fuel
mp 103, which is supplied across fuse 30, will
art to run. At the same time, the heating coils in
xiliary air valve 95 and control pressur~ valve 96
ill also be energised.
e fuel pump relay and the Lambda system are both
pplied with ignition pulses from ignition pulse amIifier 146. Ifthe engine should stop, the pulses will
ease, and the relay will then trip, thus interrupting
e supply to the fuel system components.
he fuel pump relay includes a function_which will trip
it if the frequency of the ignition pulses should be
~igherthan that corresponding to an engine speed of
about 6000 r/min. The energising supply to the fuel
pump relay is routed through pressure switch 144.
The pressure switch will open if the boost pressure
should' exceed a predetermined value, thus deenergising the relay and stopping the fuel pump.
I
The Lambda equipment insludes a Lambda sensor

136 which continuously supplies information to control unit 135 on the oxygen content in the exhaust
gases. On the basis of this information, and the
signals received by the control unit from the various
sensors and relays of the Lambda system, the control
unit adjusts the quantity of fuel injecte(l through
timing valve 139. The Lambda sensQr is heated by
preheater 271, across fuse 1.
1'"
d
and
Control unit 135 and relays 109

138 are supplied across the contacts of relay 102, from terminal
87.
Saa6900
Engine speed relay 138 and throttle angle transmitter203 are used forfuel enrichment controlled by the
engine speed. The engine speed must be above
4600 r/min and the throttle angle must be smaller
than 72. Pin 7 of control unit 135 is then earthed
across relay 138 and provides a fixed timing ratio of
85%. At the same time, the AC compressor is disconnected to provide maximum engine power.
Pressure switch 196 and throttle angle transmitter
203'are used for fuel enrichment controlled by the
boost pressure. The boost pressure must be between
0.25 and 0.30 bar and the throttle angle must be
smaller than 72. Pin 7 of control unit 135 is then
earthed across pressure switch 196 and throttle angie transmitter 203 and provides a fixed timing ratio
of 85%. When the throttle angle is greater than 72,
pin 11 of control unit 135 is earthed across throttle
angle transmitter 203 and provides a fixed timing
ratio of 92%.
Throttle angle transmitter 203 closes the circuit between pins 1 and 2 when the throttle angle is smaller
than 72, and closes the circuit between pins 2 and 3
when the throttle angle is greater than 72.
Temperature switch 99 opens at +25 C (77 OF) and
closes at +19 C (66 OF). One of its functions is to
improve the fuel enrichment.
Connector 120 is intended for a special instrument
and is used for adjusting the timing ratio. The connector is energised when the ignition switch is in the
drive position.
.
Fault-tracing hints
For particulars of fault-tracing in the fuel system with
the Lambda system, see the Service Manual, Group
2:3, Fuel system, injection engine.
The system includes several components that demand special care during fault-tracing and replacement. So read all of the instructions in the Service
Manual before carrying out fault-tracing work on the
components and in the wiring:
Saab900
CI fuel system: 1989 model T8 Lambda - EU
61
Saab900
Starter motor
on the left-hand side of the engine ('intake
side)
Lighting relay
in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, relay positions A and B
'Earthing point in the luggage compartment
20
Ignition switch
seats
22A
Fuse holder
housing
59
2-pole connector
wheel housing
one in the luggage compartment, adjacent
to the fuel pump
.
one connector 120 in the engine compartment, at the left-hand wheel housing
one for the Lambda sensor, under distribution block 75, on the right-hand side of the
engine compartment
60
wheel housing
one in the engine compartment, on the
right-hand side, beside the air intake
one under the centre console, at the selector lever (auto.)
77
Start inhibitor switch. (auto.)

lever
79
Vacuum switch
in the engine compartment, on the inside of
the left.,.hand wheel housing member, at the
fuel filter
92

on the engine thermostat housing'
94
Starting valve
on top of the engine throttle housing
95
Auxiliary air valve

at the front of the engine, beside the thermostat housing
96

at the front of the engine, 011 the thermostat
housing
;\l!Jel system: 1989 model T8 lambda,.... EU

97
99
100
Temperature switch I, Lambda

on the engine thermostat housing (1989
model)
Temperature switch II, Lambda (1990
model)
on the engine intake manifold

housing
196
Pressure switch for T8 Lambda (1989

model)
in the engine compartment, at the left-hand
wheel housing member
201
Earthing point on the engine
203
Throttle angle transmitter

on the engine throttle housing
271
Preheater for the Lambda sensor

in the Lambda sensor, on the exhaust manifold
339
Diode
forward of the right-hand front door, behind
the trim
393
Temperature switch III, Lambda (1990

model)
on the engine thermostat housing
Relay position F
in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment

. on the engine intake manifold
Diode, T8 Lambda
the trim
102
Fuel pump relay

in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, relay positions F and G
(T8 Lambda) or relay position G (18 Lambda)
103
Fuel pump
106
Time-delay relay
the trim
113

heated rear window
120
Test connector! Lambda
135
Lambda control unit

under the back seat, on the right-hand side
136
Lambda sensor
on the exhaust manifold
"
159
. 138
Engine speed relay for T8 Lambda (1989

model)
the trim
139
Timing valve, Lambda

in the engine compartment, on the inside of
the left-hand wheel housing member
144
Boost pressure switch for T8 Lambda (1989

model)
146

wheel housing
152A
152C

29-pole black connector
from the interior.
156

in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, relay position H
158

Saab900,
..
",;
Clfld~:I~~~~~~(9rn: 1989 model T8 Lambda - EU
39
971\1I1989 59
3931\1I1990
nd
ni-
nd
152A
152C
.1~6
;158
159
In-
"\
,I
!
103
R1t
136
136
'
211,
L:1.. :.44..::..:.:.M:..::1.:;.98:..::9
95
i46
203
lSi\.
97
M1990
---'
~9
LH 2.2 fuel system
116 - FI, EU, GB, ME, FE
2.2
E,
m: 116 - FI, EU, GB,
+15
+54
I
I
23K
I
I
l1C
VT 2.5
GN/VT 1.0
'"<:
"'
"'1
}Q
ci
~
d
'"
~ 206~
'"
::.
If)
1
2
IJ')
"d
"
a:
'"
'"
z
0
c:i
>
.,
!!;.
'"
"~
.,
10
22A
>
z
221
2~) 3~ '
"d
.,'"
200
(
532
GR 0.75
565
GN/RO 0.75
\
~
>
i3
.,"'
t
(
201
201
1528
4]
L:5""30"-"=SL'-'0"".5'----_-P T
204 GLIVT 0.5
60
---<0
~T--"28""4,,,-C-,,S,,-L
",0.=-5
284 SL 0.5
t
\
I
I
f
t
Saab900
LH 2,2 fuel system: 116 - FI, EU, GB, ME, FE
on
Ch LH Jetronic fuel injection system iSlJsed
with the 16-valve engine. LH is an.ClPpr~via
uftmassenmesser Hitzdraht (air mcis$,M;eter
t filament). The fuel injection system is conand supervised by control unit 200, which
s a microprocessor.
22A
65
The engine is supplied with fuel by electrically driven

fuel pump 323 with integrated feed pump drawing
fuel from the fuel tank and building up a pressure in
the fuel system. When fuel pump relay 102 is energised, the heating coil in auxiliary airv,alve 95 will be
energised. (The va Ive increases the air flow when the
engine is cold.)
. tem receives a positive supply from fuse 22

e ignition switch is in the start or drive posihd a constant supply from +30 to main relay
d fuel pump relay 102.
Test connector 204 has the following terminalS:
basis of the data stored in the control unit and

.oming information from various sensors, the
I unit calculates and controls the opening
of the electrically operated fuel injection
(206). The control unit receives information on
gine speed by sensing the pulses from ignition
1
2
When fault-tracing in the wiring for the fuel system,

always observe the following:
Ie angle transmitter 203 provides information

e throttle angle. The transmitter has two contact
ions, i.e. 0 (idling speed) and 72 throttle an.. perature transmitter 202 is of Negative Tempere Coefficient (NTC) type and provides continuous
gine temperature information to the control unit.
the event of loss of this signal, the control unitwill
ulate, by default, an engine temperature of
o C (68 OF).
Since the filament is located in the intake air, it will

gradually become fouled, which affects the measurement results. To keep the filament clean, its
temperature is raised to about 1000 C (1800 OF) for
one second. This takes place.four seconds after the
engine has been stopped, provided that the engine
speed has earlier been in excess of 2000 r/min. This
process is controlled by the control unit.
1.
Always disconnect the 25-pole connector on the

control unit and the connector on the air mass
meter. N.B. These two components can easily
be seriously damaged if measurements are carried out on their terminal pins.
2.
Always disconnect the connection to the suspected component.
3.
Use an ohmmeter - not a buzzer - for checking

the wiring.
Before checking the wiring, always start by checking

fuses 7 and 22, and checking that the supply to them
is live.
'r mass meter 205 includes a platinum filament

own as the hot filament. Regardless ofthe compoition of the air and the air flow, the temperature of
e filament is maintained constant at about 100C
bove the temperature of the intake air.
he current necessary for maintaining the temperture ofthe filament constant is controlled by means
f a bridge circuit and a sensing resistor, the voltage
ariation of which is directly proportional to the intake air mass flow.
VpltSlgE? to the test connector

"Limp home" (CHECK ENGINE)
For comprehensive fault-tracing instructions for the

system, see the Service Manual, Group 2:3, Fuel
system, injection engine.
Earthing point 201 on the engine lifting lug is important for correct operation of the fuel system. If the
location of the earthing point is altered, such as
when other work is being carried out on the engine,
the performance of the system may be disturbed.
. locations of components
In the event of a loss of signal from the air mass

meter, e.g. ifthe filament should fail, an emergency
system known as the "Limp home" function in the
control unit will come into operation. The car can
then be driven, although its drivabi Iity will be limited.
When the "Limp home" function is operative, warning
lamp 47P, CHECK ENGINE, will light up. The lamp is
located in the combined instrument, and is supplied
from fuse 7. (The lamp can also be energised from
the EZK ignition system.)
Saab900
The locations ofthe components are the same for all

variants of LH 2.2 fuel system (see pages 70 - 71).
LH 2.2 fuel system: 1989 model T16 - FI, EU, GB, ME, FE
'66
2.2 fuel
el T16--
E,
+15
I
I
+54
I
I
75
l1C
VT 2.5
'23K
GN/VT 1.0
559A RO 2.5
211
559
RD 2.5
'"0
'"o
I-
t-
'"0
iQ
D
0:
iQ
"!
I-
'"
iii
'"on
'"ot-'
;li
., ...
"''''
I-
<5
'"
.,'"
lD
..."'
'"
...
'"
0'"
l-
>
s!
~
>
on
t0
'"d
I-
21
1 19
I I
I I
I I
200
200
7
25 "
N
'"
'".,..;
l-
I-
i;;
'"
~
lD
'"
on
o0: lD
'" I>
<D
I-
532
GR 0.75
on
"0
<5
"\
1528
14]
204 GL/VT 0.5
~>t--,2",8",4C,-,8",L,-,0,,",S,,---<O
...
'"
284 8L O.S
J146
0150 332
Saab900
12
201
201
I..:S",3,,-0-"B,,-L-"O,,,,S_ _-I:>
iQ
I-
" :rl::l ":ri~

:rl
;0
200
'"
"
0
to c:i-=
13
17
I I
I I
I I14
B
r-:
>
>
541
GN/RD 2.5
144
'"
>
z
<:>
565
GN/RD 0.75"
ration
osch LH Jetronic fuel injection system is used
ars with the 16-valve engine. LH is an abbreviaof Luftmassenmesser Hitzdraht (air mass meter
hot filament). The fuel injection system is cond and supervised by control unit 200, which
des a microprocessor.
system receives a positive supply from fuse 22
the ignition switch is in the start or drive posi, and a constant supply from +30 to main relay
and fuel pump relay 102.
1
J22A
he basis of the data stored in the control unit and

incoming information from various sensors, the
trol unit calculates and controls the opening
es of the electrically operated fuel injection
es (206). The control unit receives information on
engine speed by sensing the pulses from ignition
tern.
Tlie engine is supplied with fuel by electrically driven

fuel pump 103 and feed pump 101 drawing fuel from
the fuel tank and bUilding up a pressure in the fuel
system. The fuel pump circuit includes a boost pressure switch (144) which will trip the fuel pumps ifthe
turbocharger boost pressure should exceed a predetermined value.
When fuel pump relay 102 is energised, the heating
coil in auxiliary air valve 95 will be energised. (The
valve increases the air flow when the engine is cold.)
Test connector 204 has the following terminals:
1
2
Voltage to the test cpnnector

"Limp home" (CHECK ENGINE)
.i
,-.-r
,"
//:!>
rottle angle transmitter 203 provides information

the throttle angle, i.e. the engine load. The trans'tter has two contact positions, i.e. 0 (idling
eed) and 72 throttle angle.
mperature transmitter 202 is of Negative Temperure Coefficient (NTC) type and provides continuous
ngine temperature information to the control unit.
the event of loss of this signal, the control unitwill
imulate, by default, an engine temperature of
20C (68 OF). "
ir mass meter 205 includes a platinum filament
nown as the hot filament. Regardless of the compoition of the air and the air flow, the temperature of
the filament is maintained constant at about 100C
above the temperature of the intake air;
The current necessary for maintaining the temperature of the filament constant is controlled by means
of a bridge circuit and a sensing resistor, the voltage
variation of which is directly proportional to the intake air mass flow.
Sipce the filament is located in the intake air, it will
gradually become fouled, which affects the measurement results. To keep the filament clean, its
temperature is raised to about 1000 C (1800 oF) for
one second. This takes place four seconds after the
engine has been stopped, provided that the engine
speed has earlier been in excess of 2000 r/min. This
process is controlled by the control unit.
In the event of a loss of signal from the air mass
meter, e.g. if the filament should fail, an emergency
system known as the "Limp home" function in the
control unit will come into operation. The car can
then be driven, although its drivabi Ijty wi II be limited.
When the "Limp home" function is operative, warning
lamp 47P, CHECK ENGINE, will light up. The lamp is
-located in the combined instrument, and is supplied
from fuse 7. (The lamp can also be energised from
the EZK ignition system.)
"Saab900
67
....
Fault-tracing hints
When fault-tracing in the wiring for the fuel system,
always observe the following:
1.
Always disconnect the 25-pole connector on the

control unit and the connector on theair"mas$
meter. N.B. These two components can, easily
be seriously damaged if measurements ~re carried out on their terminal pins.
2.
3.

the wiring.

fuses 7 and 22, and checkingthatthe supply to them
is live.
the performance of the system may be disturbed.
Saab900
Saab900
70
146

(T16) (1989 model)
152A
152B

29-pole red connector
housing.
The connectors are accessible from the interior of the car
159
Distribution terminal + 15
inthe electrical distribution box, in the engine compartment, on the left-hand wheel
housing
176
Control unit for EZK ignition system (116)

200
Control unit for the LH system

forward of the right-hand front door, below
the fascia (behind the trim)
201
Engine earthing point

at the engine lifting lug
202
Engine temperature transmitter

on the intake manifold flange, between cylinders 2 and 3
203

204
Test connector
in the engine compartment, behind the
right-hand wheel housing
205
Air mass meter

on the air cleaner
206
Fuel injection valves

211
229
Main relay for the fuel injection system

atthe control unit, forward ofthe right-hand
front door, below the fascia (behind the trim)
323

in the fuel tank, below the luggage compartment floor
The locations of the components presented below

are the same for all variants of LH 2.2 fuel system.
1
Battery
22A
Fuse holder
housing
47P
57
59
60
CHECK ENGINE warning lamp

in the combined instrument in the instrument panel
3-pole connector
right-hand headlamp (test connector 204)
in the engine compartment, on the righthand side, at the air intake (116)
2-pole connector (1989 model)
at the fuel pump, under the luggage compartment floor
one in the electrical distribution box
one (for the automatic transmission) at the
control unit, forward of the right-hand front
door, below the fascia (behind the trim)
67
6-pole connector
in the engine compartment, on the righthand side at the air intake
75
Distribution block, positive supply from battery

95
101
Auxiliary air valve

at the extreme front of the engine intake
manifold
Fuel feed pump (ME, FE) (1989 model)
102
Fuel pump relay

at the control unit, forward ofthe right-hand
front door, belowthe fascia (behind the trim)
103

12&
4-pole connector (1990 model)

144
Boost pressure switch (T16) (1989 model)

column (behind the knee shield)
Saab900
LH "2.2 fuel system: 19.i9 model T16 - FI, EU, GB, ME, FE
m
ponents
le
nel
e-
1-
el
1-
206
75
95
323
200
Saab900
rnl;rda - US, CA, AU, JP, SE, EU
2:4'foel system: T16 lambd~;i;
,AU
1989 model -- SE, EU;

116 Lambda -- US, CA, AU, JP,
+15 ~'J';.+15
+54
",/
75
llC
559B
VT 2.5
RD 0.5
559A RD 2.5
I
I
12JK
559 RD 2.5
GN/VT 1.0
229
561 Bl/RD 2.5
116.\:SE,
EU,CA
.....;on
;!!
.;
;(?
'"
a:l
~1
'"ffi
'"
!'!
"-
;(?
.;
.;
aJ
;(?2
:J
.;
....on.;
on
....
.;
...'"
.;
!;
on
.;
*'"
...>
<>
aJ
:ll
'"on
:g
....'"
....
>
'"
0
....on
z
"
<>
<>
541
GN/RD 2.5
201
~
12 16 21
0O
OJ
200
,"
13
I
I
I
I
I
I
15
29
18
200
27
24
17
25
'"....
.;
2J 2226 1 34
.;
C!
.;
'"....
...>
ili
5621.0
If)
566A
...N>
SV 0.75
566 SV 0.75
r-,
I .....",61",0-"GN",--"0,,,.5--1 2
1132
1._..1
1528
,--_5",0",0-"B,,-L-"0.,,,5_-1>14 <1-----,
'"
.;
'!;
.."
.J
.,:"
.-'-.,/;
01~H
Saab900
'"
aJ
::::
on
.;
~
on
'" '"
(f)
....on
.;
ro7
'"z
<>
EU
uel system: T16 Lambda - US, CA, AU 1989model- SE, EU, JP. 116 Lambda - US, CA, AU, JP, SE, EU
tlon
with 16-valve engines and Lambda are
ed with the Bosch LH Jetronic 2.4 fuel inn system, which is an updated version of the LH
ic 2.2 system. LH is an abbreviation of Luftenmesser Hitzdraht (air mass meter with hot
ent). The fuel injection system is controlled and
rvised by control \pnit 200, which includes a
I
processor.
!
ber of new featu,is ~ave been introduced, such
Air mass meter 205 is builtinto a plastic housing. In

the event of a lossof ~ignal from the air mass meter,
e.g. ifthe filament should fail, an emergency system
known as the "Limp home" function in the control unit
will come into operation. The car can then be driven,
although its drivability will be limited. When the
"Limp home'! function is operative; warning lamp
47,Pj CHECKENGINE, willlightup. The lamp is located
in:Jthe,corobined instrument, and is supplied from
can also be energised from the EZK
<
VT 1.0
I
122A
.exhaust emissions should

i~l')'lp,:",.~JII.)'~Pt,. uP. For
'tJltc9q~, :~~e~'roup 2:3
aptive Lambda control system

(Automatic Idling Control! valve with built-in
mp home" function. When necessary, the valve
ovides a, high, fixed idling speed of approxiately 1200 r/min.
pa"
new, electrically-operated vent valve (321) for

the charcoal ,canister. Controlled by signals from
the control unit. The charcoal in the canister absorbs fuel fumes in the vent line from the tank.
driven fuel pump 103 and feed pumpTOl orby fuel

pump 323 with integrated feed pump. In both cases,
the pumps draw fuel from the fuel tank and pressurise the fuel system.
The control unit 200 is connected to the air-conditioning system via pin 14 (AC compressor relay 156,
pin 16). When the AC compressor is running, the
control unit will compensate for the increased load
applied by the compressor at engine idling speed. A
signal (earth) is applied from pin 3 at full throttle,
~~ich disconnects the AC compressor. .
Test connector 347 is used for fault tracing. When pin
2 inthe connector is earthed, flashing codes will be
obtained on the CHECK ENGINE lamp.
, Built-in fault diagJosis system. Gives fault codes

via the CHECK J::NGINE lamp or the ISAT test instrument/
The pressure monitoring function is built into the
control unit. If a fault should occur on the turbocharger pressure control system (T16 Lambda),
the LH control unit will interrupt the signals to the
injection valves.
EXhaust gas emission control, Lambda

The car is equipped with an adaptive Lambda system,
which compensates for variations in the fuel/air mixture caused by changes in the fuel system.
Lambda sensor 136 continually measures the oxygen content ofthe exhaust gases, thus enablingthe
control unit to adjust the mixture to as close to
Lambda':::: 1 as possible. The sensor is heated by
preheater 271 (protected by fuse 1).
The gear indication fUl')ction is built into the control unit (US only).
. he system receives positive s,upply from fuse 22

hen the ignitfon switch is in the start or drive posiion, and a constant supply from +30 to relays 229
n9 102.
Thb~ggigJ'j$ ~~BSII~~Wi'th'tY~I~itny~.~Y~lectrica Ily
daptive idling control system. Normal changes

re compensated. for automatically. The idling
peed is controlled by means of valve 272.
uilt-in deceleration function. During overrun
raking, it shuts off the fuel supply within a certain
ngine speed range.
of theSe
Automatic transmission
n the basis ofthe data stored in the control unit and

he incoming information from various sensors, the
ontrol unit calculates and controls t,he opening
imes of the electrically operated fuel injection
alves (206). Control .unit 200 receives information
n the engine speed by sensing the pulses from the
Ignition system.
Throttle angle transmitter 203 provides information
to the control unit on the throttle angle. The transmiter has two contact positions, i.e. 0 (idling speed)
and ),2 0 throttle angle.
0
Temperature transmitter 202 is of Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) type and provides continuous
engine temperature information to the control unit.
In the event ofloss ofthis signal, the control unit will
simulate, by default, an engine temperature of
+45 DC (113 of)':'
Saab900
Cars with automatic transmission are also equipped

with switch 76 which will close when the selector
lever is set to "Drive", and the control unit will then
compensate for the increased load applied by the
automatic transmission when the engine is running
at idling speed.
">,
'0.
'fl4
LH 2.4 fuel system: Ti6 Lambda - US, CA, AU 1989 model- SE, EU, JP. 116 Lambda - US, CA, AU, JP, SE, EU
<---.... . . . . . . . . . . ; " " - - - - - - - ' " " - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Faulttraclng hints
When fault tracing in the wi(i
always observe the followi
1.
2.
Read thefaulLc:p,d
fore discormegtil1
codeSareJ6lfaSe .
energisedf)iUse
___ _._ _
_
scribed irFGroup2'.:!3;oft'ne.. Sef;vi'e~!flifi:tntl~li . i
AIWaySdiSC~r1necithej5:b61~c6Hp~Pt~f;
.e
control unit and the connector onthe'@' m S
meter. N.B. These two componel1tscahe'a~jly
be seriously damaged if measurements are carried out on their terminal pins.
3.
4.

the wiring.

fuse 22 and checking that the supply to it is live. Also
check fuse 7 and fuse 1 for the Lambda sensor preheater.
the performance of~may be disturbed.
\
Saab900
fuel system: T16 Lambda - US, CA, AU 1989 model- SE, EU, JP. 116 Lambda - US, CA, AU, JP, SE, EU
1
Battery
22A
Fuse holder
inthe electrical distribution' box, in the engine compartment, on the left-hand wheel
'ti\pWsirig
I:~g
light 'tch
'phsble, at the selector
~~e'
.47K ..~fLii~i0Rwar~I~ ..9r11P

in. thecombine<:\Instrument in the instrument panel
47P

in the combined instrument in the instrumentpanel
57
(322)
3-pole connector
at the control unit, forward of the right-hand
59
2-pole connector
one at the fuel pump, under the luggage
compartment floor (1989 model)
.
one at the control unit, forward of the righthand front door, below the fascia (behind
ilie~m)
\
one (for the Lambda sensor) in the engine
compartment, on the right-hand wheel
housing, next to the distribution block for
the positive supply from the battery
(368)
60
one in the electrical distribution box
one on the right41and side of the engine
compartment, at the air intake (1990
model)
67
6-pole connector
two in the engine compartment, on the righthand side at the air intake
75

76

transm.
under the centre console, at tm.!?\~elector
lever
..
'ambda ~ US, CA, AU, JP, SE, EU
' 94
Cold starting valve
229
fuel injection system

i-hand front door, below
cthe trim)
Fuel feed pump (1989 model)

in the fuel tank, underthe luggage compartment floor
271
Fuel pump relay

at the control unit, forward of the right-hand'
272

in the fuel tank, under the luggage compartment floor 76
Idling spee
fmotor
at the extre . "rr'theleft-hand side of
the cylinderhea >
321
4-pole connector
one at the fuel pump, below the luggage
Valve for charcoar'c:'

in the engine comp
, forward of the
left-hand wheel homW.
'tWeen the wheel
housing member andt ,', ,Jer wing
322
Connector, Auto/Man, Lhl7A

132
Speed transmitter
on the rear of the combined instrument
323
136
Lambda sensor

347

on the right-hand side, under the back seat
under the rubber bellows, behind the centre
console (Convertible)
under the bellows (Convertible)
368
Connector, cold-starting valve

389
NTC resistor
in the engine compartment, under
tie housing (19~O model)
,
390
Modulating v a l v e .
in the engine compartment, foi'Wcjr'd of the
left-hand wheel housing (1990 model)
f01
102
103
123
152A
1528
156

from the interior of the car
housing
159

housing
176
Control unit for EZK ignition system

in the engine compartment, forware1 of the
, left-hand wheel housing
/
200

201

202

203

205
Air mass meter

on the air hose at the air cleaner
206
Fuel injection valves

211
Saab900
~,
the throt-
::U
fuel system: T16 Lambda-US, CA, AU 1989 model-SE, EU,JP.116 Lambda-U$,CA,AU, JP, SE, EU.
)W
li-
of
1e
el
ld
n)
t-
at
re
15
156
159
'---..
Id
n)
It-
\
I
176
10',103,M1989
Ie
~
.~
202
203
205
206
136
271
229
~
341
321
323
389
390
Saab900
200
102
CU14
ron
16.0
16A:AUT
+54
+54
11M
VT 2.5
llC
VT 2.5
,..-
-"55""9"'A-"R""0..o2"'.5_---/
0,.'
~'-
~ ~r
75W
I
I
I
I
+15
I
I
'--.:5"'59"-"'RO'--"'2.5"-
123KI
-.
GN/VT 1.0
22A~
L-...
559B
560A BR IVT 0.5
~
86
30
560A
BRI\JT 0.5
~: .-;\
85
"
/\
229
Y87B 87
559C RD 1.0
59
'"
144rtJ
560
BR/VT 0.5
ill
560
BR/VT 0.5
+15
159
561 BLIRO 2.5
76~31
)~.
1;l
... 3'
I Q~
L
<>
-ci
0
272
fCHECKl
I~
395
en
"""l
(0
10
I/')
U'l1l)
If)
1'1:1
~m
12
200:CU 14
10 39
25
3 20 7
35
;;;
r--
r-..
,...
.....
0
a
0
a
I"')
'"
"'~
I
I
22
I
17
~<:>
~U
on
..?::
27
16
4014
34 3132
~
30
33
I I
I I
I I
.
21
-<
on
"'"0
:!?
0
C!
~
%
o z
~
15
'"~
'"
"0
~ 136
'"
"l
>
Ul
~
;;;
on
'I~I
'" 0
'"
> >
'"
In
'"
159
'"on
..
::~ ~~ ~:~:
,---"6"",'3,-,O""N,-,0,,,.5'-------1 2
<:>
'"
>-
667
1*1
"'"0
"'"0
I-
~IL
<:.0
'"
'"
57QA
0:
..'"
357
'"
Ul
'" m
'"
BL/RD 0.75
... 65 ,
... -,
[~60
..'".
a:
570 BLiRD 0.75
<:>
36 '9
<0
~~~
........
15
f-
571 SV 0.75
570A
r,I;r----cmr:l.'iBL/RD 0.75
'"
rll:~ 1.0
203
( I'\._-------Hh
RD 0.75 VT 0.75
152B~::;
85
'"
13
23
1--1
0.75
"'"o
541E
GN/RD 1.0
11
fVVl 271
5V/VT
541 GN/RO 2.5/
-~
2f1
_~0.75
555
.g:
200:CU 14
:!'
-<>
.g:
.e:.
15
I~ ~
59-
'<t
U1
292B261
;;; 206;;;
540
ON/OL 1.0
9 1B
~m
;;;
.e:.
y~~ ......
~ ~,~~
ffi G ffi 5
~
m
X?1~>~>~~4
347
[~60
~
ci
lQ
ci
147P
4.J
.......
156
L_.J
11 32
~~:
L _.J
402
261
GR/RD 2.5
on
38
1168
BL 0.75
BL 0.75
27
26
1152C
152A
405
261 OR 2.5
r-1
[4]7
123
M 323
262 5V 2.5
1 1
1
2
262
5v 2.5
Saab900
406
11168
BL/VT 0.75 BL 0.75 IBL '0.75
261
GR/RD 2.5
<>
116E
IGL/Ro 1.5
IT,
L.._...J
AC
169
CU14 fuel system
ration
engine is equipped with a CU14 electronic fuel
ction system. The injection system is controlled
supervised by control unit 200 which includes a
roprocessor.
system receives a positive supply from fuse 22
distribution terminal +15 when the ignition
tch is in the start or drive position, and a constant
ply from +30to relays 229and 102 and to pin 15
he RAM (random access memory) of the elecic unit. On the basis of the data stored in the
trol unit and the incoming information from varisensors, the control unit calculates and controls
opening times of injection valves 206. The intion valves are of low-impedance type and must
er be connected to the battery voltage.
,79
The engine is supplied withfael by electrically drivenfuel pump 323 which draws fuel from the fuel tank
and pressurises the fuels}l.~tem.
Automatic Idling Control (Ale) motor 27?is a twophase stepping motor Wh,tRh.;~i$controlle(:fby electronic unit 200 via pins 1,~~,:,~8and 29. This control
circuit is adaptive (rememb'ersittl.e setting during the
immediately preceding idlin~period).
Electronic unit 200 contf7conditioning (AC)
system via pin 21 and
pin 36.
via
The electronic unit

ault diagnosis.
Fault codes a r e o b o f the CHECK
ENGINE lamp. THe'
pln 1 of test
.side of the
socket 391 (locat
.(.Qnnected to
engine cQrnpa!'1: .
pin 31 of electr
. ..
e injection pulse consists of two stages, i.e. the

ening phase and the holding phase. During the
e~ing phase (short time) the full battery voltage is
plied across the injection valves. Electronic unit
o then earths the valves via pin 11. During the
mainder of the injection pulse duration (i.e. the
olding phase), the valves are earthed instead across
series resistor at pin 13 of electronic unit 200. The
Itage across the valves is then reduced to about
2.5 volt.
Cars with atJtoma~ic,t:raAsrnissionarealso,'e:quipped

with swifeb 76. When the selector lever is set to the
drive position, the switch wi II close, which wilfapply a
signal to pin 5 of the electronic unit. The AICmotor
will then compensate for the increased load applied
by the automatic transmission when the engine is
running at idling speed. ,
his method provides accurate fuel metering, even

during short opening times.
.
Exhaust emission control, lambda
Via pin 39, electronic unit 200 receives information

on the engine speed in the form of pulses from the
ignition system. Via pin 20, the electronic unit receives information on the throttle angle from throttle
.angle transmitter 203. (Analog signal between 0.1
and 4.9 V.)
Temperature transmitter 202 is of Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC)type and provides continuous
engine temperature information to the control unit.
Air mass meter 205 in the CU14 system measures
the air mass flowing through a separate air passage
in parallel with themain air path. This minimises the
risk of fouling of the hot filament and no burning-off,
. such as in the LH system, is therefore necessary.
In the event of loss of signal to the electronic unit, an
emergency system known as the "Limp home" function will come into operation, which enables the car
to be driven, although the engine performance will be
restricted. At the same time, the CHECK ENGINE
warning lamp will light up.
Autom~t'~:tt~
On cars destined for markets on which catalytic emission control is mandatory, the system also includes
components for refined fuel control. Lambda sensor
136 continually measures the oxygen content of the
exhaust gases, thus enabling the electronic unit to
correct the fuel/air mixture to its optimum value. The
sensor is heated by preheater 271 which is protected
by fuse 1.
The gaseous hydrocarbons (fuel fumes) vented from
the fuel tank are discharged to a charcoal canister
and are dumped into the engine for burning. This is
controlled by ELCD valve 321 which is controlled from
pin 17 of electronic unit 200.
Fault tracing
See the Service Manual, Group 2:3, CU14 injection
system.
Signals to and from air mass meter 205:

Pins 1 and 2: earth
Pin 3: air mass signal to pin 35 of electronic unit 200
Pin 5: positive supply from relay 229
Pin 6: idling CO adjustment to pin 22 of electronic
unit 200 (only cars without catalytic converter)
The system for cars with catalytic converter is adaptive.
Saab900
Saab 900 CV 1991 Trionic 5.5

by Misu
AUT
+54
+54
+15
I
He
vr
l11lA
2.$
~'D8
j
VT 2.5
1~
'Iff
I."
:1\
<>
1>
1>:\"
VJ 1.0
"
IS
,;
~I~
-~GlNrl
I EDU II (~ 1
I
0
.c
'Xt; p72
':i
~
,;
I~
"~
ll>
1:1
..
I~
14
33
fj
31
41
22 43
...~
~
~
z~"Ill"
179
".c
3~X ~
c
~
"
I-Z:::;)>-
III
00
.-:..-:
w"
>-0
"
:l
~
9 10 11
49
I
I
I
200
66
rl
'"0
lot') -.n r.n

lot')
cicic:::ic
'"
~
3
.,;
32 34 58 39
;a
'"""'
III
~tJ152B 152A~t:
47P 7
+30
4.
I
I
I
12
44 17 18
66
200
21 27
23
24 2547
50
3.
15 45
42
6667
59 54
. ..
~I%
...
'"
ci 6
.: Ii!
!~Jnl
171
.
~.
:5
156
AC
~u
47/110
233
01$H
~,
LH 2.4 Fuel System Diagrams
I~
..
3
J,
::
.c
1.;IH,6., ;1
'"
,;
YEIBU 0.75
i:
'"
N
CI
'"
CU14 fuel system
~cations If components
Saab900.
Battery\
22A
Fuse holder
housing
31
Reversing light switch

lever
47P

in the 'combined instrument in the instrument panel
57
3-pole connector
in the engine compartment, on the righthand side, at the air intake
59
2-pole connector
one at the fuel pump, under the luggage
compartment floor
one at the control unit, forward of the righthand front door, below the fascia (behind
the trim)
one at the expansion tank, on the right-hand
side of the engine compartment
60
wheel housing
one (for the automatic transmission) under
the centre console, at the selector lever
67
6-pole connector
in the engine compartment, on the righthand side at the air intake
75

76

transm.
under the centre console, at the select{)r
lever
94
Cold starting valve

102
Fuel pump relay

at the control unit, fOlWard of the right-hand
front door, belowthefascia (behind the trim)
123
4-pole connector
one at the fuel pump, below the luggage
132
Speed transmitter
on the rear of the combined instrument
136
Lambda sensor
144
146
152A
1528
152C
800st pressure switch (T8)

in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, on the I~ft-hand wheel
housing
159

housing
166
Pressure switch for the AC radiator fan

in the engine compartment, on the drying
agent container, forward of the right-hand
wheel housing
169
Switch, AC
on the fascia
171
Anti-freeze thermostat (cycling clutch contact) for the AC

in the engine compartment, on the righthand side of the air conditioner housing
176

in the engine compartment, fOlWard of the
200
Control unit for the CU14 system

201

202

203
205
206
Fuel inje
on the engiffl
211
Earthing poinfdn'the gearbox
229
Main relay for the fuel injection system

271
Preheater
in the Lambda sensor, on the exhaust mahifold
272
Idling speed adjustment motor

at the extreme front, on the left-hand side of
the cylinder head
321
Valve for charcoal canister

left-hand wheel housing, between the wheel
housing member and the outer wing
323

347

on the right-hand side, under the back seat
368
Connector, cold-starting valve

at the control unit, fOlWard of the right-hand
front door, belowthe fascia (behind the trim)
391
CU14 test socket, flashing codes

in the engine compartment, on the righthand side, at the fresh air intake
395
Series resistor for the CU14 system

Saab900
e manifold
CU14 fuel system
321
146
land
trim)
75
ight-
136
146
203
205
159
202
229
~~'
~
".
,,'~-
\.
CJ.
~
-.". -'-
272
347
.!:
~\
.'
321
395
Saab900
200
'
102
83
.-;
..
-.,
--:
system(Witl1:i,t!~~hometer) C8, 18, 'j~ff.ambda, Ti6
I"
on
em
hom
instrument socket for , ,
T16 m
1
model of
+30
I
1
7 GR 2.5
1238
GN/VT 1.5
+54
1
I
.MilO
.lilli9
123D
GN/VT 1.0
rfl22AI
"--+-.. . .
~-------{_-.l----.jl-----<
123H
GNjVT 1.5
71
Gl/RD 1.0
123C
GN/VT 0.75
1528
182 8l 0.5
204
284
8l 0.5
146
~~42.5
60
6 T16,\
Gl/VT 0.5 }
)-,=-,~--fO=:ot-'<CS, IS, IS,\,
M89: TS T8,\
284A
8l 0.75
2
204
Gl/VT 0.5
318
102
393
SV 1.5
193
SV 0.75.
93
123D GN VT 1.0
284A
8l 0.5
Bl 25.0
211
8L 16.0
~21
73
281
SV 0.75
15S
58 GR 4.0
D15H 292
A
SaabgOO
:ion system (with tachometer) C8, 18, 18 Lambda, T16, T16 Lambda 1989 model otT8, T8 Lambda
ration
:e
fault.. tracing hints
9 breakerless ignition system is equipped with a

II sensor. (The EZK ignition system is discussed in
eparate section.)
en ignition switch 20 is in the start or drive posin, ignition coil 5 and amplifier 146 will be enered"{+15).
"
e amplifier receives ignition pulses (via a 3-core
ielded cable) from the Hall sensor in ignition disibutor 6.
20"
e pulses are amplified and adapted in alY1

6, A high-tension pulse is generated in tl)
cdary winding each time a pulse breaks th~p~'r:Qary
rcuit of the ignition coil. The high-tensionpl..t1s~is
ensuppl ied to the correspond ing spark piug via the
istributor.
achometer' 110 is supplied across fuse 7. The conrol pulses required for displaying the engine speed
re supplied from the ignition amplifier.
The ignition system will be energised when the ignition switch is in the drive position.
1.
Check fuse 3, and check that terminal 15 ofthe

ignition coil and terminal 4 on the timing service
instrument socket are live.
2.
Check that terminal 4 of amplifier 146 is live:
3.
Tachometer: First check fuse 7, and check that

the supply to it is live. Check that terminal 3 on
the circuit board for tachometer 110 is live, and
that ignition pulses are being supplied from the
amplifier.
4: ." >Che'tkallcohnectors, cable harnesses and

earth connections.
See also the fault-tracing section for each component in the Service Manual, Group 3:1, Electrical
iming service instrument (TSI) socket 73 is intended

or a special ignition service instrument and has the
. ollowing terminals:
Positive supply direct from battery 1
Earth
Solenoid (terminal 50) on starter motor 4
Positive supply (+15) from the ignition switch
when the latter is in the start or drive position
Ignition pulses from ignition system amplifier
146
6.
75
85
Not used
For a more detailed description of each component in

the ignition system, see the Service Manual, 3:1,
Electrical system, Instruments.
Saab900
86
Ignition system (with tachometer) C8, /8, 18 Lambda, T16, T16 Lambda 1989 model on8, T8 Lambda
1
Battery
Starter motor
side)
Ignition coil
on the cross-member above the radiator
Ignition distributor
at the front of the en-gine
Earthing pointon the radiator cross-member
20
Ignition switch
seats
22A
Fuse holder
housing
47
Combined instrument
on the fascia
60
housing
73

iA the electrical distribution box, in the en-
gine compartment, on the left-hand wheel
housing
75
Distribution block
93
Earthing point on the left-hand wheel housing member
102
Fuel pump relay

in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, relay positions F and G
(T8 and T8 Lambda) or relay position G (18
and 18 Lambda)
110
Tachometer
in combined instrument 47 on the fascia
146

wheel housing
152A
152B
29-poJe white connector

157
Spark plug
on the engine
158

housing
211
Saab900
system (with tachometer) C8, 18, 18 lambda, T16, T16lambda 1989 model ofT8, T8lambda
102
110(47)
Saab900
146
87
88
EZK ignition system (with tachometer),~1989 model.
h
home r and timing
m el
socket, 1
m
me
11II
se
+30
I
I
152A
L!..7~G!>-R .=,2.",5_ _-1>29
ct----'-7--'G"'R--'2"".5'--
--,
20
~~L"_"=_'-"'---C>_---------~1"'23!..:G""N"-V.!.!T'--1"'.5"---I>28q_-"12~3s.E
~G':'.IN~T~1.2.5_<>_~2..l'~C!...!d-J
.-
+54
+54
1230
GN/VT 1.0
I11E
VT 2.5
I11C
VT 2.5
182 BL 0.5
CHECK
ENGINE
93
I-
>
z
~~'iOiiOl-
'-'
'"'"
157
OJ
10
16
13
12
655A
GL 0.75
17
549A
VL VT 0.75
123
e~\T
4
075
.
~57
204
15 3
176
24
655A GL 0.75
284
BL 0.5
284C
BL 0.5
1528
60
l
l
E
OJ
....
0
0
....
z
'-'
'"
'"....
0
....OJ
OJ
on
"-
'"
'"
;::
200
>
l/l
'"
G
SL
203
'"'-'
--'
m
649
SV 1.5
---"'r;- ;- ,
'---'='-='-==-_ _
'"
,, ,,
'----="--""'-"'''-'''=----' 24
345
649
SV 0.75
649A}
SV 0.75
, 201
,
,
25
,
,
--,5 5 ,
I.: _ _ ::J
566A SV 0.75
201
122 GL 2.5
BL 16.0
281. , ..__.
SV 0.75
280
GR 1.5
158
01SO 342
Saab900
EZK ignition system (with tachometer), 1989 model
on
ignition system is fitted only to Hi-valve
without turbocharger. This breakerless ignitern is equipped with a Hall sensor. It is
ed by a knock sensor, which provides the
possible engine perform"ance on any grade of
is provides good fuel economy and cleaner
gases.
15
ignition switch is in the start or drive posiition coil 320 with integrated amplifier and
.ntrol unit 176 will be energised (+15).
I unit 176 receives ignition pulses via a threeielded cable from crankshaft sensor 345. The
cy of the pulses is proportional to the engine
The control unit then adjusts the timing on the
f the following factors:
g~'
Ignition pulses are supplied from terminal 16 of the

control unit to timing service instrument socket 73,
tachometer 110 and other syste'rristhat are depend- ~
ent on ignition pulses.
Tachometer
Tachometer 110, located in combined instrument
47, is supplied across fuse 7 and red 29-pole connector 1528. The control pulses required for displaying the engine speed are supplied from EZK control
unit 176.

Timing service instrument (TSI) socket 73 is intended
for a special ignition service instrument and has the
following terminals:
'nespeed
1.
ine load
2.
Earth
knocking tendencies
3.
Solenoid (terminal 50) of starter motor 4
4.
Positive supply from the ignition switch when

the latter is in the start or drive position
5.
Ignition pulses from EZK control unit 176
6.
Not used
nition pulses supplied from terminal 16 of the

I unit are amplified and adjusted in ignition
320 with integrated amplifier. A high-tension
is generated in the secondary winding each
a pulse breaks the primary circuit ofthe ignition
; The high-tension pulse is then supplied to the
esponding spark plug (157) via distributor 6.
ignition is set at 5 when the engine is started.
ignition setting is dependent on the speed of the
ine, and adjustment starts ataround 700 r/min.lt
djusted in accordance with the values stored in
control unit. (The distributor has no centrifugal or
uum advance mechanisms.)
I systell) control unit 200 provides the ignition
em with information on the engine load. Throttle
Ie transmitter 203 is closed (earthed) when the
, ttle is closed, i.e. when the engine is idling.
en the load has exceeded the value stored in the
ntrol unit, thetimingwill be retarded by about 6 on
'cylinders. The timing will return to normal in steps
around 1 after the load has ceased to increase.
e control unit receives information on knocking in
yofthe cylinders via knock sensor 178. Thetiming
then retarded only in the cylinder in which knocking
s detected (in steps of around 3). This will continuntil knocking has ceased or until the timing has
en retarded by a total of about 13. The timing
eturns to normal in steps of 0.35.
EZK test tapping 145 is intended for special test
equipment. Terminal 15 of the.control unit delivers a
pulse for each knock detected. (Positive voltage is
supplied t!2 the cgnnectorwhen,the ignition switch is
in the drive positiOn.)
.. .
If a fault shoult(occur in the control unit, a signal
(earth) will b~ delivered from terminal 3, which will
cause CHECK ENGINE warning lamp 47P to flash.
(This lamp can also be activated by the fuel injection
system.)
.:..
u,

the ignition system, see the Service Manual, 3:1,
Electrical system, Instruments.
fault..tracing hints
As a general rule, the connector to the, control unit
should always be disconnected when measurements
are made on the ignition system cable harness. Use
an ohmmeter, not a buzzer.
1.
Check fuse 3, and check that terminal 30f the

ignition coil and terminal 4 of the timing service
2.
Check that terminal 6 of control unit 176 is live.
3.
Tachometer: First check fuse 7 and check that

the supply to it is live. Check that terminal 3 of
that ignition pulses are being supplied from
control unit 176.
.
4.
Check all connectors, cable harnesses and

earth connections.
'See also the faUlt-tracing section for each component in the Service Manual, Group 3:1, Electrical
ons
a8
2- --:{f!?
(}
......-/
:and timing
el
em
ment socket,
+30
~ik'!.\
I
I
()l,..' r1
+54
I
I11E
1230
GN/VT 1.0
VT 2.5
146
648 SV 1.5
651 BL 1.5
93
178
....
>
z
"
'"'" '"'"
..,
10
'"'"'"
16
13
aJ
r,0
>
..,Ul
r::
~
d
OJ
'"
r-
2B4
20
649A
SV 1.5
17
6L 0.5
aJ
r0
D
'"
" '"
0
15
176
24
'"r-
12
r::
649
SV 1.5
-,I
200
649
SV 0.75
>-__....:5""6""6A'--S"'V'-0"'-.7""-S
II
I
I
I
__15
5:
~l,t 112 ~
201
1230 GN
T 1.0
BL 25.0
211
56 GR 4.0
'.()1SH 342
Saab.90Q.'"
ElK ignition system (wi'tM: 'tacMoli1eter)';
ignition system is fitted only to 16-valve

without turbocharger. This breakerless ignitem is equipped with a Hall sensor. It is
ed by a knock sensor, which provides the
possible engine performance on any grade of
is provides good fuel economy and cleaner
gases.
e ignition switch is in the start or drive posiplifier 146 and ElK control unit 176 will be
sed (:+15).
I unit 176 receives ignition pulses via a threeielded cable from crankshaft sensor 345. The
ncy of the pulses is proportional to the engine
".The control unitthen adjusts the timing on the
of the following faCtors:'
inespeed
Ignition pulses are supplied from terminal 16 of the

control unit to timing service instrument socket 73,
tachometer 110 and other systems that are dependent on ignition pulses.
Tachometer
Tachometer 110, located in combined instrument
47, is supplied across fuse 7 and red 29-pole connector 1528. The control pulses required for displaying the engine speed are supplied from ElK control
unit 176.
Timing service Instrument socket
gine load
y knocking tendencies
If a fault should occur in the control uH'il:;

(e-arth) will be delivered from terminal 3, which will
cause CHECK ENGINE warning lamp 47P to frash.
(This lamp can also be activated by the fuel injection
system.)
~ ~
'gnitio~ pUI~s supplied from terminal 16 of the
01 unit are amplified and adjusted in amplifier
A high-tension pulse is generated in the secrywindingeach time a pulse breaks the primary
it of the ignition coil. The high-tension pulse is
n supplied to the corresponding spark plug (157)
distributor 6.
ignition is set at 10 when the engine is started.
sign ition setti ng is dependent on the speed of the
.gine, and adjustment starts at around 700 r/min. It
adjusted in a.ccordance with the values stored in
~controli!,lnit. (The distributor has no centrifugal or
cuumadvance mec.bflnisms.) The basic setting is
at 850.rJmin, with the'throttle switch closed.
tel system control unit 200 provides the ignition
stem with i'nformation on the engine load (load
i'gnal). Throttle angle transmitter 203 is closed
rthed) when the throttle is closed, Le. when the
ilgine is idling. When the load has exceeded a cerinvalue stored in the control unit, thetimingwill be
tarded by about 5 - go (engine speed-dependent)
n all cylinders. The timing will return to normal in
teps of around O. r (1.4 per engine revolution)
fter the load has ceased to increase.
he control unit receives information on knocking in
ny ofthe cylinders via knock sensor 178. The timing
js then retarded only in the cylinder in which knocking
Vas detected (in steps of around 3). This will continlie until knocking has ceased or until the timing has
bee'n retarded by a total of about 13. The timing
returns to normal in steps of 0.7 per spark firing
(1.4 per engine reVOlution).
Test tapping 145 is intended for special test equipment. Terminal 15 of the control unit delivers a pulse
for each knock detected. (Positive voltage is suppl ied
to the connector when the ignition switch is in the
drive position.)
Saab900
Timing service instrument (TSI) socket 73 ijintended

for a special ignition service instrument and has the
following terminals:
1.
2.
Earth
3.
Solenoid (terminal 50) on starter motor 4
4.
Positive supply from the ignition switch when

the latter is in the start or drive position
5.
Ignition pulses from ElK control unit 176
6.
Not used

the ignition system, see the Service Manual, Group
3:1, Electrical system, Instruments.
Fault..traclng hints
As a,general rule, the connector to the control unit
should always be disconnected when measurements
are made on the ignition system cable harness. Use,
an ohmmeter, not a buzzer.
.,
1.
Check fuse 3, and check that terminal 3 of the ignition coil and terminal 4 ofthe timing service
2.
Check thatterminai 6 of control unit 176 is live.
3.
Tachometer: First check fuse 7 and check that

the supply to it is live. Check that terminal 3 of
that ignition pulses are being supplied from
control unit 176.
4.
Check all Qonnectors, cable harnesses and

earth connections.
See also the faUlt-tracing section for each component in the Service Manual, Group 3:1, Electrical
j~:~IlJP~l1ents
146
A
(~
~~~~~!~;:i;;i;'~.' ':::
~~n:'t~~rlgnt41alidside of the engine com-
iQ,\
left~
.partinent
e electronic ignition system

artment, forward of the
.:sing
152A
1528
29-pe.ctor
29"13
r
in the.e i i ' t p l e n t , in the electrical
distributin bQXOh the left-hand wheel
housing;.Th~:i~
tors are accessible
!~car.
.
from the iht~riB~:'1
157
Spark plug
on the engine
158
Negative distributiol1itetminal
in the electrical distribution box, in the en-.
.housing
176
Control unit for the ElK ignition system

178

Knock sensor for the ElK system

on the engine, between the two centre intake ports
200
3-pole connector (116)

Control unit for the LH fuel injection system

201

203
Throttle angle transmitter- LH fuel injection

system
on the throttle housing
Starter motor
side)
at the front of the engine
20
Ignition switch
seats
22A
Fuse holder
housing
47
Combined instrument
on the fascia
47P
57
60
housing
67
6-pole connector
two in the engine compartment, on the righthand side, at the air intake (one is for the
116 Lambda)
204
Test connector - LH fuel injection system

211
73

housing
320
Ignition coil with integrpted amplifier (1989

model)
in the engine compartment on the righthand side, above, the battery
75
Distribution block
345
Crankshaft sensor
behind the crankshaft pUlley
93
110
Tachometer
123
4-pole connector
in the engine compartment on the left-hand
wheel housing, forward ofthe electrical distribution box (EZK test tapping)
145
Test tapping, ElK

wheel housing, forward ofthe electrical distribution box
Saab900
EZK ignition system (with tachometer), 1990 model

em
:he
:::al
~el
)Ie
he
n-
Ie
:9
t6
47P,110
73
146 M"i990
176
178
203
Saab900
9~
Q:l
Battery-charging system
152A
75
BL 25.0
10
VT 6.0
RO 25.0
20
211
54
152A
30
86
21
11
VT 2.5
CAB
11
VT 2.5
59
11C
VT 2.5
152B
71 GL RD 1.0
182
BL 0.5
... -
I
I
I
L_
.....~
I
147E
8 _..I
195
GN/VT 0.5
152C
01SH 402
A
Saab900
Battery-charging system
lion
95
Fault-tracing hints
harging warning lamp informs the, driver of

:er or not the alternator is charging.
1.
Check the battery voltage at terminal 8+ of the

alternator.
the ignition switch is in the drivepositiofl, a

e voltage will be supplied across;fuse 7;;and
9-pole connector 1528 to chargifrlg war'ning
7E in the combined instrument. rheothehside
lamp is connected to alternator 2.
2.
Check fuse 7 and check that the supply to it is

live.
3.
Check that the bulb in the warning lamp is intact.
',1::
Check the connectors, cable harnesses and the

h connection of the alternator.
the alternator is not rotating Qrcdf it J

ing the battery for any other reasqn,;y;
charging warning lampwill beeatttledf,
inal 0+ on the alternator, and theJarn
ktnat terminal 0+ of the alternator is live.

...ffl~en:ille and .measure the voltage be-
termiJ~
the alternator is charging,

same voltage as the supplll.fro
he
voltage will then be appliedtoil:;>o:lIi1iiterl'liinals.of
warning lamp, and the lamp;will:therefore be
nguished.
, e'h
'~;l-{)~Itc~rnator and earth. Also mea~l.1relhevoltagebetween D+ on the alternator

and earth. The difference between these two
voltages should not be greater than 0.7 V.
NOTE
If the charging warning lamp bulb should blow, the
alternator will cease charging.
Saab900
locationt!)~.f.~omponents
1
Batte
.
on thejlrI~.!l~?I:ftlnd. side of the engine compartment),

;.iiw{~U;:
Alternatori'c'
on the Ie
Starter mgt "

c c .
on the left~fia'hdside of the engine (intake
side)
Earthing pointpofhe radiator cross-member
20
Ignition switch
seats
21

in the electrical distribution box, in the engine compartment, relay position E
22A
Fuse holder
housing
47E
Charging warning lamp

in the combined instrument
59
2-pole connector (CAB)

housing
75
Distribution block
152A
152B
152C

158

housing
211
257
Earthing point on the alternator bracket
Saab900
nents
21
22A
59
152A
1528
152C
Saab900
APe system
98
em
+54
+30
I
11G
VT 2.5
5C
GR 1.0
r-,
146
I
L
I
7
131
RDjVT 1.0
..J
152A
131
RD 1.0
178
29
488
GN 0.5
284
BL 0.5
489
BR 0.5
486
GRjRD 1.5
767
152A
485
BL/RD 0.75
767
13
483
SV 1.0
483
VT 0.75
25
VT 0.75(M89)
VT 0.5(M90)
~180
20
SV 1.0
23
484
GN/RD 1.0
10
177
5
12
Q15H 472
481
GLjVT 1.5
,-----"''------
~\
233
481B
GL/VT 1.5
481A
GLjVT 1.5
-187
481A
GLjVT 1.5
487
SV 1.5
93
Saab900
ARGsystem
Ion
Faulttraclng hints
gine is equipped with an Automatic Performontrol (APC) system, which enables the engine
st itself automatically to the grade of fuel
d to it at any particular time.
:-.
C system is controlled by cont"rohunit 177,

is supplied (+54) from fuse 10:Jne unit resignals frpm various sensors,p;t6:~~sses the
sand then controls the boost pressure of the
harger v.ia solenoid valve1!79:
stem receives informationfrdm the fOllowing
rs:
ock sensor 178, which s~hs;es any knocking in
engine
'
Always take the following measures before fault-tracing in the APC system:
1.
Disconnect the connector from the control unit.
2.
Disconnect the connector from the component

which is suspected to be faulty.
3.
Use an ohmmeter to check the wiring for any

open circuits, etc.
The resistance ofthe pressure transmitter (measured

at atmospheric pressure) is 5 -13 ohm.
For other particulars, see theJault-tracing section in
the Service Manual, Group 2:3, Fuel system, injection engine.
'ssure transmitter 18Q Wt:lJch senses the presre in the intake pipeUi?,str~arn of the throttle.
c
1,0
99
signals from the sensors and from ignition sysamplifier 146 are fed continuously into the conynit. On the basis of the electrical signais red, the unit then controls the solenoid valve and
the boost pressure from the turbocharger. In
tion, it receives a signal from brake light switch
when the foot brake is applied, which enables the
trol unit to reduce the boost pressure to the basic
tie. Since the boost pressure is continuously adted to the octane rating of the fuel and the running
nditions of the engine, it has proved unnecessary
,provide the adjustment margins, that must nor'Ily be allowed to avoid damage to the engine. As a
suit, maximum energy can be extracted from the
el used on any particular occasion.
rs with the Turbo engine and Cruise Control are
Uipped with vacuum switch 233, which is actuated
y vacuum pump 187 via a vacuum hose. When the
ntacts have opened, the control unit reduces the
ost pressure to the basic value.
Saab900
:E~O
;~P;>C'systetn
ibution box, in the en"'the left-hand wheel

29
59
on the left-hand
93
Earthing point Qlltt1e"I~ftThCJnd wheel hous,,;,,'.1, '

ing member
146
Amplifier for the ele,ctnm,i,gignition system

in the engine compa,rfrMnt, forward of the
left-hand wheel housing;
152A
152C
29-pole white connector,

177
Control unit for the APC system

178
Knock sensor
on the engine, below the intake manifold
179
Solenoid valve
on the radiator fan casing
180
Pressure transmitter
187

233
Vacuum switch
wheel housing
Saab900
ponents
~ enheel
29
Saab~OO
Headlam
12 11
11 12
XX't/-
--=-28"-='SV-'--'-1."'5,
7
+30
20
17
59
BR/Vr 0.75
12(M89)
123P(M90)
GR/Vl 1.5
10
SE'F1'EU'GB'ME}
FE,AU,M90: JP .
-----1-'''''''_.
59G
BR
r 0.75
US,CA,M89: JP
T,M90: GB
EU,GB
GN 0.5
1259
41A SV 0.5
I
SA
GR 4.0
SE,FI,EU,
GB,M90: JP
US,CA,
M89: JP
ME,FE,AU
373
SV 0.75
,,~I
41B
GN 0.5
20
GR 1.5
30
r-+--_-;-.......=86=t-__{
31 GL 1.5
31A
60 31
1528
~8c1-"'31'--GL~1!=.5~-+
~~L
....J
31
158
s
56B
56A
M89: GB
~B2'5
'"-
60
18
GL 1.5
~
19A
BL 1.0
18A
GL 1.0
~~
""-=t.'J,, ~--'-'''--I>
'---
23 GR 1.5
25 BL VT 1.5
13, 14,
234 (US,CA)
... 13, 14,15,
234 (US,CA)
'--
24 GL 1.5
26 VT 1.5
015H 422
Saab900
Headlamps
ration
diQ3
GB market (1989 model)

Cars delivered to the GB market also have dim dipped
beams. These cars are fitted with two single-pole
connectors (60) in the electrical distribution pox.
eadlamps can be switched on onlywhenigniswitch 20 is in the parked ordrjX,~,' position.

ntwill then flow to terminal XOflighJ~Witch 10.
Cars for Italian market and 1990 models for GB

,n the light switch is in position.2
upplywill
al<en from terminal 56 to th'
r" coil in
ting relay 8, via red 29-pole
52B. The
y coil will be energised and t8.;9ts will be
to their "right-hand" P?~iti~~~;':~ I' ,,' beam fil, nts 11 are supplied (+30pJiatlle'contacts ofthe
er" coil and terminaI56~,iqcrrO$S fuses 14 and
Cars delivered to these market are fitted with warning

lamp 47V which shows when the head lamps are
switched on.
'
con
"lower" coil is used for switching between full

m and dipped beam. Each time the coil is enered by operation of dips""itch 215, the contacts
ange position and remaTnthere until the dip switch
operated again.
The head lamps wi II be operative when ignition switch
20 is in the drive position and when light switch 10 is
in position 2.
e supply from fuse 15 is also taken to full beam

rning lamp 47G in the combined instrument.
r particulars ofthe lighting wiring in light switch 10
n cars destined for the US and CA markets and the
989 model for JP, see the section entitled "Lighting
or controls, US, CA and 1989 model for JP".
1.
Check fuses 14 and 15 (full beams) and fuses

16 and 17 (dipped beams) and check that the
supply to them is live.
2.
Check the bulbs and check that the supply to

them is live. Check the earthing at each lamp.
3.
Check the light switch, the lighting relay and the

terminals of the dip switch.
4.
Check the connectors, cable harnesses and

earth connections.
For particulars of fault-tracing on the parking lights,

see the section entitled "Parking lights".
eadlamp flasher
he full beams can also be switched on by means of
dip switch 215, regardless of the setting of the ignition switch and the light switch.
When the dip switch is operated, both coils in the
lighting relay will be energised. Full beam filaments
11 are then supplied (+30) from terminal 30 of lighting relay 8, via the relay contacts and terminal 56A.
Dipped beams
When the light switch is in position 2, the supply will
be taken from terminal 56 to the "upper" coil in
lighting relay 8, via 29-pole red connector 1528. The
relay coil will be energised and the contacts will be
set to their "right-hand" position. Dipped beam filaments 12 are supplied (+30) via the contacts of the
"lower" coil and terminal 56B, across fuses 16 and
17.
Parking lights
When the headlamps are switched on, parking lights
13, which also include rear lights 14 and number
plate illumination 15, will also be alight. (On certain
markets, side marker lights 234 are also included.)
When the head lamps are switched on, the supply to
the parking lights is taken from light switch 10 in
position 2 via terminals Xand 58. The parking lights
are discussed in a separate section.
Saab900
104
Headlamps
3
Lighting relay
in the electrical distributlonbm< in the engine compartment, relay positions A and B
152A
152B

29-polered connector
158

housing
10
Light switch
on the left-hand side of the fascia
11
Full beam filament

in the left-hand andiJiight,:\haQcL/leadlamps
,--'.- .-':t-;::".-" ':':':--"--
215
Dip switch
on the left-hand side of the steering column
12
Dipped beam filament:

;J,;'"
in the left-hand and right-hanctheadlamps
234
13
Parking lights
in the front light clusters
Side marker lights

in the. front light clusters
14
Rear lights, 3-D and 5-0

in the rear light clusters and on the tailgate
Rear lights, 2-D and 4-0
in the rear light clusters
15

on the tailgate (3-D and 5-0)
on the rear sill (2-D and 4-0)
17
Extra rheostat for the lighting of switches

and controls
20
Ignition switch
seats
22A
Fuse holder
housing
47G
Full beam warning lamp

47V
Warning lamp, head lamps switched on

58
12-pole connector
on the angle bracket, under the fascia on
the left-hand side (behind the knee shield)
592-pole connector
in the fascia, beside light switch 10
60
Single-pole connector (GB) (1989 model)

two in the electrical distribution box, in the
wheel housing
113
Relay for the electrically heated rear window

Saab900
Headlamps
B
22A
60t
60 M1989
152A
1528
158
41G,41V
Saab900'
21ti
105
106
Dim dipped beam - GB 1989 model
m -- GB, 1989 model
Dim dip
12
12
29 SV 1.$
XX)f--------:--;=:;;7TTT}';":'---:----_____
XX
+30
I
I
152A
7 GR 2.$
1528
7A GR 1.0
7A GR 1.0
$]
'"ci
'"
12
GR/VT 1.5
l-
>
n:
l-
>
'"m
~
312A
SV 0.75
161 5
373
SV 0.75
1528
[12
T 0.5
568
23 GR 1.5
60
1528
86 r=..:.-=-...:.=------i2::~---.::.3"-'
""GL,,--,-,,1.5=----p 18 q---=.31,-,G""L,-,1;;o;.5'---J
24 GL 1.5
0150 412
Saab900
ration
fault-tracing hints
dipped beams are fitted only toc'arts'for the GB
1.
Set the ignition switch to the parked position.
et.
2.

live.
3.
Check the headlamp bulbs and check that the

4.
Check fuses 16 and 17.
5.
Check the operation of light switch 10 and relays 78 and 259 by measuring at their terminals.
6.
Check resistor 80.
7.
Check the cable harnesses and earth connections.
n the dim dipped beams areslJlfilsh~d on. the

~d beams will be alight at 1QrQ;iQi~~11ity, and the
ing lights will also be switched
qri.,:,,
" ;', '. .;' \
-~---..
~/:<
n the parking lights are swlt,,grl:

t switch 10 is in position 1.' '}j'Q-( relay 78 is
rgised across fuse 19 and the r ay is energised.
circuit is earthed acrossteFaY(2S9. When relay
>is energised, the dipped'oeaiTlfilamEmts will be
pplied from fuse 4, across tl;l~ relay contacts and
istor 80.
.' .
m the relay, dipped beam filaments 12 are suped across fuses 16 arid'!t '7.
en the headlampsa~~wltched to dipped beam:
ght switch 10 is in position 2, and the bulbs are
pplied across the lighting relay 8. The coil of relay
8 is not energised. and the relay contacts open the
ircuit across resistor 80.
".;f.
Saab900
Ea
Earthi
Lighffn .
in
gine cbWlb
the"'e'r
'tilm box in the enyipositions A and 8
10
Light sWitcn;y(
on the left-hand
12
Dipped beam filam\ltil~ft;'>

in the left-handql)chright..hand head lamps
13
Parking lights
in the front light clustersi
14
Rear lights, 3-D and 5-D

Rear lights, 2~D and 4-0
15

20
Ignition switch
seats
22A
Fuse holder
housing
58
12-pole connector
60
. two in the electrical distribution box in the
wheel housing
78
Relay
behind the electrical distribution box in the
engine compartment
80
Resistor
behind the electrical distribution box in the
engine compartment
152A
1528

from the interior of the car,
158

. in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, on the left-hand wheel
housing
259
Reverse current protection relay

behind the electrical distribution box, in the
wheel housing
': -;;-:;;-<>
Saab900
Dirn dipped bearn-GS::

. ...' .
nents
en:i B
60
60
152A
1528
158
m~el
on
d)
he
1d
al
sl
Ie
1-
~I
e
d
10
Saab900
td
ing lightS
12
28 SV 1.5
XX
29 SV 1.5
7
+30
I
+54
I
+30
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
on
..,:
on
'"
l-
>
C!)
11N
""
on
VT 2.5
'"
<:>
""
"
oq
20
oq
'"
C!)
l-
0
N
>
15
'"
'"
0>
1528
<Xl
60
18
895 GL 0.5
"'>
I-
<:>
'"~
60
on
894A GL VT 1.5
+30
I
I
1528
7A
GR 1.0
894GL/VT 1.0
56 31 GL 1.5
10
on
0
"
I-
>
on
"0
>
'"
III
0>
;;:;
[Q
t>
on
""
N
on
0
"
I-
>
'"
[Q
0>
on
17
1528
18A GL 1.0
'-'--23 GR 1.5
13, 14,
234
.._ 13, 14, 15,
234
Saab900
24 GL 1.5
I-
>
z
<:>
"-
'"~
ration
fault..traclng hints
ars for the CA market, the headlamp. di~ped

s also serve as daylight driving Iigl1tS.;The lights
e switched on when the ignition sv,htch is in the
position and the Iight switch isseftoi or1:'The
H.lmination
ihg lights, rear lights, number pi
side marker lights will also be a
The daylight driving lights will be operative when

ignition switch 20 is in the drive position and light
switch 10 is in position 0 or 1.
1.
Check fuses 16 and 17 (dipped beams) and

check that the supply to them is live.
n ignition switch 20 is in the dtjv~;;position and

switch 10 is in position 0 or1i,ttrmiinal 87A of
174 will supply dippedb~pl}l>f!'i3ments 12
s fuses 16 and 17.
2.

them is live. Check the earthing.
3.
Check light switch 10 and relay 174.
4.

earth connections.
n the light switch is in PQ!li;9P\fyreJay 174 will

nergised from terminal5(3pfil!gfutswitch 10. The
y will be energised, thuss~it9hing out the dayt driving lights, in ordert'o'avo'dreverse currents.
Saab900
Saab900
10
Light ;:'WI'Lt;II
on the left:-h.cl'l~~~.ij~~:i~)ftli:le fascia
12
Dipped beamfWi1l
in the left-hand and
13
Parking lights
in the front light cluster~{i
14

15

on the tailgate (3-D and 5-D)
on the rear sill (2-D and 4-D)
17

and controls
20
Ignition switch
seats
22A
Fuse holder
housing
58
12-pole connector
60
wheel housing
113
Relay for the electrically heated rearwindow

152A
1528

158

housing
174

in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, relay position F
234
Side marker lights

Daylight driving lights - CA
113
mponents
~r
14
1-
:e
..... g ... _ _
14
s
22A
60
113
152A
15213
174
14
It
1~I
n
)
e
d
N
1-
j-
11'4
113,8
Saab90()
'Il
1....-
---'
114
Extra fog
11
25
8l/vI 1.5
11
28
SV 1.5
SV 1.5
29
26
VI 1.5
CA
+30
1-
I
-'i;S:
475
GR 1.5
174~
894
GL/VT 1.0 .
1528
+30
+15
I
I
21
I
I
7A
GR 1.0
894
GL/VI 1.0
12(M89)
123P(M90)
GR/VT 1.5
10
3l2A
SV 0.75
./
17
59C 8R VT 0.75
474
GR 1.5
88/ ID ,
477
VI 0.75
'-. ..
476
8l/vI 0.75
19A 8l 1.0
27
8l/vT 0.75
Saab9.00
015H 142
A
on
Fault-tracing hints
g lamps are fitted only to carsdestinedforthe

d Canada, and to the 1989 mOd~Is for,JP.
1.5
'lamps are wired so that theycCiQ.ge svvi.~c:hed

when the parking lights or diPR~~,:,beams are
ed on.
" '"
~*~~~0~~lamps
supplied to Canada, the

can
ched on regardless of thepoS'ition of light
'10.
light switch 10 is in pq~i~iqH;~~,~~~fking lights)
ull beam/dipped beamY,switd, 88 for the extra
pswill be supplied viqt.~~minaloo or termina.l
ght switch 10.
,.....
The extra fog lamps can be switched on by setting

light switch 10 to position 1 or 2 and depressing
switch 88.
1.

live.
2.
Check full beam filaments 11 and full beam

warning lamp 47G.
o.
Check each fog lamp and check that the supply

to it is live. Check the earthing at the lamp.
4.
Check fuse 15. If the fuse has blown, the fog

lamps will not be extinguished when the full
beams are switched on.
5.
Check rel'ay 107, light switch 10 and switch 88,

by measuring at their terminals.
6.
Check the relevant cable harness and earth connections. .
0,
n the switch is depreS$ea,'r~Iay 107 will be

rgised, since its coli wUiibe earthed across filnts 11 for the left
"and right-hand full
ms, and across fullb
arning lamp 47G. The
p in the switch will then light up with full bright-
'00
h extra fog lamps 85 then receive a positive supfrom fuse 21, across the relay contacts, which are
sed.
en the full beams are switched on, the relay will be
;-energised, and the fog lamps will be switched off,
n if the switch is depressed. This isdue to the fact
at a positive voltage is then being supplied to both
ides of the relay.coil.
ars for this market are equipped with daylightdriving lights. Relay 174 for the daylight driving lights
gives a positive supply to the extra fog lamps when
~he light switch is in position O.
Saab900
3
7
10
Saab900
Eartllih
Light swiii'
on theleftl
of the fascia
11
Full beam filament ...

in the left-hand~;r1(:jlght""hand head lamps
17
Extra rheostat fortAl'lighting of switches

and controls
on the fascia
22A
Fuse holder
housing
47G
Full beam warning Iqmp

in the combined instrument in the instrumentpanel
85
Extra fog lamps

under the front bumper
88
Switch for extra fog lamps

on the fascia
107
Relay for extra fog lamps

in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, relay position D
1528
152C

ponents
Saab900
rking I
US,CA
148A SV 0.5
148 SV 0.5
149 SV 0.5
149A SV 0.5
93
17
Ie
d
I-
>
0:
lD
m
43 BL 0.75
Ie
d
I-
>
1528
Ie
128
GR/VT 0.5
41 GN RD 1.0
-'
lD
60' ",
..
QL--+---'====
42 8L 0.75
Mag: GB
42 BL 0.75
{--1-W
Ie
-;::~5~7;=====4~~j]fA~G~~ViOI~:[5:::;-l
-"47-'-"G"-N-"0"-'.7-"5
123 (SE,FJ,EU,GB)
59(ME,FE,AU,US,CA,JP)
<>
47C GN 0.75
!;t
15
60
189A SV 0.75
14
14
211A SV 1.5
189D SV 1.0
3-0,5-0
44
GN 0.75
44 GN 0.75
189 sv 1.5
2-0,4-0
Saab900
~I
0:
1528
21
894
GL/VT 1.0
.,g
-"
lD
+30
894
GL/VT 1.0
0:
lD
45 GN 0.75
:<:;i~,('
CA174~
<>
t-
+15
I
ration
arking lights can be switched on and off by
s of light switch 10, to which the supply (+30)
ays live, regardless of the position Of theigniswitch.
n the light switch is to position 1- "Parking
s" the supply to parking lights 13 is taken across
red 29-pole connector 152B and fuses 18 and
The left-hand side of the car is supplied across
19 and the right-hand side across fuse 18.
r lights 14 are also supplied across fuses 18 and
and the white 29-pole connector 152A. Number
e illumination 15 is supplied across fuse 18.
rear-light supplies of the 3-D and 5-D models
er somewhat from each those of the 2-D and 4-D
dels. The 3-D and 5-D models are equipped with
additional rear lights (14) on the tailgate.
particulars of the lightingwiring in light switch 10
cars destined for US, CA and JP, see the section
titled "Lighting for controls, US, CA, JP".
ht fittings marked "A" are for cars without inteated bumpers.
and CA markets
59
ars for the US and CA markets are also equipped

ith side marker lights 234, which are supplied via
rking lights 13. One-half of the bulb for each direcion indicator is used for the corresponding side
arker light.
B market (1989 model)

Cars delivered to the GB market also have dim dipped
beams. These cars are also provided with a singlepole connector 60 in the electrical distribution box.
On cars for the CA market, the parking lights will be

switched on when the light switch is in position 0 and
the ignition is switched on.
Italian market and 1989 cars for GO

Cars for these market are equipped with warning
lamp 47Vwhich lights up when the parking lights are
switched on.
Saab900
The parking lights are switched on when light switch

10 is set to position 1.
1.
Check fuses 18 and 19 and check that the supply to them is live.
2.

them is live. Check the earthing at each lamp.
3.
Check the operation of light switch 10 by measuring at the light switch terminals.
4.

earth connections.
driving lights (CA)

ibution box in the en, y position F
10
Light switch
13
Parking lights
14

15

17

and controls
22A
Fuse holder
housing
47V
Warning lamp, head lamps switched on

57
3-pole connector (3-D and 5-D)

in the luggage compartment, at the lefthand air outlet
59
2-pole connector (2-D and 4-D)

in the boot lid
in the fascia, beside light switch 10
59
2-pole connector (3-D and 5-D) (1990

model)
in the boot lid, on the left-hand side
60
wheel housing (G8) (1989 model)
in the tailgate (3-D and 5-D)
93
123
4-pole connector (3.;D and 5-D) (1990

model)
in the luggage compartment, on the lefthand side
152A
1528

234
Saab900
Saab900
Brake lights,
+30
I
I
1320 RO 0.75
e;
~
189E SV 0.75
30
132A
RO 1.5
1890 SV 1.0
3-D, 5-0
132 RO 1.0
2-0,4-Q
132 RO 1.0
59
132 RO 1.0
109
109
59
on
r-
ei
0
0:
SE,FI,GB,US,CA
JP,AU,ME,FE
....
l8ge
SV 0.75
SE,FI,GB,US,CA
JP,AU,ME,FE
133 RO 0.75
372 8L RO 1.5
189 SV 1.5
2-D, 4-0
0150 OOJ
A
Saab900
Fault-tracing hints
is takerif
ft6in
pply to brake Iight switch 29

fdse
,gcross the white 29-pole connector 152A. When
'brakes are applied, the contacts will close and
e lamps 30 will be energised.
nding on the market, one or twol<;lmps (30) are
on each side for the brake IigMtS.lf two lamps
sed, the second lamp is connecteg by means of
Ie 132A (3-D and 5-D) or cable 132Bwith connec69 (2-D and 4-D).
1.

live.
2.
Check that the supply to brake Iight switch 29 is

live.
3.
Operate the brake light switch. Check the bulbs

and check that the supplies to them are live.
Check the earthing at each lamp.
4.

earth connections.
pean market
Ie 132A (3-D and 5-D) is,nolused and connector
(2-D and 4-D) is not fitted. Only one lamp on
h side will light up when the brakes are applied.
e extra lamps are used for the rear fog lights
tead.)
rs for the SE, FI and GB markets are fitted with
h-Ievel brake light at the bottom of the rear winw. On 3-D and 5-D cars, the brake light is conted across two single-pole connectors (one in the
gage compartment at the left-hand air outlet and
e in the tailgate), whereas on the 2-D and 4-D
odels, it is connected across two-pole connector
9.
stmUan, Middle East and Far East

markets
Cable 132A (3-D and 5-D) is used. Connector 269
(2-D and 4-D) is fitted, and two lamps will therefore
light up on each side of the car.
In addition, cars forthese markets are equipped with
high-level brake light 109 at the bottom of the rear
window. On 3-D and 5-D cars, the brake light is connected to the left-hand light cluster in the tailgate by
means of two single-pole connectors, whereas on the
2-D and 4-D models, it is connected across two-pole
connector 59.
USA, Canadian and Japanese markets

On cars for these markets, cable 132A (3-D) and
cable 138B (2-D and 4-D) is used, and two lamps
thus light up on each side of the car.
In addition, cars for these markets are equipped with
high-level brake light 109 at the bottom of the rear
.window. On 3-D cars, the brake light is connected to
the left-hand light cluster in the tailgate by means of
two single-pole connectors, whereas on the 2-D and
4':D models, it is connected across two-pole connector 59.
Convertible
On the Convertible, high-level brake light 109 is located in the spoiler and is connected by means oftwo
2-pole connectors 59. The connectors are located at
the left-hand hinge of the boot lid.
Saab 900
124
Brake Ii
+30
I
I
?:.J
13
<>
on
1890 SV 0.75
211A
SV 1.5
30
1890 S>I 1.0
189 SV 1.0
3-D, 5-0
132
RO 1.0
132A RO 0.75
0,4 D
132A RO 0.75
132A RO 0.75
59
109
59
109
189C
SV 0.75
133 RO 0.75
(US.CA.JP.
~
133A RO 0.75
30
1328 RO 0.75
189 SV 1.5
30
2-D, 4-0
015H 003
C
Saab900
Brake Iigl1ts,
pply to brake light switch 29 is takenfromfuse
, cross the white 29-pole connector 152A. When
rakes are applied, the contacts will close and
e lamps 30 will be energised.
nding on the market, one or two lamps (30) are
on each side for the brake lights. If two lamps
sed, the second lamp is connected by means of
e 132A (3-0 and 5-0) or cable 132B and cable
A (2-0 and 4-0).
1.

live.
2.
Check that the supply to brake light switch 29 is

live.
3.
Operate the brake light switch. Check the bulbs

and check that the supplies to them are live.
Check the earthing at each lamp~
4.

earth connections.
pean market
one lamp on each side will light up when the
es are applied. (The extra lamps are used for the
r fog lights instead.)
rs for the SE, FI, EU and GB markets are fitted with
h-Ievel brake light at the bottom of the rear win. On 3-0 and 5-0 cars, the brake light is concted across a two-pole connector in the luggage
mpartment at the left-hand air outlet and a 4-pole
nector in the tailgate, whereas on the 2-0 and 4-0
dels, it is connected across two-pole connector
stmllan, Middle East, Far East, USA,

nadlan and Japanese markets
cars for these markets, two lamps will light up on
ach side of the car when the brakes are applied.
,addition, cars for these markets are equipped with
igh-Ievel brake light 109 at the bottom of the rear
indow. On 3-0 and 5-0 cars, the brake light is conected to the right-hand light cluster in the tailgate,
ereas on the 2-0 and 4-0 models, it is connected
cross two-pole connector 59.
onvertible
n the Convertible, high-level brake light 109 is 10ated in the spoiler and is connected by means of two
-pole connectors 59. The connectors are located at
he left-hand hinge of the boot lid.
Saab900
luggage compartment
15
tion
-5-0)
A-O)
22A
Fuse hdlde
in the elect
gine compartrrl'
housing
29
Brake light switch

at the brake pedal
30
Brake lamps
on certain markets, also in thetailgate (3-0
and 5-D)
57
3-pole connector (3-0 and 5-0 only)

59
2-pole connector
one in the boot, to the left, under the parcel
shelf (2-D and 4-0)
two in the boot, at the left-hand boot lid
hinge, behind the trim (Convertible)
59
2-pole connector (3-0 and 5-0) (1990

model)
one in the luggage compartment, at the lefthand air outlet
one in the tailgate, on the left-hand side
60
Single-pole connector (3-0 and 5-0 only)

(1989 model)
one in the luggage compartment, at the lefthand air outlet
two in the tailgate, at the left-hand light
cluster (US, CA, JP, AU, ME, FE)
one in the tailgate, at the left-hand light
cluster (SE, FI,GB)
109
High-level brake light

at the bottom of the rear window
in the spoiler, on the boot lid (Convertible)
123

model)
in the tailgate, on the left-hand side
152A
29-polewhite connector
in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment on the left-hand wheel
Saab900
Brake lights, 1:990

. mOde_I_1_27
Saab900
Reversing Ii
,..------,.--_._._.._---------_.
US
SE: T16.>-FI: T16,M89: T8,M90: T16)..
1488 SV 0.5
1498 SVO.5
93
7
119
1388 VT 0.75
138
8l/VT 1.0
+54
AUT
11M
VT 2.5
76
135
VT 1.5
31
152A
O __1!..::3",5A"-,,V.!..T...!.l''''0-l> 8 <1---,1",3,,-5...!.V.!..T...:;1.",-0_ _
<
136
VT 1.0
32
M.....-.-.._,_9_I.90} 137 VT 0.75
I ,-
{ _ _----'::"':"'A'--V:!-'T'--1'-'0"---1
1'-
.....::13:..:.7_V'-'T'--0"'-.7'-'5'--
189D SV 1.0
189E SV 1.0
3-D, 5-D
136 VT 1.0
137 VT 0.75
189 SV 1.5
32
32
2-D, 4-D
OISH 112
A
Saab900
Reversing liglflts
ration
129
fault-tracing hints
supply to reversing light switch 31 is taken from

13, across 29-pole white connector 152A.When
rse gear is engaged, the contacts will close and
ersing lamps 32 will light up.
ain models destined for certain markets are also
uipped with side reversing lights 119, located in
front light clusters. The side reversing lights are
plied from the reversing light switch via conmactor
2A.
Saab900
The reversing lights are switched on when reverse

gear is engaged and the ignition switch is in the drive
position.
1.

live.
2.
Check that the reversing light switch terminals

are live.
3.
Check the bulbs and check that the supplies to

them are live. Check the earthing at each ljilmp.
4.
Check the connectors and the relevant cable

harness.
7
9
Saab900
Earthiflg'~
gage compartment
22A
Fuse holder . {"H ti'; :,'r

in the elect~ibat'qi$~~i;9Mtiqn box, in the engine compartmen'Cd:ri;x~Eileft-hand wheel
housing
'.... , ' ,
31

under the centre console, to the left of the
selector lever
32
Reversing lamps
76

transm.
lever
93
119
Side reversing lights

152A

the interior of the car
Reve.rsing lights
131
ponents
uto.
en. leel
'om
-=
sa b90 '~'===~-----------32
Rear
C'
1528
31 GL 1.5
+15
I
~I
I-
GB
>
0::
CI
~
*
...J
CI
:
0
,..,
r-.
5
10
of)
r-.
:
N
;;;
58
372 BL/RD 1.5
59
01
lil
147N
13..J
3
372 BL 1.5
15
189A SV 0.75
3-D, 5-0
bE
FI
@!]
51
. 132A RD 1.5
372 BL RD 1.5
C;
370 GR/VT 1.5

372A BL/VT 0.5
@!]
G
'P(
1528
16
fc
tc
th
ci
>
lJ)
370 GR/VT 1.5
re
01
D&
TI
IiI
372 BL RD 1.5
189 SV 1.5
2-D, 4-0
Saab900
ration
133
Faulttracing hints
for certain markets only, including the European

et, are equipped with rear fog lights.
supply (+ 15) is taken from the ignition switGh to
t switch 10. This must be in position 2 beforethe
,fog lights can be switched on (headlampi,on.full
jpped beam). The supply is then run to,switQh161
he rear fog lights across the red 29-pole,connec.
152B and fuse 21.
en the switch for the rear fog lights i~!~J~~~gRdn,
two rear fog lights 33 will light up. ql\lit.,
.. nd
models, the lamps for the rear <fQg,~
t$; are
ted in the tailgate.
s delivered to the GB market alsohav~:ctimqJ~P,ed

ms. These cars are also provided witp, ~(~lngle
Ie connector 60 in the electrical distriQutionJ)ox.
cars for the FI market, only the left-hand rear fog

ht is connected.
Saab900
The rear fog lights can only be switched on when light

switch 10 is in position 2 and the ignition switch is in
the drive position.
1.

live.
2.

them are live. Check the earthing at each lamp.
3.
Check the relevant cable harness.
Rear
1528
.-_-----::3::..1...::G::;:L....:.1::;.5_ __:: 1 8 e t - - - - - - - - - - - - 8
+15
I
<ill
I-
>
~
Q.
'"'"
'"
'".....ci
>
(J)
'"
;;;
1528
'--_...::3:.:.:70~GR~/....:V..:.T....:.1:.:::.5~_I:: 161-----~37:..::0:....G:::.R~/..:.VT:....:.:1 .:::.5
.::::,,----<:II
372A BL/VT 0.5
58
::..37:..::2~BL:L/~RD::....:.:1.~5-!J 9 1-
59
r-I:q:z20l-
3
--=-:37:..::2....:.B~Lc...:l~.5~
_.J
372
BL/RD 0.'75
372 BL RD 0.75
1;3jGB
SE,
15
189A SV 0.75
3-D, 5-0
372
BL/RD 1.0
G8
-
{ SE,FI,EU
372 BL RD 1.0
372
BL RD 1.0
189 SV 1.5
33
2-D, 4-0
Saab900
Rear fog lights, ,:J.;990model
ration
135
. fault-tracing hints
for certain markets only, including the European

ket, are equipped with rear fog lights.
upply (+ 15) is taken from the ignition switcpto
switch 10. This must be in Position2ib~forethe
fog lights can be switched on (headl~~ps' "fLJH
ipped beam). The supply is then run to'sW,tt
..'1
the rear fog Iights across the red 29"J)Qle c
152B and fuse 21.
The rear fog Iights can only be switched on when light

switch 10 is in position 2 and the ignItion switch is in
the drive position.
,._-""
_._.X ,.
'::-'.::c-):::,'
:.:-~:-:'
<
.,","'-::.'_"".: ,., _.

live.
2.

them are live. Check the earthing at each lamp.
Check the relevant cable harness.
en the switch for the rear fog Iightsis,;pre$

two rear fog lights 33willlight up.On;tt\e'/
models, the lamps for the rearlfog:.,Ji ,.
ted in the tailgate.
:.::.;;::<
i"':::-:" T;';-::~
1.
<."
.,,/~:'
rs delivered to the GB market aISQha't~;;~,irridibbed

ms. These cars are alsQlPrpVi.<j~d;;(iyit~ a sing1eIe connector 60 in the electrlcaldi$tribution box.
cars for the SE, FI and EU markets, only the leftnd rear fog light is connected. On cars for the GB
arket, only the right-hand rear fog light is concted.
Saab900
gin '..
9
Earti-r(Q~
Ei'ldistribution box in the enfit, relay positions A and 8

luggage compartment
10
Light switcl'"j";'"
on the left-handsidSJ:>fthe fascia
15
Number plateillt.1l11:iJ\lEition
on the tailgatet31iljarrd;5-0)
on the rear sill (2;;[)'al1d4~0)
22A
Fuse holder
housing
33
Rear fog lights

in the tailgate light clusters (3-0 and 5-0)
in the rear light clusters (2-0 and 4-0)
47N
Rear fog light warning lamp

in the combined instrument in the fascia
57
3-pole connector (3-0 and 5-0)

58
12-pole connector
59
2-pole connector
in the luggage compartment, at the left
hand air outlet (3-0 and 5-0)
60
Single-pole connector (1989 model)

one in the luggage compartment, at the left
hand light cluster (3-0 and 5-0)
one in the electrical distribution box, in th
engine compartment,. on the left-han
wheel housing (G8)
123

model)
in the luggage compartment, on the left
hand side
1528

in the electrical distribution box in the en
gine compartment, on the left-hand whee
housing. The connector is accessible fro
161

on the left-hand side of the fascia 137
Saab900
Rear fog Ii gh
ponents
8
22A
eo M1989
1528
:ia
Ieft-
a on
ield)
Ieft-
Ieft8
22A
60 M1989
15218
eft-
enleel
'om
47N
33
33
Saab900
, 161
138
nirlg lights -SE, FI, EU, GB, ME, FE, AU
Direction indicatPfS,i:malq.r
on indica rs,
SE, , EU, GB,
Di
14BA
SV 0.5
93
71
GL/RD 1.0
25
70
OR 1.0
A
70A RD 1.0 2
71A
GL/RD 0.75
77
BL/VT 1.0
80
RD/VT 1.0
76A VT 0.5
r
<)1
77A
BL/VT 0.75
16
152C
4.Ie)
47
T2~
13-.J
193
SV 0.75
193A
SV 0.75
BOA
RD/VT 0.75
152C
90
158
27
28
......
""
ii..._3_-_0_,_5_-_0__18_9_D_S_V_'_.O
1_89_E_S_V_1.0
._._.
_~
79
RD/VT 1.0
79 RD VT 0.75
189 SV 1.5
27
2-0,4-0
015H 014
irection indicators, hazard warning\lights - SE, FI, EU, GB.,ME, FE, AU
139
fault-tracing hints
clion indicators
Direction indicators
rs for the USA and Canadian markets and 1989

dels for the Japanese market are covered in a
parate section.
e supply is taken from fuse 7 to hazard warning
ht switch 25 via the red 29-pole connector 1528. It
then taken through this switch (in the unactuated
osition) to flasher relay 23.
hen direction indicator stalk switch 24 is rnoved
om the neutral position, current pulses will be,sup~
lied from flasher relay 23 to left-hand direction inicator lamps 27 or right-hand direction iridicator
mps 28 (terminal Lor R), via connector58, anqpin
1 (left) or pin 10 (right). The front larnPs are;'Cllso
upplied via the black 29-pole connector 152C.
n addition, the two direction indicator warning
amps, 47H (left) and 471 (right) are connected in
arallel with the direction indicator lamps for the
espective side of the car.
The direction indicators are operative when the ignition switch is in the drive position.
1.
Check fuse 7 and check thCit the supply to it is

live.
2.
Check that terminals 1 and2Qf h?lzard warning

light switch 25 are live.
3.
Check that terminals 49 and 49Aq:f.tlasher relay

23 are live.
,~
4.
Check that terminal 54 of direction indicator

stalk switch 24 is live.
5.
Operate the direction indicator st,Hk s:NVitch.

them is live.
6.
Check the relevant cable harness and earth coflnections.
Hazard warning lights
ide direction indicators 89 and 90 are located on

the left-hand and right-hand front wings respectively.
,The lamps are supplied in parallel with the direction
'indica~or lamps in the front light clusters.
The supply to the hazard warning lights is always live.
1.
Light fittings marked "A" are for cars without integrated bumpers.

live.
2.
Check that the supply to hazard warning light .

switch 25 is live.
Hazard warning lights
3.
The supply is taken from fuse 27 to hazard warning

light switch 25 via the red 29-pole connector 1528.
When this switch is depressed, current is supplied to
flasher relay 23 vi.a terminal 2.
Press the switch and check that terminal 2 is

live.
4.
Check that terminals 49 and 49Aofflasher relay

23 are live.
5.

them is live.
6.
Check the connectors, cable harnesses and .

earth connections.
From the flasher relay, the current pulses return to

switch 25. Since the switch is closed, the current
pulses continue to terminals 7 (left-hand) and 6
(right-hand). Current pulses will be obtained only
when the flasher relay is energised.
Front and rear left-hand direction indicator lamps 27
are then supplied with current pulses via terminal Lof
direction indicator stalk switch 24, across pin 11 of
connector 58.
Lamps 28 on the right-hand side of the car are supplied in the same way from terminal R of direction
indicator stalk switch 24, across pin 10 of connector
58.
The two direction indicator warning lamps 47H (Iefthand) and 471 (right-hand) will also flash.
Since switch 25 is closed, the lamp in the switch will
also flash.
Saab soo
tionin dicat ors, hazard warning lights
EU, GB, ME, FE, AU
nents
3
7p
9
22A
Earthirig1pOfnfil11il1Eiluggage compartment
Fuse holder
in the electfic~J~I~trI~[JtiCln box, in the engine compartm~nt;on the left-hand wheel
housing
23
Flasher relay
under the fascia on tile left-ha nd side, behind the knee shield
24
Direction indicator stalk switch

on the left-hand side of the steering column
25

on the right-hand side of the fascia
in the front and rear light clusters on
left-hand side of the car
27
Saab 900
eradiatorcross-member
28

in the front and rear light clusters on the
right-hand side of the car
47H
Left-hand direction indicator warning lamp

471
Right-hand direction indicator warning lamp

58
12-pol e connector
89

on the left-hand front wing
90

on the right-hand front wing
93
Earthing point on the left-hand wheel ho'

ing member
1528
152C
29-pol e red connector

29-pol e black connector
in the electric al distribution box in the engine compartment, on the left-hand wheel
158

in the electric al distribution box in the engine compartment, on the left-hand wheel
housing 141
Direction indicators, hazard war.qiqgJights -SE, FI, EU
Components
27(28)
27 (28)
23
24
47H,471
89,90
27 (28)
Saab900
and 1989 JP
EO
on
Di
Icators,
a
-us,
wa
1989JP
+x
+54
I
I
llC
VT 2.5
148 SV 0.5
148A SV 0.5
93
71
GL/RD 1.D
70
OR 1.0
1528
71
GL/RD 1.0
~
f--
>
"--'
m
""
on
0
on
0
59
BR/VT
0.75
70A RD 1.0 2
"
"
'"
17
on
>
"o
'"
'"'"
f--
"-
'"
N
N
f--
<:.o
'"oro
N
N
on
o
f--
on
>
f--
>
"
77A
'"
"
....if~s:l~g/VT
0>
<D
47
1Ui14.....
ri2-
BL/VT 0.75
<=]1
on
89
"0
158
'"
'"D
~90
....
LL_
193
SV 0.75
24
3
I~~ 0.75
193A
SV 0.75
rh158
R
76 BL VT 1.0
79 RD VT 1.0
222 GR 0.75
76B
BL/VT 1.0
77 BL VT 1.0
79B
RD/VT 1.0
80 RD VT 1.0
---='-'"1'""1l
'~~~---F-+7-9-----'~--~~~--='=-='-='
RD/VT 1.0
79 RD VT D.75
189 SV 1.5
~D~;-E-
~_~=_==.w
Saab 900
0.75
28
.
D15H 020
A
us, CA..and
Direction indicators t
Operation
Direction Indicators
Direction indicators
This section covers only

dian markets and 1989
market.
The direction indicators are operative when the ignition switch is in the drive position.
IYlr,rl",lc'
The supply is taken from fus

Iight switch 25 via the red2 .
is then taken through thiSS
position) to flasher relay
1989 JP
ard warning
ector 1528. It
the unactuated
When direction indicatorstalkf,switch 24 is moved

from the neutral PositiOQr'gp'r[ehfpulses will be supplied from flasher relay 23"tb left-hand direction indicator lamps 270cright~hand direction indicator
lamps 28 (terminal LorR), via connector 58, and pin
11 (left) or pin 10 (right). The front lamps are also
supplied via theblack29-pole connector 152C.
In addition, the two direction indicator warning
lamps, 47H (left) and 471 (right) are connected in
parallel with the direction indicator lamps for the
relevant side of the car.
The front light clusters of cars for these markets are
also equipped with corner lights 118, which light up
with a steady white light when the corresponding
direction indicator flashes. The corner lights are is
supplied directly from fuse 20 (not through the
flasher relay). Fuse 20 is live when the ignition switch
is in the parked or drive position.
The respective lamp 118 is supplied from terminal 3
(left-hand) or 2 (right-hand) of direction indicator
stalk switch 24, via the black 29-pole connector
152C.
Side direction indicators 89 and 90 are located on
the left-hand and right-hand front wings respectively.
The lamps are supplied in parallel with the direction
indicator lamps in the front light clusters.
1.

live.
2.
Check that terminals 1 and 2 of hazard warning

light switch 25 are live.
3.
Check that terminals 49 and 49A of flasher relay

23 are live.
4.
Check that terminal 54 of direction indicator

stalk switch 24 is live.
5.
Operate the direction indicator stalk switch.

Check the bulbs and check that the supply' to
them is live.
6.
Check the relevant cable harness and earth connections.
Hazard wamlng lights

The supply to the hazard warning lights is always live.
1.

live.
2.
Check that the supply to hazard warning light

switch 25 is live.
3.
Press the switch and check that terminal 2 is

live.
4.
Check that terminals 49 and 49A offlasher relay

23 are live.
5.

them is live.
6.

earth connections.
Hazard wamlng lights

The supply is taken from fuse 27 to hazard warning
light switch 25 via the red 29-pole connector 1528.
When this switch is depressed, current will be supplied to flasher relay 23 via terminal 2.
From the flasher relay, the current pulses return to
switch 25. Since the switch is closed, the current
pulses continue to terminals 7 (left-hand) and 6
(right-hand). Current pulses will be obtained only
when the flasher relay is energised.
Front and rear left-hand directi.on indicator lamps 27
are then supplied with current pulses via terminal L of
direction indicator stalk switch 24, across pin 11 of
connector 58.
Lamps 28 on the right-hand side of the car are supplied in the same way from terminal R of direction
. irldicator switch 24, across pin 10 of connector 58.
The two direction indicator warning lamps 47H (Iefthand) and 471 (right-hand) will also flash. Since
switch 25 is closed, the lamp in the switch will also
flash.
Saab900
To check the comer Ughts

Activate this system by turning the ignition switch to
the drive position.
1.

live.
2.
Check that terminal 1 of switch 24 is live.
3.
Operate the direction indicator stalk switch.

them is live.
4.
Check the relevant cable harness and earth connections.
and 1989 JP
LocatiQn~
. ponents
.,
the fascia
Earthihg'poinli'o'!1ithll:fradiatorcross-member
_ : ., _:.)~__,,<.-::-t:n :r?~~-/ (.":
Earthing 'poi'niin the luggage compartment
9
22A
Fuse holder.. . t\h/': ....

in the electricatdi$V!pLition box, in the engine compartmenf,'on the left-hand wheel
housing
23
Flasher relay
under the fascia on the left-hand side, behind the knee shield
24

on the left-hand side ofthe steering column
25

27

in the front and rear light clusters on thE'
left-hand side of the car
28

in the front and rear light clusters on the
right-hand side of the car
47H

in the combined instrument in the.fascia
471

58
12-pole connector
89

on the left-hand front wing
90

on the right-hand front wing
93
Earthing point on the left-hand wheel hous,(

ing member'
118
Corner lights
in the fr:ont light clusters
1528
152C

158

housing
Saab9C),.O .
lights -
Direction indicators,h
us, CA and 1989 JP
Components
22,0..
152B
152C
158
25
27 (28)
27 (28)
118
23
24
4711,47;
89,90
27 (28)
Saab900
145
146
Lighting fOr contrOls-=SE,F
ting
nd 1990 JP
r CO
Is-E, FE, AU and
, GB,
SE, FI, EU, ME, M90: JP
GB, FE, AU
+x
+x
I
I
I.
I
300
RD 1.0
300
RD 1.0
206 BR/VT 0.75
206 BR/VT 0.75
14----1
14-:- - - - 1
I
I
147
147
91
3
59
BR/VT 0.75
59
BR/VT 0.75
98
98
1
59A
BR/VT 0.5
58
BL/VT 0.75
59A
BR/VT 0.5
58
BL/VT 0.75
154
267
M90
148
59
318B
SV 0.75
I
L
267
M90
61B
BR/VT 0.5
11
1282
7..1
148
59
61B
BR/VT 0.5
'1
1 X
117
3188
SV 0.75
128
SV 0.75
1282
L 7.J
160
7B5A
31BA
sv 0.75
SV 0.75
36
Saab900
785A
SV 0.75
J
11
lighting for control
Operation
Other switches
There are several market versions

the controls. This section covers a
the USA and Canada, andthe 198 '
The diagram shows the supply to
on cars with built-in lamps.
gfor
except
rJapan.
cnes, etc.
When the ignition switch is in the drive position, the

lamps in the following switches will be supplied
(+54) via a resistor in the corresponding switch,
which reduces the brightness of the light. When the
switch is depressed, the resistor will be by-passed,
and the lamp will light up with full brightness.
Rheostat 16
When the ignition switQh)
,arked,drive or
lipplied via the red
start position, rheostat 16',
29-pole connector 152B~nafuse 23.
The brightness of t f l i h g instrument lighting
can be steplessly ad]
'd y means of rheostat 16
in combined instrumentA7:
~~,
Combined Tr1strument lighting

Ashtray iIJYllJiflation
Lightingforthe cigarette lighter
Headlamp beam control lighting (1990
model)
Switches on the centre console
25
116
143
169
252

AC switch
Driver's seat heating rheostat (not via resistor)
For particulars ofthe wiring for the lighting in these

switches, see the section dealing with the corresponding function.
In additio'n, the dial lighting for the radio (267) connected to connector 98 is adjusted via rheostat 16.
Faulttracing hints
1.
If the car is equipped with electric windows, the

brightness of the built-in lamps in the electric win, , dow regulator switches will remain constant.
Check the appropriate fuses and check that the

2.

them is live.
.For particulars of the wiring, see the section entitled

"Electric window regulators".
3.

earth connections.
162
,Switch for driver's door electric window regulator

163
Switch for co-driver's door electric window
','regulator
189
iSwitch for the rear-d.oor electric window reg'ulators'
190
Switch for left-hand rear electric window
regulator
regulator
191
Switch for right-hand rear electric window
regulator
191A Switch for right-hand rear electric window
regulator
(190A and 191A are located in the respective rear
door.)
Switch 181 for the electrically operated sunroof (or
Convertible top) and gear indicating light 91 (on cars
with automatic transmission) are also supplied via
fuse 23.
Saab900
"of components
1528
152C
lng point in the fascia
29-
ector
2~,ctor
in t
ribution box in the engirie'S,;;nthe left-hand wheel
housing.
ttors are accessible
from the'iritecar
E~rthing point on the radiator cross-member

(1990 model)
Instrument lighting rheostat
153

in the combined instrument on the fascia
Lighting for th~;

~ite lighter
on the fascia, at the cigarette lighter
154
Lighting for heater~?ntr?ls

on the fascia, attheresPE;l'c1:ive heater control
' ,,',
160
Switch for glove compartment illumination

on the right-hand side ofthe glove compartment
162
Switch for driver's door electric window regulator

between the front seats, on the centre console
163

regulator
169
Switch, AC
on the fascia
181
Switch for the electrically operated sunroof

(or Convertible top)
between the front seats, at the front of the
centre console
189

.
190

regulator
190A
10-pole connector (for radio 267)

one in the fascia, behind the panel for the
radio
one to the left of the steering column, behind the fascia knee shield

regulator
in the left-hand rear door
191

on the fascia

regulator
191A
Earthing point
between the ignition switch and the handbrake lever

regulator
in the right-hand rear door
252
Driver's seat heating rheostat

on the fascia
143
on the fascia
267
Radio connector
one in the fascia, behind the radio panel.
148
Ashtray illumination
on the fascia, in the ashtray
282
Headlamp beam control switch (1990

model)
on the fascia
18
22A
25
Fuse holder
housing
36

behind the right-hand speaker grille
47
Combined instrument
on the fascia
48
Cigarette lighter
on the fascia
58
12-pole connector
on the angle bracket, under the fascia, to
the left of the ~teering column (behind the
knee shield)
59
2-pole connector
on the fascia, behind the cigarette lighter
60
. between the front seats, under the front section of the centre console
74
Resistor for ventilation fan

accessible under the left-hand speaker
grille
91
98
116
117
Gear indicating light

between the front seats, at the gear selector
(auto.)
Saab900
Lighting for controls
mponents
190A '-::'~~::l
191A
252
Saab900
g for con 15 - US,
9 forJP
448 GN 0.75
r--I
I
I
IL
58 8R
479 BR
0.75
0.75
71A BR
116C BR
61
8R/VT 0.5
T 0.75
2148 BR VT 0.75
4-'I
r154
I
I
I
(116
L_
5_J
2'5
SV 0.75
'09
SV 0.75
C!
>
3188
sv
...on
"1 0
> >
'"
'" '"
" ".., ~
0.75
206
8R/VT 0.75
117
467 BR VT 0.75
467f BR
T 0.75
4670 BR VT 0.75
467E BR VT 0.75
593
GN 0.75
r
1
L
4'
.1 181 I
5...1
L
467A
467C
BR/VT 0.75
4'
(181
1...1
r '41
1162
L'
4678
BR/VT 0.75
r
1
BR/VT 0.75
.,
11 63
P90A
L '..J
'..J
4568
592
592
SV 2.5
.56A
SV 1.5
456C
456G
sv .1.5
sv
117
CAB
L...
-'--
456
""\ISV 1.5
117
Saab900
J191A
L '-I
SV 1.5
sv 2.5
.,
01SH 072
1.5
he diagram shows the supply to the sWitches, etc.
hich have built-in lamps.
he supply to rheostats 16 and 17 itnviewhen the
start posignition switch is in the parked, drive
ion. The supply is taken from fuse23 Cjcross the red
29-pole connector 1528.
()r
eostat16
he brightness of instrumentlighting 18 can be stepressly adjusted by means ofrheostat 16 in-combined
instrument 47.
In addition, the following instrument lighting can be

controlled by means of rheostat 17:
Switches and lighting on the centre console
91
Gear indicating light (cars with automatic

transmission)
regulator
regulator
regulator
regulator
regulator
Switches and lighting on the fascia
10
25
88
116
143
148
153
154
169
252
Light switch
Switch, AC
Driver's seat heating rheostat (not via resistor)
For particulars of the wiring for the lighting in these

switches, see the section dealing with the corresponding function.
In addition, the dial lighting for the radio (267) connected to connector 98 is adjusted via rheostat 16.
Saab900
The supply to the lighting for the controls is live when

the ignition switch is in the parked, drive or start
position.
1.

live.
2.
Check that the input and output of rheostat 17

are live.
3.

them is live.
4.

earth connections.
.:liS;gl[ightingfor controls -.;;: US, CAanc.t1989 for JP
3

152B
10
Light switch
16

17

and controls
18

22A
~g-pol~
red connector
inth7~17c~rital distribution box in the en-
. giQ;e.;g9wp.~jr;1:rrJent, on the left-hand wheel

hOySing.ThE;l...c:onnector is accessible from
the interiorotthe car.
153

154
Lighting for heater controls

on the fascia, at the respective heater control
Fuse holder
housing
162

25

on the right-hand side of the facia
163
47
Combined instrument
on the fascia

regulator
48
Cigarette lighter
on the fascia
169
Switch, AC
on the fascia
57
3-pole connector
one at the left-hand B pillar, behind the trim
one at the right-hand B pillar, behind the
trim
one one under the driver's seat
181

between the front seats, at the front of the
centre console
189
58
12-pole connector
the .Ieft of the steering column (behind the
knee shield)

190

regulator
between the front seats, on the centre con-"
sole
190A

regulator
191

regulator
59
2-pole connector
one on the fascia, behind the cigarette
lighter
60
one in each rear door
one between the front seats, under the front
section of the centre console
/
!
!I
.~~htray .illumination
.q@thE;lJascia, in the ashtray
88

on the fascia
91

between the front seats, atthe gear selector
191A
98
10-pole connector (for radio 267)

one in the fascia, in the radio contact box
one to the left of the steering column, behind the fascia knee shield

regulator
252

on the fascia
267
Radio connector
one in the fascia, behind the radio panel
116

on the fascia
117
Earthing point
143
on the fascia
Saab 900
Lighting for controls - US, CA and 1989 for JP
153
Components
a.:.:10::.-
---l
'-'-'16:--
--'
L.:..:17~
__I
18
48
47
143
"
"191
148
153
154
. .;
169
fiB[tJ
i~
~
.... ~...
@@
162
163
189
190
S8
190A
191A
Saab900,
252
154
Interior lighting
I erior Ii
+30
+30
+54
I
I
I
I
5E
GR 1.5
5M
5K
GR 1.5
GR 2.5
500
GN 1.0
51
9
165
BL 0.5
152A
162
GL 0.5
500
GN 1.0
161
GL 0.5
164
8L 0.5
US, CA,
M89: JP
50
167
8R/SV 0.75
150
GL 0.75
168
SV 0.75
1408
VT 0.75
82~
117
150A
VT 0.75
657
GR/RD 1.0
82
r -..,
1
1678
8R SV 0.75
167D 8R SV 0.75
L_.J
US,CA,M89: JP
151
171
SV 0.75
170
SV 0.75
T16, T16A
M89: T8, T8A
116A: US,CA,AU,M89: JP
015H 052
A
58
171 SV 0.75
54
167C BR SV 0.75J'
167E BR SV 0.75
54
54
Saab900 .
Operation
Fa_lIlt..tracing hints
There are two versions of the interior'lighting system

- one with a time delay and one without; Cars with
delayed extinguishing of the interior i lighting are
equipped with an extra relay 151'(seethe special
section below).
1.
Check fuse 28 and check that the su[)ohlto:jf

live.
2.
Check the bulbs for the interior lighting and

3.
Check the switches and door switches.
4.

earth connections.
The lights are supplied across fuse 28 and 29-pole

white connector 152A, regardless of the position of
the ignition switch.
The interior lights can be switched on and off by
means of interior lighting switch 53, at the ignition
switch.
Time delay
When switch 53 is in position 2 (forward position),

centre roof lamp 50, front roof lamp 51 and ignition
switch lamp 52 are always switched on.
1.
Turn the ignition switch to the drive position.

live.
2.
Check that terminals 15 and 30 of relay 151 are

live.
In position 1 (rear position), the interior lighting will

be switched on if one of the door switches (54) ,is
closed, Le. if a door is opened. In position (centre
position), the interior lights are always off.
On cars with time delay, check also the following

points:
On cars for the USA and Canadian markets, and 1989

models for Japan, door switch 54 for the left-hand
front door is supplied via seat belt/ignition switch
warning relay 82.
Time delay
Cars with the interior lighting delay are equipped with
time-delay relay 151 which is supplied across fuse
12 when the ignition switch is in the drive position,
and with a constant supply from distribution terminal
,+30, regardless of the position of the ignition
switch.
When the interior lighting is switched on, by a door
being opened or a switch being operated, terminal T
will be earthed and relay 151 will be energised.
When the circuit is sUbsequently broken, by the door
being closed or the switch being operated, the interior lighting will remain switched on, since the timing
circuit of the relay will keep the earth circuit closed
across terminals T and 31.
The time delay is around 15 seconds, but will be
interrupted if the ignition switch is turned to the drive
position. A positive voltage (from +54) will then be
slJPplied to terminal 15 ofthe relay. Both terminals15 and 30 - will then receive a positive supply. The
relay will thus be de-energised and the earth circuit
across terminals T and 31 will be broken.
Saab900
156
Interior lighting
22A
Fuse holder
housing
50
Roof lamp, centre

in the centre of the roof lining
51
Roof lamp, front

on the roof, behind the inner rear-view mirror
52
Ignition switch lighting

between the front seats, at the ignition
switch
53

between the front seats, at the gear lever
54
Door switches, interior lighting

in each door pillar
58
12-pole connector
on the angle bracket, under the fascia 0
59
2~pole connector
oneinthe luggage compartment, above the
left~hand wheel housing, behind the trim
one behind the roof lining, at the rear-view
mirror
60
between the front seats, under the centre
console
82
Seat belt/ignition switch warning relay

under the back seat, on the left-hand side
98
10-pole connector
to the left of the steering column, behind the
knee shield below the fascia
117
Earthing point
between the ignition switch and the
brake lever
hand~
151
Time-delay relay for the interior lighting

152A
1528

175
Control unit for the central locking system

under the fascia on the right-hand side, behind the knee shield
Saab900
Interior lighting
'Components
22A
152A
1528
~
52
50
I,-
1=
D
p
'~t(
'II
54
75
Saab900
157
Interior lighting - Convertible
158
In rior Ii
ting-Conve ble
+30
+54
+30
I
I
I
I
l1L
VT 2.5
5E
GR 1.5
5M
GR 1.5
140
Gl 2.5
500
GN 1.0
52
5K
GR 2.5
152A
160
GL 0.75
161 GL 0.75
500
GN 1.0
163B
GL 0.75
163A
GL 0.75
51
US, CA.
M89:JP
167H
GN 0.5
225
HOB
VT 0.75
225
167.)
BL 0.75
150A
VT 0.75
167K
BL 0.75
657
GR/RD 0.75
164. 8l 0.75
117
0l5H 172
A
US. CA,
M89: JP
'"
....
>
rn
....<D
82
r--,
1
170
SV 0.75
316
1678
SV 0.75
L_.J
US. CA, M89: JP
58
4]
54
1'-'.7-'-1-"S-'-V-"0'-'.7."-5
54
rh
Saab900
Interior lighting - Convertible
.Operation
159
The lighting is supplied across fuse

white connector 152A, regardless of the po~;iti(m()f
the ignition switch.
1.

live.
2.
Check the bulbs for the interior lighting and

The interior lights can be switched on anlrk;ott

:means of interior lighting switch
switch.
Check the interior lighting switch and the door
When the switch is in the front pO:51t10n\?),;tr~mtlcm')p

51 at the rear-view mirror, ignitic'n~5wttQ~;}I~lrnp I5~~.;
and reading lamps 225 are always !'>.witp.flA'H;hh
In the rear position (1), the int,eri()r!liglJ~i~:g;;~lllls;l)e;\
switched on if one of the
Le. if a door is opened. In the cer1trE~P91S;i1;i()Jl (I
interior lights are always
On cars for the USA and Car1adi.a n. mRrkf',t!'>.
1989 model for Japan, dQ()r~;wi1:ch 54
hand front door is suplpliEld
switch warning relay
Turn
ignition switch to the drive position.
live.
RY:lrI
2.
Time delay
Time-delay relay 151 for the delayed interior lighting
is supplied across fuse 12 when the ignition switch is
in the drive position, and with a constant supply from
distribution terminal +30, regardless of the position
of the ignition switch.
When the interior lighting is switched on by a door
being opened, terminal T will be earthed and relay
151 will be energised.
When the circuit is subsequently broken by the door
being closed, the interior lighting will remain
switched on, since the timing circuit ofthe relay will
keep the earth circuit closed across terminals T and
31.
The time delay is around 15 seconds, but will be
interrupted ifthe ignition switch is turned to the drive
position. A positive voltage (from +54) will then be
supplied to terminal 15 of the relay. 80th terminals15 and 30 - will then receive a positive supply. The
. relay will thus be de-energised and the earth circuit
across terminals T and 31 will be broken.
Saab900
Check that terminals 15 and 30 of relay 151 are

live.
160
Interior light ing- Convertible
loca tions of components

22A
Fuse holder
housing
51
Roof lamp, front

behind the inner rear-view mirror
between the front seats, at the ignition
switch
52
53
54
58
12-pol e connector
59
2-pole connector
behind the trim, at each reading lamp
between the front seats, under the centre
console
60
Saab900

between the front seats, at the gear lever
in each door pillar
82

in the electrical distribution box under the
back seat, relay position E
98
10-pole connector
to the left ofthe steering column, behind the
knee 'shield below the fascia
117
Earthing point
151

back seat, relay position 8
152A
1528

175
Electronic unit for the central locking system

-
225
Reading lamp
one on each side of,the back seat
c:o:m~p~o:n:e:n~ts:-----~~~#~.2I~nt~e~ri~o~r I~ig~h~t~ni~g~C~o~n~v'.:e~rt~ib~le=-_ ~161
51
52
53
175
225
151
82
Saab900
162
Glove compartmentiJlumination
Glove com
ent illumination
+x
I
I
30D
RD 1.0
107
SV 2.5
107A
SV 2.5
3
015H 043
A
Saab900
GlovErtompartmentilluminatior1
Operation
... ,< .,,~.....
The supply for the gl ove compartm~flt.\'J'I~Q](~~tldg is

taken from fuse 23, via 29-pole redccmneytor1528,
when the ignition switch is in thepFlrk~d,drive or
start position.
19
Glove compartment lamp

in the glove compartment, on the right-hand
side of the fascia
When the glove compartmentlid.IS,,,)p~ned, switch

160 will close, earthing glove {;ompClrtrnent lamp 19
and causing it to light up.
22A
Fuse holder
housing
36

under the right-hand speaker grille
74

to the right, under the left-hand speaker
grille
1528

160

on the right-hand side ofthe glove compartment
Faulttmcing hints
The glove compartmentillurnination is operative
when the ignition switch'>rs in the parked, drive or
start position.
1.
Check fuse 23.and check that the supply to it is

live.
2.
Check the bulb and check that the supply to it is

live.
3.
Check the switch.
4.

earth connections.
Earthing point in thefascia
Components
19
Saab900
160
104
Luggage compartment illumination
Lu a
com rtment illumination

C@
+30
+30
I
I
I
I
5E
5E
GR 1.5
GR 1.5
52
52
161
GL 0.75
161
GL 0.75
163
GL 0.75
163
GL 0.75
55
166
SV 0.75
59
189B
SV 0.75
189B
SV 0.75
56
15
015H 183
A
Saab900
165
.Operation
Fault-tracing hints
The supply to luggage compartment lamp55 is taken

from fuse 28 and then on to switch 56: Whentqe
luggage compartment lid is opened, the)switchwill
close the circuit to earth and the lampvviJIJigh;ipp.
1.

live.
2.
Check the bulb and check that the supply to it is

live.
The luggage compartment illuminatio~~~ri>be

switched off manually by means oftheSWiichirlttie
lamp fitting.
.
..
.3.
Check the switch.
4. . Check the connectors, cable harnesses and

. earth connections .
.Convertible
On the Saab 900 Convertible, the luggage compartment lamp is switched on and off by means of a
mercury switch (56) which closes the supply circuit
when the lid is opened.
Saab900
166
15

22A
Fuse holder
in the electrical distribution box, in the en
housing
52

between the front seats, under the centr
console
55
Luggage compartment lamp

in the luggage compartment, on the left
hand side
in the luggage compartment, in the centr
of the roof (CAB)
56
Luggage compartment light switch 3-D an

5-D
in the luggage compartment, at the tailgat
striker plate.
2-D and 4-D
in the luggage compartment, forward of the
left hinge of the luggage compartment lid
Convertible
in the luggage compartment lid (mercu
switch)
59
2-pole connector
two in the luggage compartment at the left
hand lid hinge, behind the trim (Convertible)
housing. The connector is accessible fro
the interior of the car
152A
Saab900 ..
./129gga ge compartment illumination

mponents
1~I
t-
e
e
y
55
56 (conv)
Saab900
56
168
Windscreen wipers
ndscreen wi
rs
+54
I
I
11A
VT 2.5
. p
61
54
1528
85 BR 1.5
85 BR 1.5
INT
53B
ME,FE
85B
BR 1.5
53
269
62
31B
"----y----J
152C
53
86 RD 1.5
86 RD 1.5
538
87 GN 1.5
87 GN 1.5
88A GR 1.5
53A
85A BR 1.5
88 BL 1.5
31B
83
31
31
84 VT D.75
T 91 GL 0.75
).
158
910
63
91A
{GL 0.75<>GL 0.75}

"'1;,-___
2
92
91AGL
O~;]~
-E
152C
6
Cl-9=1,,-,A,-,G=L~0=.-,-,75,,--
-=---=-,
015H
013
"'
SV 0.75
Saab900
Windscreen wipers
Fault-tracing hints
The windscreen wipers of the car
(ppeeds and have an intE:mrlittl;;nt opElration rurlctlon.
,< The system also includes the wirldscre~el} walshl9rs.
The windscreen wipers will be operative when the

ignition switch is in the drive position'.
1.

live.
2.
Check that motor 62, switch 61 and relay 83 are

live.
3.
Operate the switch and check that the windscreen wiper motor and the washer motor are
live.
4.

earth connections.
,When the ignition switch is in thEl;dr'ive,po,sition

windscreen wiper stalk
relay 83 for intermittent
screen wipers
l"ln~>'r::iti(m
are supplied via "fuse 5

1528.
connector
When the switch is in positi()b' II (low speed), terminal

53 ofthe wiper motor is supplied from terminal 53 of
the switch, and the motor will run at low speed.
When the switch isin position III, terminal 538 ofthe
wiper motor is supplied' from terminal 538 of the
switch. The motor will now run at high speed.
When the switch is in position I (intermittent oper, ation), current will flow from terminallNT to intermittent operation relay 83, which will thus be energised.
The relay contacts will close, and current will flow
from terminal 53M to terminal 318 of the switch,
through the switch and from terminal 53 ofthe switch
to terminal 53 of the wiper motor. The wiper motor
will now run intermittently. The frequency of the intermittent operation ofthe wiper motor is determined
by the relay.
The wiper motor incorporates a mechanically actuated switch, to which the supply is live regardless
, of the position of the stalk switch. The switch controls the supply so that the wiper motor unit will
always return to the parked position after the circuit
has been opened by the stalk switch.
This is due to the fact that the wiper motor is then
supplied from terminal 53A, and from terminal 318,
across the built-in switch. The current flows through
the intermittent operation relay and the stalk switch,
'and then back to terminal 53 ofthe windscreen wiper
motor.
. When the wiper motor unit reaches the parked position, the mechanically actuated switch will open and
the motor will stop.
Windscreen washers
,
'
Washing will start when the stalk switch is moved

towards the steering wheel rim, regardless of
whether switch 61 is in position I, II or III.
When the stalk switch is moved towards the steering
wheel, contacts "A" will close. Washer motor 63 is
then supplied from terminal 54 of the stalk switch
'and will run as long as the switch remains closed.
After the stalk switch has been released, the wipers
will sweep the windscreen five times before they
stop.
Saab900
170
Windscreen wipers
components
" <,,',,;:';~,rnithf~ eledtrical distribution box, in the en

on the left-hand wheel
63
83
distribution box in the enon the left-hand wheel

hol.lsing. The connectors are accessible
~1/:ii"'frii""i:l1
<
Saab900
158

in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, on the left-hand ~heel
housing
-
269
Two-pole connector (ME and FE only)
61
63
172
Headlamp wipers
Headlamp wi
rs
+54
I
I
11A
VT 2.5
0--95
RDjVT 0.75
85
BR 1.5
61
54
Saab900
Headlamp wipers
Operation
Headlamp wipers are available on cars for certain

markets only.
The head lamp wipers and the washer motor will be

operative when the ignition switch is in the drive
position.
When the ignition switch is in the drive position,

current will flow:
1.
from fuse 5, via 29-pole red connector 152B,to

switch 61 for the headlamp wipers and washers,
and
Check fuses 5 and 8 and check that the supply

to them is live.
2.
Checkthatterminal53A of the switch is live, and

that the supply is reaching the wiper motors.
from fuse 8 to each headlampwipermotor 66.
3.
Move the stalk switch towards the steering

wheel rim and check that the wiper motors and
the washer motor are live.
4.

earth connections.
When the stalk switch is moved towards the steering

wheel rim, contacts "A" will close. Headlamp wiper
motors 66 and and washer motor 63 will start simultaneously.
When the stalk is released and the circuit is opened,
the wiper motors will still be energised (across fuse
8). When the wiper motors have completed five
strokes, the limit switches incorporated into the mot.ors will open the circuit and the wipers will stop in
.(le parked position.
A diode in each motor prevents the current from the
feedback circuit of the motor from flowing back to the
washer motor.
Each wiper motor incorporates overload protection
with a protective switch which is actuated by a resis. tor. The switch is in series with the motor and will trip
ifthe load should exceed a predetermined value (e.g.
if the wiper blades have frozen to the lenses).
Saab900
174
Headlamp wipers

7
22A
Fuse holder
in the electrical distribution box, in the en~
housing
57
3':pole connector
one at each wiper motor, at the front of the
.8(lgine compartment.
61
Windscreen wiper stalk switch

onJhe right-hand side of the steering column
63
Washer motor
in thewa sherflu id container, forward of the
right-hand Wheel housing
Headlamp wiper motor
on the left-hand and right-hand sides of the
grille
66
Saab900
83
Relay for intermittent operation of the windscreen wipers

1528
152C

Headlamp wipers
Components
61
63
66
Saab900
175
176
Horn
Horn
40
40
117B RD 1.0
117A RD 1.0
118A
SV 1.0
118
SV 1.0
117 RD 1.5
BL 16.0
BL 25.0
211
RD 16.0
20
10
VT 6.0
30
86
21
117
RD 1.5
11H
VT 2.5
117C
VT 0.5
68
1528
118 SV 0.5
41
015H 513
A
Saab 900
ce<l
Horn
Operation
Fault-tracing hints
The horn system includes two tuned loud~tone horns,

one of them high-pitched and the other low-pitched.
The horn will be operative when the ignition switch is

in the drive position.
When the ignition switch is in the drive position, a

positive voltage (+54) is taken viathe actuating coil
in horn relay 68 and slip ring switch 352 to the horn
switches on the steering wheel ..
1.

live.
2.
Check the relay by earthing relay terminal 85.

The horn should then sound.
3.
Check the cable harnesses and earth connections.
When one of the horn switches is closed, the relay

will be energised and horn. 40 will be supplied via
fuse 26 and the relay contacts.
Saab900
178
Horn
Saab900
Battery
20
Ignition switch
seats
21

22A
Fuse holder
housing
40
Horn
two on the right-hand side, behind the headlamp
41
Horn switch
behind the steering wheel hub pad
59
2-pole connector
one at each horn
68
Horn relay
in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, relay position K
75
Distribution block
152A
152B

158

housing
211
352
Slip ring switch

at the steering column
Horn
Components
352
21
41
Saab900
75
179
180
Seat-belt warning lamp
Seat- It warning lamp
+54
+54
+54
I
I
I
I
I
I
72
11A
VT 2.5
11L
VT 2.5
11A
VT 2.5
~ASTEN
~ASTEN BELTS.@,)
BELTS
#p.)
142
GL 1.5
154 BR 0.75
155
BR 0.75
~ AS TEN
154
BR 0.75
60
69
BELTS
#p.)
214
150A GL 0.75
156
BR/VT 0.75
251 GN 0.75
15
D
70
JL
82
71
2
31
GF
232
233
SV 0.75
GN/VT 0.75
015H 022
A
70
117
Saab900
Seat-belt warning.lamR
Operation
Fault-tracing hints
The supply is taken from fuse 5 via29pole red connector 1528 and seat-belt warning lamp 72 to the
driver's seat-belt switch 70. The switch connects the
warning lamp to earth, and the warning lamp wi II thus
light up. When the seat-belt buckle is inserted into
the lock, the switch Will open the circuit and the lamp
will be extinguished.
The seat-belt warning lamp will be operative when

the ignition switch is in the drive position.
Seat switch 69 is connected in series with seat-belt

switch 71 on the co-drivers side. The seat switch will
close when a load is applied to the seat. The warning
lamp will thus light up only if a person is seated in the
co-driver's seat and the seat belt is not fastened.
1.
Check fuse 5 (and fuse 12, if fitted) and check

that the supply to them is live.
2.
Check seat-belt warning lamp 72 (and 214, if

fitted).
3.
Check seat-belt switches 70 and 71, and seat

switch 69.
4.

earth connections.
Cars for the ME market

Cars for this market are equipped with warning relay
82 and an extra seat-belt warning lamp 214, which is
fitted on the centre console .
. The driver's seat-belt switch 70 connects terminal GF
.. of the relay to earth, causing the warning lamps to
light up and the buzzer to sound. When the seat-belt
. buckle is inserted into the lock, the switch will open,
<the lamps will be extinguished and the buzzer will be
silenced.
Saab900
182

22A
Fuse holder
in the electrical distribution box, in the en
housing
58
12-pole connector
knee shield, below the fascia
60
one at the corresponding seat-belt lock
one between the front seats. under the cen-
tre console
three between the front seats, under the
centre console (ME)
69
Co-driver's seat switch for seat-belt warning

lamp
under the co-driver's seat
70
Seat-belt switch - driver's side

between the driver's seat and the co-driv
seat
71
Seat-belt switch - co-driver's side

between the driver's seat and the co-driver's
seat
72

in the centre of the fascia
82
Seat belVignition switch warning relay

back seat, relay position E (Convertible)
10-pole connector
knee shield. below the fascia
98
Saab900
117
Earthing point
1528

214
Seat-belt warning lamp on the centre console (ME)

on the centre console. between the front
seats
Components
~
..
/"
.-
!1 ..
."-"":;:
U--.
j\
70,71
Saab900
184
Seat-belt and ignition key warning
It and i
on k
+30
+54
I
I
I
I
warning
+54
I
I
11 L
11 A
GR 2.5
VT 2.5
VT 2.5
30
20
S
72
251
142'
GN 0.75
GL 1.5
60
FASTEN BELTS
58
150
GL 0.75
156
15
BR/VT 0.75
82
2
015H 023
A
31
GF
232
233
SV 0.75
GN/VT 0.75
70
117
Saab900
:Operation
Fault-tracing hints
.The seat-belt and ignition switch wamln gsyste m is

fitted only to cars for the USA and Canadian markets,
and 1989 models for Japan.
The seat-belt and ignition switch warning system will

be operative when the ignition switch is in the drive
position.
The warning system reminds the driver that he has

not fastened his seat belt, or that he has left the key
'in the ignition switch when leaving the car.
1.

to them is live.
2.
Check seat-belt warning lamp 72 and check that

the supply to relay 82 is live.
3.
Check the door switches, connectors, cable harnesses and earth connections.
,The system includes warning relay 82 which has a

buzzer. When the ignition switch isin the drive position, the relay is supplied (+54) from fuse 12, via red
'29-po le connector 1528.
'.Seatabelt warning
The warning relay is supplied (+54) from fuse 5, via
. red 29-pole connector 1528 and seat-belt warning
lamp 72.
Driver's seat-b elt switch 70 connects terminal GF of
the relay to earth. The warning lamp will then light up
.and the buzzer will sound. When the seat-belt buckle
is inserted into the lock, the switch will open, the
lamp will be extinguished and the buzzer will be
silenced.
Ignition switch warning

As long as the key remains in the ignition switch, the
supply will be five from terminal S of the ignition
switch to the warning relay.
If the key is in the ignition switch and the driver's door
is opened, door switch 54 will close. Terminal 1 of
the relay will then be earthed and the buzzer will
sound.
, . 1"
Saab900
,~~ '.~ ..
186~~qt-belt and igniti on
key WqrnJf'lg
I..QcatiQ"'$ of components
20~j~;~~i~ibnswitch
8H0st~ecentre console between the front

seats
22AJ=~~~16;~18rr
, in;tP~'~lectriGal distribution box, in the engioe,c9I"!1Rartment, on the left-hand wheel

housing
,
54
58
60
70
one between the front seats, under the centre console
one at the driver's seat-belt lock
seat
72

82
Seat-belt/ignition switch warning relay

back seat, relay position E (Convertible)
10-pole connector
to the leftofth esteer ing column, behind the
98
Saab900
Door sWitches"interior lighting

in each dO()rframe, between the hinges
12-pole connector
117
Earthing point
152A
1528

omponents
1-
~I
J-
10c::Jac::::JaC=:J .. c:::::J2c:::::J
.c::::J7c=ISc::J Jc::::J lc::J
54
70
82 (CAB)
Saab900r
lSi
188
Combined instrument
Combin
75
me nt
5 GR .04.0
10
VT 6.0
12A GR VT 0.75
21
SA
GR 4.0
5
GR
+X
1
1
-<
~
~
'"
'"<:>
5~
;g
OX>
'"
OX>
<.>
'"
vI'-
~I~
'or
111
I'-~
to<.)
"1
~
GN/VT 1.0
12A
8
56A
:>
123K
4.0
GR/VT 0.75
q
0
12
GR/VT 2.5
'"8
'"
M89: SE,FI. M89: JP

EU,GB,ME.FE M90: (T)SE,
M90: (I,C)SE.FI, FI,EU,GB,
EU,GB,ME,FE.JP ME,FE.JP
",I
0
'>
13
~
14
152B
. 306 (M89: US)

2
141
1
126
<:>
RO 1.5
'"0
5
~
'"g
'"
152B
>-
>
13
10
331<"90: us)
2-0--
'"0
is
116
8
25
7
'"0
on
0
'"0
<.>
'"
>-
>
7 98
'"0
>-
'"0
>
~'"
'"
58~,,5
SV/VT 0.75
34
549
VL/VT 0.75
I
184
BL 0.5
59
8R/VT 0.75
145: 3 (1l6,1l6~)
176: 3 (116.116~)
200: 19 (1l6,n6)
200: 22 (1l6~.T1~)
204: 2 (116.TI6)
186
BR 0.5
185
186
BR 0.75
185
188
CR/VT 0.5
CR 0.5
'"0
z
'"
'"
193A
148. 153
154. 267
(SE. n. EV.
GB. ME. fE. AU)
M90:282
(5E.EU.G8) .
183
GL/VT 0.5
GR 0.75
43
57
3
VT 0.75
27 '291
L_J
(SE.n,EU.G8l;;.47;.:N..:...
~:;:;....;:;.~_...:.:..:-..;:;.:..:..
SE, FI, EU, GB,!Q:

ME, FE, JP
\2.. .
(US.CA) 47U
CHECK
ENGINE
>
SV 0.75
732
116. 116>-.,
T16, T16A
>-
182A VL 0.5
'93
sv 0.75
3
on
0
'"0
>-
>
-'
OX>
C8
>
161 25
6
6
>-
JP
'132
'"
<:>
>-
;z;:1
SV/VT~
~
0
'"0
CA,AU,M89: US
CRUISE
_
47S US)
'-_.. .:.:: ..-_- ----- -
015H OJ<4-
47U
M90: US
Saab900
CRUISE
47T
SRS
47M
47Q
47F
PARK
BRAKE
ANTI
LOCK
BRAKE
FLUID
Combined instrument
16 Rheostat
47A Fuel gauge and
47B Fuel reserve warning lamp .. '"
47C Temperature gauge
'"
47D Oil pressure warning lamp. . . . .
47E Charging warning lamp .... ,.;.
47F Brake fluid level warning lamp
47G Full beam warning lamp.";, ..:.,,
47H Left-hand direction indicator;Y,Jarning lamp.
-471 Right-hand direction indicatpqvCirning lamp
:
'47J Rear window heater warn In'g lamp
47K Shift-up warning lamp;
,
'
47M Handbrake warning lamp
.' ..
189
189
190
190
191
191
192
192
192
192
192
192
16 Rheostat
193
193
193
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
47A Fuel gauge and

47B Fuel reserve warning lamp
Operation
hen the ignition switch is in the drive position,
'rheostat 16 is supplied via 29-pole red connector
" 1528 and fuse 23.
The brightness of the following instrument lighting
can be steplessly adjusted by means of rheostat 16
in combined instrument 47:
Operation
The fuel gauge and the fuel reserve warning lamp
keep the driver informed of the fuel level in the tank.
positive supply (+ 15) is taken from fuse 22 to:
Fuel level gauge 47A in the combined instrument
and then through a 3-pole connector"(57) to fuel
level transmitter 46 in the fuel tank to earth, and
('O'Q:lI;>Jred instrument lighting

In addition, the dial lighting for the radio (267) connectedto connector 98 is adjusted via rheostat 16.
(For complete information, see the section entitled
', "Lighting systems, Lighting for controls".)
Fault-tracing hints
1.
47N Rear fog light warning lamp

470 Choke warning lamp
47P CHECK ENGINE warning lamp
47Q ABS warning lamp
47S Passive seat-belt warning lamp (1989
model)
47T SRS Airbag warning lamp (1990 model)
47U Cruise Control operative warning lamp
47V Warning lamp for headlamps switched on ..
EXH warning lamp(JP)
49 Clock
110 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Check the appropriate fuses and check that the

supply tothem is live.
them is live.
earth connections.
Fuel reserve warning lamp 47B and then through

the fuel level transmitter in the fuel tank to earth.
Fuel level transmitter 46 adjusts the voltage so that
the fuel gauge reading will correspond to the level
sensed by the transmitter float in the tank.
When the fuel content of the tank has dropped to'
about 7 dmj3 (Iitres) or less, the fuel reserve warning
lamp will be earthed through the transmitter and the
lamp will light up.
Fault-tracing hints
Th-e fuel gauge and the warning lamp for the fuel
reserve will be operative when the ignition switch is in
the drive position.
1.

live.
2.
Check the bulb and check that the supply to its

terminals in the combined instrument is live.
3.
Check that the terminals of the fuel gauge and

the fuel level transmitter are live.
4.

earth connection of the fuel level transmitter.
Resistance of the fuel level transmitter

- 2.4 - 8.0 ohm when the tank is full ,
- 63.3 - 67.5 ohm when the tank is empty
Saab900
190
Combined instrument
47C Temperature gauge
471l0n pressure warning lamp
Operation
Operation
The temperature gauge shows the engine coolant

temperature.
The oil pressurewarning lamp is intended to warn th

drivert hatthe engine oil pressure is below the prede
termined value.

coolant temperature gauge 47C is supplied (+15)
from fuse 22. The other terminal of the gauge is
earthed via coolant temperature transm itter 45.
Changes in the coolant temperature will affect the
resistance of the transmitter, and the gauge will thus
show the prevailing engine temperature.
Ifthe IUbricatir)g()jJ<pl~$9:ureshould drop below O.30.5 bar, oil pressure transm itter 44 will close and the
lamp will light up.
..
fault-tracing hints
fault-tracing hints
The temperature gauge will be operative when the
ignition switch is in the drive position.
1. Check fuse 22 and check that the supply to it is
live.
2.
Check that the supply to the temperature gauge

is live.
3.
Check that there is no open circuit in transmitter

45.
4.

earth connections.
Resistance of the temperature transmitter:

51.2 4.3 ohm at +90 C (194 OF)
.....
Lamp 47D in the qqrnQined instrument is supplied

(+54) from fu.se 7, via red 29-pole connector 1528;
Saab90 0'
The oil pressure warning lamp will be operative when

1.

live.
2.
Check the bulb and check that the supply to i

3.
Disconnect the cable from the oil pressur

transmitter and earth it. If the lamp lights up,
the circuit is unbroken.
4.

earth connection of the oil pressure transmitter.
Combined instrument
191
47f Brake fluid level warning

lamp
47E Charging warning lamp

Operation
The charging warning lamp informs the driver of
whether or not the alternator is charging.
positive voltage will be supplied via fuse 7 and red
29-pole connector 152B to charging warning lamp
47E in the combined instrument. The other side of
the lamp is connected to alternator 2.
.When the alternator is not rotating or when it is not
charging the battery for any other reason, the circuit
forthe charging warning lampwill be earthed through
terminal 0+ on the alternator, and the lamp will light
up.
When the alternator is charging, terminal 0+ will be
at the same voltage as the supply from the fuse. The
same voltage will then be appliedto both terminals of
the warning lamp, and the lamp will therefore be
extinguished.
(For complete information, see the section entitled
"Engine electronics, Battery-charging system".)
Fault-tracing hints
1.

live.
2.
Check the bulb in the warning lamp.
3.

earth connections of the alternator.
4.
Check that terminal 0+ ofthe alternator is live.
Operation
The brake fluid level warning lamp is intended to warn
the driver that the brake fluid level in the reservoir is
low. Its operation can be checked by means of a
button on the brake fluid reservoir.
When the ignition switch is in the drive position, lamp
47F is supplied (+15) from fuse 22, via red 29-pole
connector 152B.
The other side of the lamp is connected to brake
warning switch 42, via black 29-pole connector
152C.
If the fluid in the brake fluid reservoir should drop to
an inadmissibly low level, switch 42 will close and
the warning lamp will light up.
Lamp test
When the ignition switch is turned to the start position, terminal 15 of ignition switch 20 supplies pin 9
of lamp 47F, and the anode of the diode in the combined instrument.
In the start position, the supply from +54 will be
open, so that the cathode of the diode in the combined instrumentwill be earthed via pins 7, 9and 8 of
lamp 47E, and via alternator 2. The diode prevents
reverse flow of current.
Fault-tracing hints
The brake fluid level warning lamp will be operative
when the ignition switch is in the drive position.
1.
Check the brake fluid level warning circuit by

pressing the button on the brake fluid reservoir.
The circuit should close and the lamp should
light up.
2.

live.
3.

4.

earth connection.
Saa~900
192
Combined instrument
47G Full beam warning lamp

See the description in the section entitle d "Lighting
systems, Headlamps".
41M Handbrake warning lamp

Operation
The handbrake warning lamp warns the driver that the
handbrake is applied.
47H , 471 Direction Indic~t()r

warning lamps
(left-hand and right-hand)
Lamp 47M in the combined instrument is supplied

(+ 15) from fuse 22 via red 29-pole connector 1528.
See the description in the section entiH~dt'Lif5hting

systems, Direction indicators".
..
47J Rear wind ow'h eate rwal '"lng

lamp
See the' description in the section entitle d "Heating
and ventilation systems, Electric heating for the rear
window".
47K Shift-up warning lamp

See the description in the section entitle d "Engine
electronics, LH 2.4 fuel system."
As long as the handbrake is applied, handbrake

switch 43 will be closed and the lamp will stay alight.
Lamp test
When the ignition switch is turned to the start position, terminal 15 of ignition switch 20 will be live.
Current will flow to pin 11 of lamp 47M and the anode
of the diode in the combined instrument.
When the switch is in the start position, the supply
from +54 is opened, and the cathode of the diode in
the combined instrument is therefore earthed via
pins 7, 9 and 8 of lamp 47E and alternator 2.
If lamp 47M is in good condition, it should then light
up. Correct indication will be obtained only if the
handbrake is not applied. The diode prevents reverse
flow of current.
fault-tracing hints
The handbrake warning lamp will be operative when
Saab900
1.

live. Check also fuse 7.
2.

3.
Disconnect the cable from the handbrake switch

and earth it. If the lamp lights up, the circuit is
unbroken.
4.

earth connection of the handbrake switch.
Combined instrument
47N Rear fog light warning lamp
193
47P CHECK ENGINE warning

lamp
See the description in the section entitled "Lighting

systems, Rear fog lights".
Operation
470 Chol:<e warning lamp

Operation
The choke warning lamp lights up when the choke is
partially or totally withdrawn. This lamp is fitted only
to cars with carburettor engines ..
choke warning lamp 470 is supplied (+54) from fuse
7, via red 29-pole connector 1528.
If a fault should occur in the fuel system and/or

ignition system, flashing codes will be obtained on
warning lamp 47P. This lamp is fitted only to cars with
16-valve engines.
warning lamp 47P is supplied (+54) from fuse 7, via
red 29-pole connector 1528. Warning lamp 47Pthen
supplies control unit 200 for the LH system and/or
control unit 176 for the EZK ignition system.
When the choke control is withdrawn, switch 34 will

close, and the lamp will light up.
Fault-tracing hints
Choke warning lamp 470 will be operative when the
ignition switch is in the drive position.
Warning lamp 47P lights up with a steady light when

the ignition switch is in the drive position, before the
engine is started.
For complete information, see the section entitled
"Engine electronics", "LH fuel system" and "EZK ignition system".
1.

live.
2.

1.
3.
Disconnect the cable from the choke control

switch and earth it. If the lamp lights up, the
circuit is unbroken.

live.
2.


earth connections.
3.

earth connections.
4.
Saab900
Fault-tracing hints
Warning lamp 47Pwill be operative when the ignition
switch is in the drive position.
194
Combined instrument
47Q ABS warning lamp

See the description in the section entitled "Anti-lock
brakes (ABS)"
47V Warning lamp for headlamps

.. sWitched on
4 7S Passive seat-belt warning

lamp (1989 models)
See the description in the section entitled "Lighting

systems, Headlamps and Parking lights"
i,"
>.:-u-:-_":--~>--~;;:<
49 'Clock
;>-:~~:<'
See the description in the section entitled "Other

systems, passive seat belts".
47T SRS Airbag warning lamp

(1990 models)
Operation
OP~~~I~~/'.,./ . . .
CIOCk4-91S"locateq inppmbined instrument 47.. The

positiv~~uPply18t~e clocl, is taken from fuse 28, via
red 29-pol~i9()Dn~ptBC152B. The supply to the clock
is live(+30)reg~r:(:Hess6fthe position ofthe ignition
switch.
. ..
Fault-tracing
See the section entitled "Other systems, Airbag".
EXH warning lamp (JP)

Cars destined for the Japanese market are equipped
with an EXH warning lamp to warn the driver of overheating of the catalytic converter.
47U Cruise Control operative

warning lamp
1.

live.
2.
Check that the positive terminal of the clock is

live, and that the negative terminal is earthed.
3.

earth connection.
110 Tachometer
See the description in the section entitled "Other

systems, Cruise Control".
Saab900
See the description in the section entitled "Engine

electronics, Ignition systems".
.
Combined instrument
195
1
Battery
Alternator
on the left-hand side ()rtheengine
Earthing point inthef~scia
7
8
..... E:arthingpointoriiti~r~dikt()rcross-member
Li~h{i~grela~
.
.
iritheelectricaldistributioh box in the engine compartment, relay positions A and B
Saab900
10
Light switch
16

18

20
Ignition switch
seats
21

in the electrical distribution box, in the engine compar:tment, relay pos,ition E
22A
Fuse holder
housing
25

on the fascia
34
Choke control switch

seats
42

on the brake fluid reservoir
43
Handbrake switch
under the plastic cover at the handbrake
lever, between the front seats
44
Oil pressure transmitter

on the left-hand side of the engine block,
above the oil filter
45
Coolant temperature transmitter

on the right-hand side of the thermostat
46
Fuel level transmitter

in the fuel tank - the terminals are accessible from the luggage compartment
47A
47B
47C
47D
47E
47F
47G
47H
Fuel level gauge

Fuel reserve warning lamp
Coolant temperature gauge
Oil pressure warning lamp
Brake warning lamp
196
471
47J
47K
47M
47}J
470
47P
47Q
47S
47T
47U
47V
Combined instrument
Rear window heater warning lamp
Shift-up warning lamp (US, manual)
Handbrake warning lamp
Rear fog light warning lamp (SE, FI, EU, GB)
Choke warning lamp (C8)
Check engine warning lamp (116, 116
Lambda, T16, T16 Lambda)
ABS warning lamp
Pa$$ive seat-belt warning lamp (1989 models)
SRS Airbag warning lamp (1990 models)
Cruise Control warning lamp
Warning lamp for head lamps switched on in
the combined instrument on the fascia
141
Selector for Cruise Control

inthedirection indicator stalk switch, onthe
left-hand side of the steering column
146
Amplifierfor the electronic ignition system

wheel housing
148
on the fascia, in the ashtray
152A
152B
152C

49
Clock on the fascia
57
3-pole connector
.
one under the back seat, on the left-hand
side
one on the left-hand side in the engine compartment, at the electrical distribution box
153

154

on the fascia, at the respective heater control
58
12-pole connector
to the left of the steering column, under the
fascia, behind the knee shield
158
159
59
2-pole connector
one to the left of the fascia, at the lighting
switch
one under the fascia, to the left of the steering column, behind the knee shield
wheel housing (Convertible)

housing
161

176

60
Single-pole connector (auto.)

lever
200

forward of the right-hand front door, belo
the fascia, behind the trim
75
Distribution block
211
Earthing pointon the gearbox
257
267
Radio connector
in the radio compartment in the fascia
282
Headlamp beam control switch (1990

model)
on the fascia
291
ABS control unit

on the left-hand side of the engine compart~
ment, forward of the wheel housing (198
models)
under the right-hand side of the back seat
306

331
Electronic unit forthe Airbag (1990 models

in the fascia, under the lett-hand speake
grille
98
10-pole connector
fascia (behind the knee shield)
110
Tachometer
116

on the fascia
117
Earthing rJoint
123
4-pole connector
one forward of the right-hand front door,
below the fascia (behind the trim)
one on the left-hand side, under the fascia
(behindthe knee shield)
132
Speed transmitter
Saab900
. m med instrument
Components
1e
n
1d
21
22A
59
152A
152B
152C
158
159
1~I
16,18
47,49.110
45
42
43
46
75
Saab900
198
Coolant temperature warning buzzer
Coolant
re waming buzzer
mpe
+54
I
I
llA
VT 2.5
85A
BR 1.5
269
129
109
BR 0.75
108
SV 0.75
28
152C
130
/
"-
108A
SV 0.75
M89:
18,T8,
108A
SV 0.75
r177
015H 024
B
Saab900
201
116,T16
M90: 116,A,(FE)
Coolant temperature warning buzzer
199
Operation
Cars for the Middle East and Far Ea$trd~tk~ts are
equipped with a coolant temperature warning buzzer.

(18, T8) (1989 models)
When the ignition switch is in thedri\l8 position,

buzzer 129 will be supplied frornfuse 5, via red
29-pole connector 1528. If the coolant temperature
should exceed about + 120C (250 OF), coolant temperature warning switch 130 will close and the
buzzerwill sound. The switchwillopen again atabout
+ 115C (240 OF).
22A
Fuse holder
housing
61
. Windscreen wiper stalk switch

on the right-hand side of the steering column
129
8uzzer for coolant temperature

column, behind the knee shield
130
Coolant temperature warning switch

in the engine compartment, on the radiator
hose
1528
152C

201
Earthing point on the engine (116, T16)
269
Two-pole connector
under the fascia, behind the knee shield
fault-tracing hints
The buzzer will be operative when the ignition switch
is in the drive position.
1.

live.
2.
Check that the supply to the buzzer is live. The

buzzer should sound when the cable to the temperature switch is earthed.
3.
Check the temperature switch.
4.

earth connections.
Components
130
Saab900
200
Cigarette lighter
retteJi
Ci
er
+54
f
11M
VT 2.5
13
122A
135
VT 1.5
1528
11
214
8L 0.75
48
128
128
SV 0.75
SV 0.75
.[0.
GB,FE,AU .
59
0-0 f-<=-- ----,
3188
SV 0.75
015H 015
A
Saab900
Cigarette lighter
201.
Operation
When the ignition switch is in the drive~biti()n, the
cigarette lighter is supplied from fuse 13, via red
29-pole connector 1528. The circuit will be closed
when the cigarette lighter is depressed.
22A
Fuse holder
housing
fault-tracing hints
48
Cigarette lighter
59
2-pole connector
behind the fascia
1.

live.
2. Check thatthe filament ofthe cigarette lighter is

unbroken.
3.
Check the earth connection.
Components
Saab900
1528

1148
GN 2.5
"
1148
GN 2.5
1148
GN 2.5
V
37
112
SV 2.5
~
0150 026
A
Saab900
37
112
SV 2.5
Cooling system fan, 1989 models
Operation
.
203
.
The supply is taken from fuse 25 tolerilperature

switch 39, regardless of the ignition switch position.
1.

live.
When the engine coolant temperature has reached

about 92C (198 OF), the temperature switch will
close and radiator fan motor 37 will start.
2.
Check that the supply to temperature switch 39

is live.
3.
Check the radiator fan by connecting a jumper

across the temperature switch.
4.
Run the engine until it reaches normal operating

temperature and check the performance of the
temperature switch.
5.

earth connections.
Cars with air conditioning (AC) are equipped with a

crimped branch connection, since the fan is also
controlled by the AC unit.
Time-delay relay
Cars for "hot-weather markets" are also equipped
with a time-delay relay; which limits the time the
radiator fan will run after the engine has been
switched off.
If the car is equipped with a time-delay relay, check

the relay and fuse 22.
Relay 26 is always energised when the engine is

running, Le. when tfre ignition switch is in the drive
position. The fan is controlled by switch '39.
When the engine is switched off, the + 15 supply to

the relay coil will be interrupted. After about 10 minutes, the relay will trip the supply to the fan motor,
even if temperature switch 39 is still closed.
Cars for SE,
See the section entitled "Cooling system fan, 1990

models" on pages 206 - 207.
Fa, EU and GB markets
On these markets, the wiring for the AC is not fitted as

standard to cars with 18 and T8 engines. An AC cable
harness must be fitted when the AC is installed.
Saab900
204
Cooling system fan, 1990 m0c:l~ls
Coolingsy
n,
90m
els
,SCFI,EU,G6.
+54
I
I
+30
I
I
+30
I
I
11D
VT 2.5
5K
GR 2.5
5K
GR 2.5
110
GL 2.5
156
30
110A
GL 2.5
110A
GL 2.5
15
30
110B
GL 0.5
86
396
87
85
87
881
BL 0.5
111
GN 4.0
31T
111
GN 4.0
39
889
SV 0.5
410
SV 0.5
39
889
SV
111
GN 4.0
881
BL 0.5
31
0~5
111
GN 4.0
1148
GN 2.5
114B
GN 2.5
7
DISH 026
B
112
SV 2.5
112
SV 2.5
Saab900
Operation
Faulttracing hints
The supply is taken from fuse 25 torelay 396, regardless of the ignition switch position:
1.

live.
When the engine coolant temperatUre has reached

about 92C (198 OF), temperatUre switch 39 will
close, relay 396 will be energk5j3cj(:md power will be
supplied to the radiator far;1rnOtor.
2.
Check that the supply to relay 396 is live.
3.
Check the operation of the relay and the radiator

fan by connecting a jumper across the temperature switch.
Cars with air conditioning'(AC)arEf equipped with a

crimped branch connection, since the fan is also
controlled by the AC unit.
4.
Run the engine until it reaches normal operating

temperature and check the performance of the
temperature switch.
Time-delay relay
5.
Cars for "hot-weather markets" are also equipped

with a time-delay relay, which limits the time the
radiator fan will run' after the engine has been
switchEld off.

earth connections.
If the car is equipped with a time-delay relay, check

the relay and fuse 22.
Relay 26 will be energised when temperature switch

39 has closed.
When the engine is switched off, the +15 supply to
the relay coil will be interrupted. After about 10 minutes, the relay will trip the supply to the fan motor,
even if temperature switch 39 is stil,1 closed.
Cars for SE, FI, EU and GB markets

On these markets, the wiring for the AC is not fitted as
standard to cars with 18 and T8 engines. An AC cable
harness must be fitted when the AC is installed.
Saab900
206
7
Lighting relay (1990 models)

in the electrical distribution box in the en'gine compartment, relay positions A and B.
22A> 'Fuse holder

in the electrical distribution box, in the engingcompartment, on the left-hand wheel
hq\.lsing
26
Time delay relay for the radiator fan

in the engine compartment, at the front of
the left-hand wheel housing member (1989
mopels), " ' . ' i , ;
in theelgctiiGaldistribution box, relay position G (1990 models)
37
Radiator fan motor

at the front of the engine compartment
39
Temperature switch for radiator fan

on the left-hand side of the radiator
59
2-pole connector
at the radiator fan motor
60
Single-pole connector (AC)

in the engine compartment, behind the radiator
93
Earthing point on the left-hand wheel housing member (1989 models)
113

heated rear window (1990 models)
in the electrical distribution box in the en-:
gine compartment, relay position C
156

in the eleytrical distribution box in the en-.
housing
158
Negative"distribution terminal (1990 mod

els)
in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, on the left-hand whee.!
housing
159
Distribution terminal + 15 (1989 models)

in the electrical distribution box, in the en'
housing
174
Relay for daylight driving lights (CA) (199

models)
gine compartment, relay position F
396
Radiator fan relay (1990 models)

in the electrical distribution box, relay posi
tion G
Gooling system fan, 1990 models
207
Components
159 M1989
26
113
158
17
39
1990
26
156 396 174
I
I
37
39
Saab90().
208
Ventilation fan
ntilatlon
+54
I
I
11F
VT 2.5
1528
29
103 VL 2.5
105A GL 1.5
@J-
103A
VL 2.5
'.
35
I
I
108
GN 2.5
106
BL 1.5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
3
4 5
104
GR 2.5
L __ - -
107
SV 2.5
107A
SV 2.5
149
0-1
104A
GR 2.5
36
3
015H 027
A
Saab900
Ventilation fan
Operation
209: ','
Faulttracing hints
C",;;,.:,: <~/:;y._ ' ::"'< .'<
Ventilation fan motor 36 has threeJ?;~,~siand is

controlled from fan selector sWitCh3~,,:
The ventilation fan will be operative when the ignition

Switch 35 is supplied from fuse~,2.,1i~fr~d 29-pole

.connector 152B. The fan spe,e<:J<~~~'b~,varied by
taking the supply from different poil1~$iQR,tesistor 74.
1.

live.
2.
Check that the supplies to switch 150 and

switch 35 are live.
3.
Turn the switch to different positions and check

that the voltage to the fan motor changes.
4.

earth connections.
When main fan switch 149i,910~cl!the fan will

always be running, regardle$ of:i.the position of the
fan selector switch.
' .. , .. ,
Main switch 149 and AGs~it~I\l.'~~{Jare controlled by
the air distribution contr.81;'witCh 149 is closed
when the control is in anYJJosition except positions 0
and. t, when it, fS9J1e'fY'(the control is closed).
Switch 150 is closedWhen the control is in position
,. The fan motorwilh1llen receive the full supply
voltage and will runC1tttJE? highest speed.
If resistor 74 is overloaded, the resulting heat will
cause the bimetal:switch to close. The positive supply will be earthed, and fuse 9 will blow. The bimetal
switch will open when it has cooled.
Saab900
'~;.210
Ventilation fan
3
Saab900
22A
Fuse holder
in the electrical distribution box, in the e
gine compartment, on the left-hand whe
!lousing
35
S&lector switch for the ventilation fan

irithe centre of the fascia
36
Motor for the venti lation fan

under the right-hand speaker grille
74
Resistor for the venti lation fan

to the right, under the left-hand speak
grille
149
Main switch for ventilation fan

on the fascia, in the air distribution control
(upper contact)
150
Air distribution switch, AC position

on the fascia, in the air distribution contro
(lower contact)
1528

in the electrical distribution box in the en~
c:o~m~p:o:n:e:n~ts~-------'-:2------_\Jl~e~n~ti'!.<la~ti~on~fa~n~
2211
149
14
Saab90()i
150
212
Air Conditioner (AC) with
time~delay
r Conditioner (AC)
relay
relay
el
tim
+54
I
1118
VT 2.5
116
GL/RO 1.5
1160
GL/RD 0.75
neA GL RQ 0.75
458
8R/VT 0.75
409A
599
GR 0.75
SV 0.75
598R
T 0.75
17
US,CA
JP(M89)
166
402 BL 0.75
r2.2.-,
I
I
I
I
I
L __
116>-,T16>-1
I
I
I
'"
I
406 BL 0.75
171
T 0.75
647
544 RO
406 BL 0.75
405
0.75
BL
544 RO
27
T 0.75
+15
1
+30
20
Iso
51<
GR 2.5
'"
"
25122A
'"<5
0-
?,
'"
>
~
<5
15
177201
407 BL 0.75
r--------"''''--'~"-''-_t_407 BL 0.75
:l?
- - - i..'c5_:~1~-:-,-"':'_-_-_-_.F_::J
-t::BV:;'7-:;--_-_-_-_-_-_~81~155
40J
114A ON 0.75
RD 1.5
114
GN 2.5
B5A 85
30
8
1148
GN 2.5
113
203
498
SV 0.5
201
112
T8,T8>.,T16(M89)
18,18>116
SV 2.5
170
18>T8>-(M89)
Saab900
Air Conditioner (AC) with time-delay relay
Operation
Certain cars are equipped with an Air Conditioner
(AC). For a complete description of the wiring for the
lighting of switches on cars for the US, CA and JP
markets, see the section entitled "LightingJor c(Jntrois - US, CA, JP".
Compressor 170 and radiator fan motor 37

The AC can be switched on and off by means of AC
switch 169, which is supplied from fuse 6, via black
29-pole connector 152C. When the switch is depressed, the lamp built into the button will be supplied directly (not via the resistor), so it will light up
with full intensity. (When the switch is not activated,
the lamp is supplied via fuse 6.)
Compressor 170 and ordinary radiator fan 37 are
connected via relay 156, whose contacts are supplied from fuse 25. The relay will be energised when
. the following conditions have been satisfied:
Pressure switch 166 is closed, i.e. the refrigerant
pressure is at least 2.8 bar.
e Anti-freeze thermostat (cycling clutch contact)
171 is closed, i.e. the ambient temperature is at
least about +6 ac.
When the relay is energised, power will be supplied to
the compressor only if temperature switch 168 is
closed. (The switch will open if the engine temperature should exceed about + 115 ac.)
Diode 173, which is connected in parallel with the
compressor, reduces the voltage transients at the
instant when the compressor is switched off (1989
model).
Delayed connection when starting
Relay 156 is equipped with two time delay functions.

One of these is activated whenever the engine is
started. Ignition switch 20 (in the start position) supplies pin 50, and if switch 169 is then depressed, the
energising of the relay and thus starting of the compressor will be delayed by about 10 - 20 seconds
(depending on the engine. variant), to ensure that
combustion in the engine will be stable after starting, before the the AC load is applied.
Idling speed compensation and cut-out at

full load
Cars without Arc valve
Solenoid valve 142, which is kept open when the

compressor is running, is used for idling speed compensation for the increased load caused by the AC.
Cars with AIC valve
On certain variants, the auxiliary air valve is replaced

by an Automatic Idling Control (AIC) valve which also
compensates for instantaneous load increases at
idling speed.
Saab900
213
The control unit receives a signal via relay pin 16

when the time delay of the relay is activated, and it
then starts idling speed compensation. After 0.3
seconds, the relay will be energised and the compressor will start. The relay electronics receive their
supply (in the drive position) via pin 15.
W/;1enthe engine is running at full throttle, pin TK of
the relay wi II be earthed through throttle angle transmitter203,and the relay will trip the compressor.'~
AC radiator fan 172

Extra radiator fan 172T()(the ACis connected via
relay 155 and is supplied from fuse 6.
The relay coil is supplied from the contacts of relay
156 and from pressure switch 166. The AC radiator
fan thus runs when AC switch 169 is depressed and
pressure switch 166 is closed.
Recirculation valve 38
Recirculation valve 38, which controls the recirculation damper, will be switched on when recirculation
switch 143 is depressed. The switch is supplied from
fuse 6. When the switch is depressed, the lamp built
into the switch will light up with full intensity.
214
Air Conditioner (AC) (CH14)
rCond onerG
) (CU14)
+54
I
1118
VI 2.5
~
143
1160
GL/RO 0.75
116A GL
0 0.75
599
GR 0.75
409A
0.7S
sv
116C
GL/RD 0.75
116G GL RD 1.5
152C
1168 8L 0.75
26<!-_!.!11",68"--,,8=.L.,,0,,,.7,,5_--,
166
402 BL 0.75
406 8L 0.75
+30
5K
GR 2.5
25122A
on
'"
-to'
o
116E 8L 0.5
r--"
I 200
I CU14
I
21
4a5 8L
36
544 RD VT 0.75
T 0.75
67
2
85
544 RD
'--...,....1
878
87
T 0.75
403 RD 1.5
114
GN 2.5
113A
SV 0.5
lltA
VT 2.5
40,
RD 1.5
1148
GN 2.5
112A
SV 2.5
112
sv
2.5
173
170
172
37
201
01~
026
D
Saab900
158
Air Conditioner (AC) (CU14)
216
Operation
Fault-tracing hints
Certain cars are equipped with an Air Conditioner

(AC).
As a general rule, the supply to the unit is live when

the ignition switch is in the drive position. If non'e of
the components isfaulty, check the cable harnesses,
connectors and earth connections.
Compressor 170 and radiatoll' fan motor 37

The AC can be switched on and off by means of AC
switch 169, which is supplied from fuse 6, via black
29-pole connector 152C. When the switch is depressed, the lamp built into the button will be supplied directly (not via the resistor), so it will light up
with full intensity. (When the switch is not activated,
the lamp is supplied via fuse 6.)
Compressor 170 and radiator fan motor 37

1.
Check fuses 6 and 25 and check that the supplies to AC switch 169 and relay 156 are live.
2.
Press the AC switch. Measure the voltage across

pressure switch 166. {the pre~sure switch
should be closed). Note that refrigerant will
spray out when the pressure switch is disconnected. Caution: Risk of frostbite.
3.
Check cycling clutch contact 171. (It should

close at +6 C or 43 oF.)
4.
Check that the relay is energised and that the

relay contacts (87 and 87A) are live. If not,
check that the coil/electronics are being supplied from thermostat 171 and from the + 15
distribution terminal. When the relay is energised, terminal 16 should be live. At full throttle,
terminal TK should be earthed.
5.
Check that the supplies to the compressor and

the radiator fan are live. (Temperature switch
168 should be closed.)
Compressor 170 and ordinary radiator fan are connected via relay 156. The relay will be energised
when the following conditions have been satisfied:
Pressure switch 166 is closed, Le. the refrigerant
pressure is at least 2.8 bar.
Anti-freeze thermostat (cycling clutch contact)
171 is closed, Le. the ambient temperature is at
least about +6 C.
Pin 21 of control unit 200 will then be energised.
Relay 156 will be energised when it is earthed via pin
36 of the control unit. When the relay is energised,
the compressor will be supplied only if temperature
switch 168 is closed. (The switch will open if the
engine temperature should exceed about + 115C.)
Diode 173, which is connected in parallel with the
compressor, reduces the voltage transients at the
instant when the compressor is switched off.
Delayed connection when starting
CU14 fuel system

4.
Check that pin 21 of control unit 200 is live and

that relay 156 is earthed from pin 36 of the
control unit.
5.
Check that the supplies to the compressor and

the radiator fan are live. (Temperature switch.
168 should be closed.)
The delay and idling speed compensation when the

AC is switched in are controlled by control unit 200.
AC radiator fan 172

Extra radiator fan 172 for the AC is connected via
relay 155 and is supplied from fuse 6. The relay coil
is supplied from pressure switch 166. The AC radiator
fan thus runs when AC switch 169 is depressed and
pressure switch 166 is closed.
AC radiator fan 172
Recirculation valve 38
Recirculation valve 38, which controls the recirculation damper, will be switched on when recirculation
switch 143 is depressed. The switch is supplied from
fuse 6. When the switch is depressed, the lamp built
into it will light up with full intensity.
1.
Check fuse 6 and check that the supplies to the

AC switch and to relay 155 are live.
2.
Press the AC switch. Measure the voltage across

pressure switch 166 (the pressure switch
should be closed). Note that refrigerant will
spray out when the pressure switch is disconnected. Caution: Risk of frostbite.
3.
Check that relay 155 is energised and that the

supply to the AC radiator fan is live.
Recirculation
Saab900
1.
Check fuse 6 and check that the supply to recirculation switch 143 is live.
2.
Press the switch and check that the recirculation

valve is activated.
216
Air Conditioner (AC) (CU14)
158

housing
166

in the engine compartment, on the drying
agent container, forward of the right-hand
wheel housing
Lighting relay
in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, relay p()siti8QsA and B.
17
Extra rheostat for the lighting pfswitches

and controls
168
Fuse holder
.. .....
in the electrical distribution .box, Jp the engine compartment, on the left-hand wheel
housing
.
Coolant temperature switch, AC

on the radiator inlet hose, near the distributor
169
Switch, AC
170
Compressor for the AC

at the rear of the engine compartment
171
Anti-freeze thermostat (cycling clutch contact) for the AC

under the fascia, forward of the right-hand A
pillar
172
Radiator fan for the AC

on the left-hand side ofthe radiator package
173
one at the extreme rear of the engine compartment, at the compressor
one at the back seat, for connecting the AC

in the cable harness, at the rear of the valve
cover
200
Control unit for the LH/CU14 fuel system

67
6-pole connector
201

113

heated rear window
203
Throttle angle transmitter for the LH fuel

injection system
F
G
Relay position F
Relay position G
distribution box
22A
37
Radiator fan motor (ordinary)

on the right-hand side of the radi~:lt.()r package
38
Recirculation valve
under the fascia on the right-hand side, forward of the right-hand A pillar
59
2-pole connector
one adjacent to radiator fan 37
one adjacent to AC radiator fan 172
60
116

on the fascia
142

AC
on the engine, on the by-pass hose of the
throttle housing
143
152C

in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, .on the left-hand wheel
155

in the electrical distribution box in the engihe compartment, relay position J
156

in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, relay position H
Saab900
Air Conditioner (AC) (CU14) ~ 217
Components
149
143
142
t..:.==--
'=5.::..J6
1.::;:66=--
L.:.
--I
.:;..:68'--
L.:.
'
171
200
Saab900
-.l
16
=..:9'--
L.:.
---..l
218
Ele
cally heated
ntsea
+54
I
I
llL
VT 2.5
59
140 GL 1.0
140A GL 1.0
59
64
141 SV 1.0
1418 SV 1.0
59
121
141C SV 1.0
015H 025
A
117
Saab900
219
Operation
Fault-tracing hints
Both front seats of the car are electrically heated.
The heating pads will be operative when the ignition

The heating pads are supplied from fuse 12, via red
29-pole connector 1528. The heating pads are
switched on and off by thermostats 64. These close
the circuit at about +14 C (57 oF) and open it at
about +28 C (82 OF).
The heating pad of the co-driver's seat is earthed via
seat switch 121. When a load is applied to the seat,
the seat switch will close and the heating pad can be
switched on and off by thermostat 64. This heating
pad will thus be operative only when a person is
seated in the co-driver's seat.
1.

live.
2.
Check thermostats 64 and check that the supply

to them is live.
3.
Check seat switch 121 under the co-driver's

seat.
4.
Check that there is no open circuitiri the heating

pad wiring.
5.
Check the connectors,cable harnesses and

earth connections.
Saab900
220
Saab900
22A
Fuse holder
housing
59
2-pole connector
one under each front seat
60
under the centre console, near the ignition
switch
64
Heating pad with thermostat

in the seat cushion and backrest of the driver's and co-driver's seats
98
10-pole connector
117
Earthing point
between the ignition switch and the hand
brake lever
121
Seat switch for the heating pad

under the co-driver's seat, on the left-hand
side
152B

distribution box, on the left-hand wheel
Components
64
Saab900
221
222
Electrically heated.front seats with rheostat control for the driver's seat
cally hea d
co
I for
sea
e d er's seat
+54
I
I
11L
VT 2.5
17
58A
BR/VT 0.5
r-"!!-----~7"""1l
10
140A
GL/VT 1.5
145
BL 0.5
141A
SV 0.5
140
GL 1.5
898
142
GL 1.5
141 SV 1.0
60
117
140A
GL/VT 1.0
145
BL 0.5
141
SV 1.0
141C
SV 1.0
142
GL 1.0
57
3
64
141B
SV 1.0
64
121
015H 033
A
Saab900
.'
Electrically heated front seats with rheostat cOJltrol for the driver's seat
223
Operation
fault..t,.cing hints
Both front seats of the car are electrically heated. On

certain models, heating of the driver's seat can be
controlled by means of a rheostat.
1.
Set the ignition switch to the drive position.
2.
Check fuse 12 and check that the supply to

rheostat 252 is live.
3.
Check that there is no open circuit in temperature transmitter 254. (Measure between pins 6
and 9 of the rheostat.)
4.
Check seat switch 121 under the>co-driver's

seat.
5.
Check that there is no open circuit in the heating

pad wiring.
6.

earth connections. 224
For a complete description ofthe wiring for the lighting of switch 252 on cars for the US, CA and JP
markets, see also the section entitled "Lighting systems, Lighting for controls-US, CAand 1989 for JP".
Driver's seat
He~ting pad 64 is supplied from fuse 12 via the red
29-pole connector 152B, and is switched on and off
by temperature transmitter 254.
The temperature transmitter is a Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) resistor, whose resistance
varies with the heating pad temperature.
The temperature ofthe driver's seat heating pad can
be set by means of rheostat 252 which has four
positions, marked 0, 1, 2 and 3. In position 0, the
heating is switched off, whereas in position 3, the
heating is a maximum. When the heating pad temperature has reached the preset value for a given
rheostat setting, the heating pad will be switched off,
but will be switched on again when the temperature
has dropped to the lower limit for that particular
rheostat setting.
Co-driver's seat
The heating pad of the co-driver's seat is supplied
from fuse 12 via the same 29-pole connector as the
driver's seat. The heating pad is switched on and off
by thermostat 64 and is earthed via seat switch 121.
When a load is applied to the seat, the seat switch
will close and the heating pad can be switched on
and off by thermostat 64. This heating pad will thus
be operative only when a person is seated in the
co-driver's seat.
Saab900
LL4
electncally heated front seats with rheostat control for the driver's seat
17

and controls
22A
Fuse holder
housing
57
3-pole connector
two under the drivers seat
one under the co-driver's seat
59
2-pole connector
one under the co-drivers seat
60
under the centre console, near th.e ignition
switch
64
Heating pad with thermostat

in the seat cushion and backrest of the drb!~,
er's and co-driver's seats
88

on the fascia
98
10-pole connector
tothe leftofthe steering column, behind the
117
Earthing point
121

under the co-drivers seat, on the left-hand
side
1528

252

on the fascia
254
Temperature transmitter for the drivers seat

heating pad
in the driver's seat
Saab900
Electrically heated front seats with rheostat control for the driver's seat
Components
64,254
Saab900
252
225
226
Electric heatingfotthe rear window
EI
c heating for
e rear window
SE,FI,EU,GB,AU
+54
I
US,CA,JP,ME,FE
+30
I
I
I
11M
SF
VT 2.5
GR 1.5
+54
+15
+30
I
I
I
I
I
I
1231<
GN/VT 1.0
11M
VT 2.5
29122A
221 22A
210
SF
GR 1.5
29
123M
GN/VT 1.0
RD 2.5
J22A
210
RD 2.5
214
8L 0.75
48
128 SV 0.75
215
128
215
SV 0.75
21<lA
SY 0.75 SV 0.75
8l 0.75
GB,AU
128
sv
SE,FI,EU
FE
128
0.75
US,CA
JP,ME
113
128
sv
SV 0.75
128
0.75
SV 0.75
~
3188
158
sv
211
Gl 2.5
26
dn
0.75
rh3
'"d
0
~
~
;;
152A
211
CL 2.5
211
Gl 2.5
/~
//.,----
15
2-0,4-0
A,-
15
3-0,5-0
2-0,4-0
OlSH
Saab900
roo
115
3-0,5-0
4Ble.ctricheating for the rear window
Operation
~ ..'._' :.:_ ':'
:".Jy
227
'"
The electric heating of the rear winqoWcan be

switched on and off by means of s;Witq,h116. (The
switch is spring-loaded and is c0I119Ine~;with a timedelay relay.) For a complete descri8tj~rr~t\the wiring
for the lighting ofthe switch oncarsfor:tIJErUS and CA
markets and 1989 model for JPi:see,al~othe section
entitled "Lighting systems; Lightipgcforcontrols US, CA and 1989 for JP".
'
The electric heating for the rear window will be operative when the ignition switch is in the drive position.
The switch is supplied fromfuse13','via the 29-pole

red connector 1528 (whemthedgnition switch is in
,0+"
the drive position).
When the switch is depressed, relay 113 will be
energised. Warning lamp4-7J in the combined instrument will light up.
Electric heater 115 for the rear window is supplied
from fuse 29, viatherelay contacts.
On the 3-0 and 5-0 models, the electric heating of
the rear window is earthed to the tailgate which, in
turn, is earthed to earthing point 9 (cable 211A
black).
Time-delay relay
On certain markets, relay 113 is replaced by a timedelay relay and spring-loaded switch 116.
After the switch has been depressed and the relay
has been energised, the time circuit in the relay will
be supplied (terminal 15) from fuse 22. After around
10 minutes, the relay will switch off the supply to the
electric heating for the rear window. If the switch is
depressed when the heating is on, the relay will trip.
When the electric heating for the rear window is
switched on, warning lamp 47J will be supplied from
. terminal E of the relay.
If the ignition is switched off while the electric heating for the rear window is switched on, the supply to
terminal 15 will be opened, and the re lay will immediately switch off the supply to the heating element for
the rear window.
US and CA markets
The time-delay relay also controls the heating of the
rear-view mirrors.
Saab900
1.
Check fuses 13 and 29 and check that the supply to them is live. (On certain markets, also
fuse 22.)
2.
Checkthatthe supply to the switch and terminal

30 of the relay is live.
3.
Check the relay: Press the switch'and Check that

the supply to the electric heating for the rear
window is live.
4.

earth connections.
228
Electric heating for therearwiTl')goW
. locations of components
.3
'17

. and controls
.. 22A '.' Fuse holder

.... in the electrical distribution box, in the engine compartment, on the left-hand wheel
.. housing
47J
X~e~r.wi~doWheater warning lamp
.. incifle combined instrument on the instru-
< mentpanel
48'
.dg~~ettelighter
on the faScia
573.:pole connector
in the luggage compartment, at the lefthand alr outlet
59
2':POI~b~hnector
in theJluggage compartment,
hand airolltlet
113

heated rearwindow
inth.!3.~I!3.etr[gal(jistribution box in the engine C9!"rlPfll!t;rp!3nt, relay position C
115
Electriche9t~rfor the
116
Switchforthe:electrically heated rear window

..
rear window
in the centrebfthe fascia
Saab900
152A
1528
29-pole .whi~eJ911I1ector
29-pole redGOnn~~tor
in the eIeCtUG~IX~.i~t~ibution box in the engine compi:lItment';on'the left-hand wheel
housing.
The connector~are accessible from the interior of the ear
158
Negativedistriblltion terminal
159

housing
169
Switch, AC
on the fascia
207

one on each front door
3if3
~-,
Electric heating for the rear window
Components
22A
113
152A
1528
158
159
207
Saab-900
229
230
Electric heating for the rear window, Convertible
ch
ing for
e rear window,
Saab900
nve ble
ElectriRV8~,~~ingifor the rear window, Convertible
Operation
c .. ,,<.,:::.,?-_~-
__.-._.
231
fault-tracing hints
----co
The electric heating of the rearwiHa8~/can be

switched on and off by meansofsvvi~911'~1.6. (The
switch is spring-loaded and is c()rnbi'l~d~jtha timedelay relay.). For a complete d~S~~iptJ~fil~;~th~he wiring
for the lighting of the switch oncar~f~nirEl;US and CA
markets and 1989 model for JP'<"~~~;~LM!the section
entitled "Lighting systems,'UglitJngiifor controls US, CA and 1989 for J P " . "
The switch is supplied frornfYf~~3Jvia 29-pole red
connector 1528 (when the.'jgriitibn switch is in the
drive position).
..
When the switch iSdepr~~s~d,' relay 113 will be
energised. Warninglarnp:t.l.'7'Jin the combined instrument will be alight-Electric heater 115 for the
rear window will thenbe~qpplied from fuse 29, via
the relay contacts.
'.
The relay coil is earthed' (terminal 85 or 31 of timedelay relay) via mercury switch 279 which is open
when the top is down and is closed when the top is
up. The relay is thus always de-energised when the
top is down.
Time-delay relay
On certain markets, relay 113 has been replaced by a
time-delay relay and- spring-loaded switch 116.
After the switch has been depressed and the relay
has been energised, the time circuit in the relay will
be supplied (terminal 15) from fuse 22. After around
10 minutes, the relay will switch off the supply to the
electric heating for the rear window. If the switch is
depressed when the heating is on, the relay will trip.
When the electric heating for the rear window is
switched on, warning lamp 47J will be supplied from
terminal E of the relay.
If the ignition is switched off while the electric heating forthe rear window is switched on, the supply to
terminal 15 will be opened, and the relay will immediately trip the supply to the heating element for the
rear window.
US and CA markets
The time-delay relay also controls the heating of the

rear-view mirrors.
Saab900
The electric heating for the rear window will be operative when the ignition switch is in the drive position.
1.
Check fuses 13 and 29 and check that the supply to .them is live. (On cars for some markets,
also check fuse 22.)
2.
Check that the supply to the switch and terminal

30 of the relay is live.
3.
Check the relay: Press the switch and check that

the ~upply to the electric heating for the rear
window is live.
4.
Check that the mercury switch closes the circuit

when the top is raised.
5.
Check the connectors, oable harnesses and

earth connections.
232
Electric heatingforthe<rear wil7lQPw, Convertible
3
. 17

and controls
22A~YBe holder
. in/the electrical distribution box, in the engine compartment, on the left-hand wheel
.... <.~g.g~.ing
47J .~~~FWindOW heater warning lamp
:iQ;!Ve combined instrument on the instru.'Dtl")tp~nel
48
6r~~t~"tte.lighter
ontheJascia
59
2~pdlfcohnector
one in.theelectrical distribution box in the

engine. c()lT1partment, on the left-hand
wheel hOl1S\Qg.
one on the inside of the top, on the left-hand
side (Conyer1Ible)
60
in the luggage compartment, at the lefthand lid hinge, behind the trim
113
Relay/timedelay relay for the electrically

heated rearwindow
in the electriqal distribution box in the engine compartment, relay position C
115
Electric heater forthe rear window
116

.
in the centre ofth~fascia
152A
1528
29-pole white cdl"ll"l~ctor

in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment,on the left-hand wheel
housing. The ;connectors are accessible
159
housing
169
Switch, AC
on the fascia
207

279
Mercury switch for the electrically heated

rear window (Convertible)
on the top mounting on the left-hand side,
inside the top
Saab900
Electric heating for the rear window, Convertible
Components
47J
113
116
207
Saab900
279
233
Elecfricwindow'regulators
234
EI
+x
c windoWregul
rs
+54
I
I
I
I
11K
VT 2.5
300
RD 1.0
152A
"'"
" -_ _-"59"".o.A-"B"-R.,1.',"'5_--j>17<1------'5'-".9l!;lA"B""Re-1"'.5<---,
450 RD 1.5
'-
152B
T 1.
454 R
M89:SE,
FI.EU.GB.
ME,FE,AU
59
44A
GN 1.0
455
59
-"'S9"".B",B,,-R-"1.,,,S_-I> 21 ct---,S""9'!B...!B""R-,,",,.5,---,
455
SV/VT 1,5
454
'~f f",:MM"
M89: US.CA.JP
287
762 RO 1.5
...'"
,;
15
"
~.
'1'5+-~
7
17
. -
IZJ
ffi
~~
162
450A RD 1.5
450B RD 1.5
456A SV 1.5
4S6E SV 1.5
~;;1~'''c'b::
4SOC
58
1206 BR(VT 0.75
RD 1.5
E2
"'67G BR
0.75
467C BR
467F BR
"'""
3
468
GN 0.75
190A
491 GR 1.5
193
"!
"a:
a:
"
Ii!
i3
G;
""
"
~L.w";"""4--.....:!z.L!1!:L~1
G;
'"
""
492 BR 1.5
:'l
191A
(0.0.)
(0v)
crr=EJ
L2IB
crr=EJ
~
Saab900
468
GN 0.75
60
E,lectric window regulators
235
Operation
Automatic window regulator controls
All window regulators in the car can'be'e0perated by

means of switches in the centreconsole}between the
frorit seats. Under certain circumsta't1ces, the window regulator in each ofethelelr,9P8r~can also be
operated by means of a sWitchii:r~heGorresponding
door.
.
-Unlike the other switches, driver's door switch 162

has two positions for lowering the window. This
switch is also connected to time-delay relay 287.
i,,':" .' .
The supply is taken fro'mf.y~~1J, via 29-pole white

connector 152A, to the fi{i1owing sWitches on the
centre console:
Position 1: The window travels downwards as long as

the switch is kept depressed in this position. A positive voltage is supplied to motor 164 across pin
2 on the switch and across the relay contacts. The
motor will stop when the switch is released.
If switch 189 is closed, the rear window regulators

can also be operated from switches 190A in the
left-hand rear door and 191A in the right-hand rear
door.
Position 2: The wi ndow opens fu Ily even if the switch

is released after a brief instant.
The coil of relay 287 is now supplied with a positive
,voltage across pin 5 of the switch, and the relay is
energised. The motor is supplied across the closed
relay contacts (pin 15). The supply is maintained (for
approx. 6 seconds) by the time-delay function of the
relay until the window has been lowered fully, even if
the switch is released immediately. (The downward
travel of the window may be interrupted by setting the
switch to position 3, "Raise".)
If switch 189 is open, the switches in the rear doors

will be inoperative. The window regulators in the rear
doors can then only be operated by means of the
switches on the centre console. To open the window,
press the window symbol on the button.
Position 3: The window will travel upwards as long as

the switch is held depressed in this position. The
motor is suppUed across pin 7 on the switch and the
direction of rotation is reversed, causing the window
to be raised.
Switch 189, for switching in and out the window

regulators in the.fE1ar.doors
To switches 162 (driver's door), 163 (co-driver's
door), 190 (Ieff~handrear door) and 191 (righthand rear door).
As an example, if switch 190 (for the left-hand rear

door) on the centre console is depressed, one of the
two -pairs of contacts (depending on whether the
wi~dow is to be raised or lowered) will close. Current
will then flow to switch 190A in the left-hand rear
door, through the switch and to regUlator motor 193.
It then flows through the second pair of contacts of
the switch, back to the switch on the centre console
and to earth (117).
Fault-tracing hints
_The electric window regulators will be operative when
1.

live.
2.
Check that terminal 7 of switch 189 and terminals 3 and 6 of the other switches in the centre
console are live. (On 162, terminal 3 only.)
For a complete description o~ the wiring for the lighting of the switches on cars for the US, CA and JP
markets, see also the section entitled "Lighting systems, Lighting for controls - US, CA, JP".
The connector~. (59) marked SE, FI, EU, GB, ME, FE
and AU: in the diagram are used for adjusting the
operation of the system to suit RHD or LHD cars. This
also applies to cars for Japan.
If the window regulators in the rear doors cannot

be operated from the corresponding switches in
the rear doors, check that current flows from
switch 189 to terminals 3 and 6 of these
switches as well.
3.
Check the switches by measuring at their terminals.
4.

earth connections.
Automatic window regulator,CO&:l!l'Ols

Check the automatic window regUlator:' controls as
follows: Set switch 16~to position 2,aMc:hE1ck that
the supply to pin 4 on the relay is live. Pin 1 should be ,_
earthed. Check thatpin~)Clnd pin 15 oHhe relay,~r~>
live.
-'
"
Saab900
236
Electric window r~gulators
17
~tra rheostat for the lighting of switches

and controls
22A
Fuse holder
.......
in the electrical distribution}Wx, in the engine compartment, on the left-hand wheel
housing
57
"
190

regulator
190A

regulator
191

regulator
191A

regulator
193
Motor for left-hand rear electric window reg-

ulator
194
Motor for right-hand rear electric windo

regulator
287
Relay for automatic control of window regulators

under the back seqt, on the left-hand side
3-pole connector
one behind the trim, at thecbr~~spbndingB
pillar
.
58
12-pole connector
on the angle bracket, under the fascia to the
left of the steering column
59
2-pole connector
one in the engine compartment,~tthe upper hinge of the left-hand front dqor, behind
the electrical distribution box
one in the engine compartmehtat the upper hinge of the right-hand front door
two under the centre console, between the
front seats (1989 model)
60
one under the centre console, between the
front seats
one behind the trim, at the corresponding B
pillar
117
Earthing point
152A
152B

162
Switch for driver's doorelectricwindow regulator

163

regulator
164
Motor for left-hand front electric window

regula{orin the left-hand front door
165
Motor" for right-hand front electric window

regulator
in the right-hand front door
189

Saab900
Electric window regulators
237
Components
162
163
189
190
191
190A
191A
164,165,193,194
Saab900
c2.=;87=--
----l
238
Electric window regulators, Convertible
c window regulators,
EI
+x
I
I
+54
+54
I"
nve ble
IVT 2.5
300
RO 1.0
LA
rh'"
3
M89:SE,
152B
455
5V/VT 2.5
(M89: US.CA.JP.M90)
~
~%
" " ")
~g
w
c;::~
WW
u)
(l)u..
FI,EU,GB,
FE,AU
:::>::;;
M89:SE,
FI,EU,GB,
44A
CN 1.0
::;;
453A
BL/VT 2.5
452A
GL/RD 2.5
453
8L/VT 2.5
452
GL/RD 2.5
287
<i.
'-'
:::>
762 RD 2.5
164
'> '> '>

'" '" '"
000
765
CL 0.75
763
SV 2.5
""
"" ........
'" '"
<0
162
on
"0
~
0
>
>
'"
'"CD
'"'"
lD
<0
'"
450A RD 1.5
.~
.-I.55C
SV 2.5
455A SV 2.5
>
'"
lD
456 SV 1.5
456G
SV 1.5
467
BR/VT 0.75
467B BR VT 0.75
467C BR
467D BR VT 0.75
193
446 GN
D 1.5
447 GN
T 1.5
Saab900
E.1~9!ric window regulators, Convertible
239
Operation
The window regulators in the car can be operated by

means of switches in the centre console between the
front seats.
'
Unlike the other switches, driver's door switch 162

has two positions for lowering the window. This
switch is also connected to time-delay relay 287.
The supply is taken from fuse 11'ViCl/V/hite 29-pole

connector 152A, to the following sW,itches:
Position 1: The window travels downwards as long as

the switch is kept depressed in this position.
A positive voltage is supplied to motor 164 across pin
2 on the switch and across the relaycontacts. The
motor will stop when the switch is released:
" 162 in the driver's door

163 in the co-driver's door
The following switches aresl.Jpplied from fuse 2 via
2-pole connector 59:
190 (left-hand side window)
191 (right-hand side window)
To open the window, press the window symbol on the
button.
As an example, if switch 190 (for the left-hand rear
door) is depressed, one of the two pairs of contacts
(depending on whether the window is to be raised or
lowered) will close. Current will then flow to regulator
motor 193.. It then flows through the second pair of
contacts of the switch, and to earth (117).
For a complete description ofthe wiring for the lighting of the switch on cars for the US and CA markets
and 1989 model for JP, see also the section entitled
"Lighting systems, Lighting for controls - US, CA and
1989 for JP".
Position 2: The window opens fully even if the switch

is released after a brief instant.
The coil of relay 287 is now supplied with a positive
voltage across pin 5 of the switch, and the relay is
energised. The motor is supplied across the closed
relay contacts (pin 15). The supply is maintained (for
approx. 6 seconds) by the time-delay function of the
relay until the window has been lowered fully, even if
the switch is released iml11ediately. (The downward
travel ofthe window may be interrupted by setti ng the
switch to position 3, "Raise".)
Position 3: The window will travel upwards as long as
the switch is held depressed in this position.
The motor is supplied across pin 7 on the switch and
the direction of rotation is'reversed, causing the window to be raised.
The electric window regulators will be operative when
Right-hand drive cars

1989 models
1.
The connectors (59) marked SE, FI, EU, GB, FE, AU in

the diagram are used for adjusting the operation of
the system to suit RHO or LHO cars. This also applies
to cars for Japan.

to them is live.
2.
Check that terminals 3 and 6 of the switches in

the centre console are live. (On 162, terminal 3
only.)
1990 models
3.
On right-hand drive cars, items 454 and 455 on relay

287 change places with items 453 and 452 on
switch 163.
Check the switches by measuring at their terminals.
4.

earth connections.

Check the automatic window regulator controls as
follows: Set switch 162 to position 2 and check that
the supply to pin 4 on the relay is live. Pin 1 should be
earthed. Check that pin 3 and pin 15 on the relay are
live.
Saab900
240
Electric window regulators, Convertible
17

and controls
22A
Fuse holder
housing
58
12-pole connector
on the angle bracket, under the fascia to the
left of the steering column
59
2-pole connector
one in the engine compartment, at the upper hinge of the left-hand front door, behind
one in the engine compartment, at the upper hinge of the right-hand front door
wheel housing
two under the centre console between the
front seats (1989 model)
60
under the centre console, between the front
seats
117
Earthing point
152A
1528

housing.' The connectors are accessible
162

between the front seats, onthe centre console
163

regulator
164
Motor
electric window regulator
"'_
in the left-hand door
165
Motor for right-hand electric window regulator

in the right-hand door
190
Switch for left-hand side-window electric

regulator
191
Switch for right-hand side-window electric

regulator
Saab900
193
Motor for left-hand side-window electric regulator

on the left-hand side, at the rear
194
Motor for right-hand side-window electric

regulator
on the right-hand side, at the rear
287
Relay for automatic control of window regulators

back seat, relay position A
EI~~~rlc window
regulators, Convertible
241
Components
1S2
16:3
100
191
lOr:::=! 1Ic:::J 6c:::J .. c:::J 2 c::J
st=:l7c:::::3 sc=:J Jc:::J lc:::l
164,165,193;194
Saab900
287
242
Electrically operated rear.:.viewmirrors
cally 0
Ele
rear-view mirrors
III
III
+54
I
I
11E
VT 2.5
310
VL/vT 0.75
I
I
I
~--~
0----{)
L-o
310 VL/VT 0.75
::r.r1
4
.....
f-
>
U')
124
.....
f-
<:
0::
Cl
Z
Cl
to
.....
.....
>
0::
Cl
to
.....
;;;
~I
;;;
I~I
~I
6l
I[)
.....
f-
>
0::
Cl
to
.....
...
;;;
I~I
~I
>
>.
..J
If)
rt7 3
.....
Cl
I~I
.....
Cl
f-
.....
Z
Cl
>
(/)
.....
0::
n
1*1
U')
f-
t:>
to
;;;
'"
<:
I[)
318
SV
.....
>
/'
I~I. T~123
c:i
.....
'"
U')
I[)
318
SV 0.75
107
sv
1
...
I:tl
1~1123
107
sv
rh
I-
>
(/)
BR
roll
<:z
'"
I~I
U')
'"
0::
;;;
60~ ~ r~60
rtT 158
a::
t:>
(J)
f-
f-
..J
1~1123
.g;
..J
f-
c:i
>
~60
.....
c:i
U')
f-
t:>
U')
U')
.....
~1528
~;'.J
.-f-
'"n
113
87
<: <:
>
(/)
Z
Cl
;;;
(/)
320A
GL/VT 1.0
1~1123
I[)
~I
.....
c:i
>
... --.,
314
SV 0.75
-a
320B
GLjVT 1.0
<:
f-
U')
.....
320A
GL/VT 1.0
c:i
US,CA
I[)
U')
.....
98
:1528
Z
Cl
.....
'1[)
'--."
f-
I[)
SV 0.75
<:
~ ~
SV 0.75
5
) ;Sv;.75
3
19
125
~'
161
f-
MGQo JP
.....
SE,FI,EU,GB.
1"
7f-J
10
U')
U')
.....
U')
31
'US.CA.
20
,1-
SV 0.75
B 24
~---
L-o
<r-312 SV 0.75
.....
U')
U')
1
0----{)
(
a
311 VLlVT 0.75
U')
I
I
I
1528
>
f-
If)
BR
>
>
(/)
..J
a::
ro
126
207
207
'OISH 019
A
US,CA
Saab900
127
,
;
.c~l~~trically operated rear-view mirrors
243
Operation
Fault-tracing hints
Each of the outer rear-view mirrors [sf6perated by

means of a four-position switch.
.
The rear-view mirrors will be operativewhen the ignition switch is in. the drive position.
The two switches 124 (left) and 12SF@lt) are supplied from fu,se 8, via red 29-polec.onnector 152B.
1.
Check fuse 8 and ch~ck that the supply to it is

live.
Each rear-view mirror will turn iOt!}~direction in

which the switch lever is moved. Forhorizontal setting, only the mirror motof~8a~E)::l.Jsed. For vertical
setting, a solenoid is alspenergised, which causes
the motors to move the mirrors vertically instead of
horizonta lIy.
.
2.
Check that the supply to the corresponding

switch is live.
3.
By operating the switch, check thatthe supply to

the corresponding motor and to the solenoid is
live. The table shown in the "Operation" section
lists the cables that are live in each switch position.
4.

earth connections.
The following table lists the cables that are Iive/

earthed in each switch position:
Left-hand switch 124 and motor 126
Pos.
~
+ to motor
Motor to earth
+ to solenoid
316 grey-red
317 green-white
317 green-white 316 grey-red
t
t
317 green-white
316 grey-red
315 white
315 white
Right-hand switch 125 and motor 127

Pos.
~
+ to motor
Motor to earth
+ to solenoid
321 grey-red
320 green-white
t
t
320 green-white
321 grey-red
319 white
319 white
US and CA markets
Cars for these markets are equipped with electrically
heated rear-view mirrors 207, which are supplied via
the switch for the heating of the rear window.
Saab900
244
Electrically operated rear-view mirrors
3
161

207

10
Light switch
22A
Fuse holder
in the electrical distribution box, in the engine compartment, on the left~hand wheel.
housing
60
one in the engine compartment, at the upper hinge ofthe left-handfrontdoor, behind
the electrical distribution box .
one in the left-hand front door
one in the engine compartment,at the upper hinge of the right-hand front door
one in the right-hand front door
98
10-pole connector
fascia (behind the knee shield)
113
Relay/time-delay relay for the electrically

heated rear window
123
4-pole connector
124

on the fascia, to the left of the steering
column
125

.on the fascia, to the right of the steering
column
126

rear-view mirror
in the left-hand rear-view mirror
127
Motor for the right-hand eJectrically operated rear-view mirror

in the right-hand rear-view mirror
1528

158

housing
Saab900
J;t~qtrically operated rear-view mirrors
Components
JlCJlB81~S
113
~
124
125
'----------'
126
127
Saab900
201
245
246
Electrically operated. sunroof
sunroof
cally 0
+x
+54
I
I
11K
VT 2.5
If)
t1)
00:
OJ
(J)
<l:
(J)
&i
If)
&i
t1)
30D
RD 1.0
tY
1528
1
44A
GN 1.0
152A
If)
t1)
00:
OJ
(J)
SE,FI,EU,GB,ME,
ME,FE,AU,M90: JP
tY
<l:
(J)
&i
If)
&i
t1)
44D
GN 0.75
206
BRjVT 0.75
591C
BR 2.5
591
BR 2.5
592 SV 2.5
592A
SV 2.5
6
tffiffi
(0 D)
7
181
117
t1)
0
tY
C)
""
t1)
Q)
t1)
17
+ -
ROOF
t1)
Q)
t1)
US,CA,
M89: JP
l'
BRjVT 0,75
12
593 GN 0.75
59
182
Saab900
58
247
Operation
Fault-tracing hints
Switch 181 for the electrically operat~pi'~unroof is

supplied from fuse 11, via white29-~~1)connector
152A. To open the sunroof, depress the left-hand
downward arrow symbol on the s'Aiit<;h. ....
The sunroof will be operative when the ignition switch

is in the drive position.
Motor 182 is earthed via terrr1ina1~>~i~~d 8 on the

rocker-type switch. For a compret.ed~scription of the
wiring forthe lighting of switsh1810n cars forthe US
and CA markets and 198fl>lJ'1()9~lforJP, see also the
section entitled "Lightingsyt~ms,Lighting for controls - US, CA and 1989forJP'~.
Saab900
1.

live.
2.
Check that the supply to terminals 3 and 6 is

live.
3.
Close the switch and check that the supply to

the motor is live.
4.

earth connections.
248
17

and controls
22A
Fuse holder
housing
58
12-pole connector
the left of the steering column
59
2-pole connector
at the motor for the electrically operated
sunroof
60
one under the centre console, between the
front seats
117
Earthing point
between the ignition switch and the hand c
brake lever
152A
152B

181

182
Motor for the electrically operated sunroof

at the extreme rear of the luggage compartment, under the spare wheel hatch
Saab900
249
.Components
~--b
181
Saab900
182
250
Electrica Ily operated Gonvertible top
cally opera
:Convertible top
+x
+54
I
I
I
I
llL
300
VT 2.5
RD 1.0
152B
1
HA
GN 1.0
SE,FI,EU,GB,
~p
US,CA,
~
440
GN 0.75
206
BR/VT 0.75
~~l 0.75
592 SV 0.75
ffiiliJ+
117
206
BR/VT 0.75
595 GN 0.75
594 RD 0.75
593 GN 0.75
RD 16.0
700
VT 4.0
700A VT 4.0
700B VT 4.0
706 SV 4.0
707 SV 4.0
70lA RD 4.0
702A SV 4.0
70BA SV
T 0.75
015H 010
./
(/
Saab900
....---- __..
;(~~lectricaHy operated Convertible top
Operation
~:!Cii~(~~t(!;!;!}.Y
251
Fault-tracing hints
\
.. '/,;!'
Two hydraulic cylinder? actuated bY;QiWfr~manelectric-motor driven hydraulic pumpare:U$~dfor raising
and lowering the top.
/'
Switch 181 for operating the!t(')l?;!is!~9Bplied from

fuse 12 via red 29-pole conl1~.ctQr.!5:2Bi:lnd10-pole
connector 98.
.
When the top is being IQI,ver~(H!611rrentflowsfrom pin
2 on the switch to relaY2'T~;!~!JTBD!isenergised.The
relay coil is earthed9:9~9~~I{~~ltcl\ 43 for the handbrake warning lamp,':gn91t~~~'{~9!p;dbrake must therefore be applied beforelhel()p Can be operated.
The top can be operated when the ignition switch is in

the drive position and the handbrake is applied.
1.

live.
2.
Check that the relays for raising and lowering

the top perform correctly.
3.
Check that the relays are energised at terminal

87 and that the hydraulic pump motor is energised when the switch is actuated.
4.

earth connections.
Motor 273 of the hydraylispymp (P) is now supplied

across the relaycol'lt~8ts'fr<)rnbattery1 and fuse 290
(25 A). The motor is eartlledthrough the second relay
(277) which is de~enefgised.
To raise the top, the direction of rotation ofthe motor
is reversed, since relay277 is energised instead, and
relay 278 is de-energised.
For a complete description ofthe wiring for the lighting of switch 181 on cars for the US and CA markets
and 1989 model for JP, see also the section entitled
"Lighting systems, Lighting for controls- US, CA and
1989 for JP".
Saab900
252
Electrically operated Convertible top
1
Battery
Earthing point onthe radiator cross-member
17

and controls
22A
Fuse holder
housing
43
Handbrake switch
under the plastic cover at the handbrake
lever
58
12-pole connector
the left of the steering column
59
2-pole connector
at the motor for the top
60
front seats
75
Distribution block
in the engine compartment, on the side of
the right-hand wheel housing
98
10-pole connector
column
117
Earthing point
152B

181
Switch for the electrically operated top

between the seats, on the the centre console
211
273
Motor for the hydraulic pump

277
Relay for raising the top

back seat, relay position C
278
Relay for lowering the top

in the elactrical distribution box under the
back seat, relay position D "
290
Fuse for the top

in the engine compartment, on the righthand side (at distribution block 75)
Saab900
Electrically operated Convertible top
Components
43
277
Saab900
181
253
254
Central locking
Cen I locking
+30
I SK
GR 2.S
Sf.! GR 1.5
175
152A
500 GN 1.0
500 GN 1.0
q...:~~~'--------14
504A
BR VT 1.0
,---------,18,
11
10
">
19
"'on
23
--'
504A BR VT 1.0
505A VL 1.0
508 GN VT 1.0
509 GL 1.0
RHD
57R
:3
1-0
>...;
z--'
183
57
501 BR 1.0
57R
,---"':=':-=--""-1:<>30\--'='--"'-'---""'--103
I-
0::
<D
--'
aon
'"on
>
V>
""
<DO>
00
on on
"
"
>
on
SV
>
184
10
501 SV 1.0
24
/~------------::---:-:----------Saab 900
Central locking
255
Operation
fault-tracing hints
The central locking system of the car locks or unlocks

all doors and the luggage compartmentlidwherithe
key is turned in the lock of the driver's door.
1.

live.
2.
Check that the supply to terminal 4 of control

unit 175 is live.
3;
Check that pin 7 of the control unit is live when

the doors are being unlocked and that pin 8 is
live.Whenthedoors are being locked.
Terminal 4 of control unit 175 for the ceHtfallocking

system is continuously supplied frornfl,.l~e 24; via
white 29-pole connector 152A. "WeAsontrql. unit is
controlled by key switch 183 in.tb$drivE;lr's door.
When the driver's db?:r;.i~/;loc~El~;terrninal 1 of the
control unit will be earthedviaeartning point 117.
Current will then flow from output 8. All central locking motors (which are connected in parallel) will now
be energised for approx. 1 second and the doors will
be locked. The motors are earthed through pin 7 of
the control unit, and on from terminal 3 to earthing
point 117.
When the driver's door is unlocked, terminal 20fthe
control. unit will instead be earthed across the key
switch. The motors will now be energised from pin 7
instead, and will be earthed across pin 8 of the
control unit (for approx. 1 second), causing the locks
to open.
On right-hand drive cars, the key switch is connected
to connector 57R, and motor 184 for the co-driver's
door lock is connected to connector 59R.
Saab900
~,.-
... :.:, ....
: -' ...-
. .-. c.:.-:- .'.
NotethatterlTli9~1~;7and8 are. only energised

for around one se.gondin conjunction with locking and unlocking. Measuremeritat these terminals must therefore be carried out when key
switch 183 is switching over.
4.

earth connections.
Note
On testing, the actuating motors may be connected
to terminals 7 and 8 of the control unit only. Do not
connect them to any other power supply sources.
Doing so may overload the motors and damage them.
256
CentraI locking
22A
Fuse holder
housing
57
3-pole connector
57R
3-pole connector
one in the engine compartment, at the upper hinge of the right-hand front door'
59
2-pole connector
one in the left-hand rear door
one iii the right-hand rear door
one in the luggage compartment lid, near
the motor for the luggage compartment lock
one in the luggage compartment, above the
, left-hand wheel housing
59R
2-pole connector
117
Earthing point
between thE:} ignition switch clOd the handbrake lever
123
4-pole connector
one in the left-hand B pillar
one in the right-hand B pillar
152A

175

183
Key switch for the driver's central. door lock

in the driver's door
184
Motor for the co-drivers door lock

in the co-drivers door, at the rear, under the
lock
185
Motor for the right-hand rear door lock

under the lock in the right-hand, rear door
186
Motor for the left-hand rear door lock

under the lock in the left-hand rear door
188
Motor for the tailgate lock

in the tailgate
Saab900
Central locking
Components
175
183
184
185
186
Saab900
188
257
258
Central I
king-
nvertlble
+30
15K
GR 2.5
51.1 GR 1.5
152A
500 GN 1.0
175
500 GN 1.0
4
8
504A
8R VT 1.0
~
11
10
--'
>
19
'"'"
0
23
504A BR VT 1.0
505A VL 1.0
508 GN VT 1.0
509 GL 1.0
RHD
57R
501 8R 1.0
57R
r---="'-'--=--'=----to3 OI-=-'--'=-'=--1o 3
>-
>
>-
'"
~
'"
>
z
57
2
CD
"o
'"
aJ
10
3
501 SV 1.0
24
>-
>
'"
lD
....
'5
~
:il _._~
._
M89
M90:LHD
.,.._:J
015H 016
A
159
....
>
'"
>
lD
'"
--'
'"
Saab900
SV
259
Operation
The central locking system of the car locks or uhlocks

the doors and the luggage compartment lid when the
key is turned.in the lock of the driver's door.
1.

live.
2.
Check that the supply to terminal 4 of control

unit 175 is live.
3.
Check that pin 7 of the co~trolunit is live when

the doors are being un 1oC;ked and that pin 8 is
Terminal 4 of control unit 175 for the ce'~t.~pII()Cking

system is continuously suppliedfrorni'f~:SE:)24;!\lia
29-pole white connector 152A.The'c;optrolunit is .
controlled by key switch 183 lin the driver's door..
live.whenthe.d~~rsiar;~~inglogked.
JsIOGked,1.~rfnil1aI10f
When the driver's door

the
control unit will be earthed via earthing point 117.
Current will then flow from output 8. Both central
locking motors will now be energised for approx. 1
second and the doors will be locked. The motors are
earthed through pin 7 of the control unit, and on from
terminal 3 to earthing point 117.
When the driver's door is unlocked, terminal 2 of the
control unit will instead be earthed across the key
switch. The motors will now be energised from pin 7
instead, and will be earthed across pin 8 of the
control unit (for approx. 1 second), causing the locks
to open.
Saab900
thatterrninaIS>~b~~~{~reBnIY
Note..
energised
for around one SeCOt1cl.incgnJY.J1cbonwith locking and unlocking. Measurement at these terminals must therefore be carried out when key
switch 183 is switching over.
4.

earth connections.
Note
On testing, the actuating motors may be connected
to terminals 7 and 8 of the control unit only. Do not
connect them to any other power supply sources.
Doing so may overload the motors and damage them.
260
Central locking'"'- Convertible
22A
Fuse holder
housing
3-pole connector
()nein the engine compartment, at the upH~~ftlinge ofthe left-hand front door; behind
;tfje~lectrical distribution box
57Rg~P8leconnector
89te.iR~~~ . right-hand front door
0Q~tinmEl.engine compartment, at the uppe~tling~of the right-hand front door
59
2-pole cOhnector
onE! in t~~(ri~ht-hand door
on~. inm~Elri~me.compartment, at the upperhin~eofth~right-hand
front door
one int~El Jl,!g~a.ge compartment lid, near
the motoLf%~~e luggage compartment lock
one in the luggage compartment, at the lefthand lid hinge, behind the trim
59R
2-pole conne.ctor
one in the engine compartment, at the upper hinge ofthe left-hand front door, behind
117
Earthing point
152A

175

under the fascia on the right-hand side, be"
hind the knee shield
183
Key switch for the driver's central door lock

at the rear of the drivers door
184

at the rear of the co-drivers door, under the
lock
188

in the tailgate
Saab900
Central locking
Components
~
~
W33
'U84
Saab900
Convertible
261
Cru ise ControFsystem
262
GR 1.0
11M"
l1E
123K
GN/VT 1.0
5C
+54
+54
+15
+30
I sy
Croise Co
VT 2.5
VT 2.5
"
i:3~52B
Ih~/VT 0.75
76
US,CA
M89:JP
1.190: (T)SE,FI,
k\l~G.B,Ml,F~~
'"
lD
g
'"
98
AU
M89:SE,F1,
EU,GB,ME,FE
1.190: {I,C)SE,
F1,EU,GB,
.J;tE{E,JP
614
SV 0.5
60
'"lD
u
0
0
60
60
'"d
MAN
.Mil.
~
060
~1i~Q,
'"
AUT '~
~~C
123
600B BR 1.0
BR
2:
USCA
"
AU'
1.189: JP
MB9: SE,F1,
133 1.190: (T) EU.GB,ME.FE
SE,F1.EU 1.190: (l,e)SE,
61SA
~~.dI;'
FI,EU.GB,
SV 0.75
ME.FE,JP,
SV 0.75
>
C/l
u
~
Il-~_~=~
TIP OFF
134
'"
0
'"
N
;2
613A
BlO.5
.-'
go 59
'"'"
N
;2
613A
BlO.5
-30
616
SV 0.75
r-_-"6"'1'-"'Gl'-"-'0..!..:75"--_-b 4
603A RO 1.0
RD 0.75
..J
lD
<0
;.._--'"u i"c'~Al
'"o
lD
'"
RO 0.5
/9
!
615
SV 1.0
I,'
j
233
152C
~~/VT 1.51..-,;.;;_;.;._-~24-"-60"'5'_'G"'R'__'_"1.0"___I>17
605 GR 1.0
18
604 OR 1.0
'
187
;'
59
131
~1~;jl~t;1
GlO.75:
."
'"
d
l.-~"t"""-'~~-l>19 603 RO 1.0
'"
Cl
'"
lD
N
'"
, . . - - - - "- - 30
30
9
Saab900
II
L-..,
""
I
I
."
603B"
RD 0.5
Cruise Control system

Op~.ration
The Cru ise' Control system consists of thetollowing
components:
~
Speed transmitter 132
Selector 14.1 for Cruise Control

Control unit 131 for Cruise Control
It
Vacuum pump 187 for Cruise Control (with vacuum

valve)
Vacuum controller
Pedal switches 133 and 134
The system is switched in by.means of selector 141.
When the latter is set to thebN position, the supply
will be taken to vacuum pump and vacuum valve 187.
The pump is earthed a'cross terminal 4 and valve
across terminal 7. In addition, a supply is taken from
the selector to terminal 9 of the control unit.
. When the SEfbutton is depressed, the supply circuit
will be closed to terminal 2 ofthe control unit and the
road speed ofthe car will be read by speed transmitter 132. The value will be fed into the memory ofthe
control unit and stored there.
Vacuum pump .187 generates a vacuum in the vacuum controller. This vacuum corresponds to the selected speed. The vacuum ~ontroller is connected by
chain to the acceleratorJinkage..
The speed of the car i~ sensed continuously and is
compared with the'value store.d in the memory. In the
event of a deviation, the vacuum pump/vacuum valve
}Nill increase or decrease the vacuum in the controller, thus resetting the accelerator linkage.
When terminal 4 is earthed, the vacuum pump will
run and the vacuum in the controller will increase,
thereby increasing the accelerator setting.
When terminal 7 is ea'rthed, the vacuum valve will be
closed and the vacuum in the system will be constant.
When terminals 4 and 7 are both open (not earthed),
the vacuum pump will be stationary and the valve will
be open. The vacuum in the controller will decrease,
thereby reducing the accelerator setting.
If the clutch or brake pedal is depressed, the circuit
to earth will be opened by tpe corresponding pedal
switCh (133 or 134). At the same time, a valve in the
pedal switches will open, so that the vacuum will be
lost. The pedal switches thus take both the electrical
system and the vacuur:n system out of operation.
.
263
The memory of the control unit is not erased, so the

selected speed can be resumed after the pedal has
been released. This is done by pressing the selector
to the RESUME position, thereby applying a supply
voltage to terminal 6 of the control unit.
A TIP position is provided between the ON and OFF
positions .of selector 141. When the selector is
pressed to this position, the supply to terminal 9 of
the control unit will be interrupted and the Cruise
Control system will be switched out (the vacuum
pump will stop and the vacuum valve will open).
When the selector is released, its return spring will
return it to the ON position, and the supply to terminal ~ of the control unit will be re-established.
To revert to the selected speed, the selector must be
pressed to the RESUME position, thereby applying a
supply voltage to terminal 6 of the control unit.
The information in the memory of the control unit is
erased when the ignition is switched off.
Cars with the Turbo engine and Cruise Control are
also equipped with vacuum switch 233 controlled
from the vacuum pump through a hose. When the
switch is closed, the control unit will reduce the
boost pressure to the basic value, thus providing
smoother control of the speed of the car.
Manual gearbox.
The Cruise Control system is supplied from fuse 8.
Automatic transmission
The Cruise Control system..is supplied from fuse 13
via the white 29-pole connector 152A. The system
will thus be inoperative until the selector lever is in
one of the drive positions.
US and CA markets
Cars for these markets are equipped with a CRUISE
warning lamp (:J-7U) which will light up when selector
141 is set to ON.
0 4f
.. ...
(\.-1 '-
The pedal switches are normally eartl)ed across the

brake light bulbs. If a fault should occur on one o,fthe
switches 133 or 134, the Cruise Control system will
be switched out by brake light switch 29, since a
positive voltage will be applied to terminal 3 of control unit 131.
Saab900'
Ort l -,
-
~l r~
(l
i.<
: "":kr......... 0
1
/1
I{
--r-
- /fl -I
'vI _-..
1'(
.--'
264
Fault-tracing hints
The Cruise Control system will be operative when the
ignition switch is in the drive position ..
OFF position
Note.
Fault tracing can be carried out withoutthe ignition
being set to drive.
.
1.
Check fuse 8 and check thatthesupplytoit is

live (MAN).
2.
Check fuse 13 and check thatthei$llP~ly tQitis

live. Also check switch 76 (AUT):/
3.
Check that the supply to termina:f:4;Bf$el~ctor

141 and to terminal 1 of control uhit131islive.
4.
Check the voltage at terminal 1 Bf$pe)cfttarlSmitter 132.
ON position
1.
Check the voltage at terminal 1 of the selector

and at tenninal 9 of the control unit.
2.
Check that the supply to vacuum pump 187 is

live.
SET position (spring-loaded)

1.
Check the voltage at terminal 2 of the selector

and terminal 2 of the control unit.
RESUME position (spring-loaded)
.;f
1.
Check the voltage at terminals 1 and 3 of the

selector and at terminals 6 and 9 of the control
unit.
2.
Checkthatthe supply to the vacuum pump is live

(cable 603 RD).
3.

earth connections.
Saab900
266
3
22A
Fuse holder
in the electrical distribution boX, in the engine compartment, on the left-hand wheel
housing
152A
1528
152C

housing. The connector, are accessible
159
housing
.
177

29
Brake light switch

at the brake pedal
30
Brake lamps
31

lever
179
Solenoid valve
at the extreme front of the engine 'compartment, above the radiator fan
47U
Cruise Control warning lamp

187
59
2-pole connector
under the fascia, on the left-hand side (behind the knee shield)
Vacuum pump for Cruise Control,.

in the engine compartment, forward
233
Vacuum switch for Cruise Control

wheel housing
256
Speed warning buzzer

behind the combined instrument
60
two on the left-hand side under the fascia,
at the 29-pole connector
two under the fascia, to the left of the steering column, behind the knee shield
,
76

transm.
'
lever
98
10-pole connector
fascia
123
4-pole connector
on the left-hand side, under the fascia (behind the knee shield)
,
129
Buzzer for coolant temperature

column, behind the knee shield
131
Control unit for Cruise Control

on the left-hand side under the fascia (behind the knee shield)
132
Speed transmitter
133
Clutch switch for Cruise Control

\ at the clutch pedal
134
Brake switch for Cruise~Control

at the brake pedal
141

in the direction indicator stalk switch ,on the
left-hand side of the steering column
Saab900
ot the
Components
22A
98'
Ba(MAN)
GOIA-UT)
152C
152B
152A
29
1.31
141
179
132,41U
133
-134
187
233
Sa.ab900
267
268
Anti-lock brake system (ASS)
ke
Anti-lock b
+
Bl 16;0
BL 25.0
211
stem (
RO 16.0
.10
75
152A
-"0-,,""-"""
. a~>--,-7-"GRo...=2'0"--t29
"---
7 CR 25
,. -_- t~_~,6.a._!'2f!A'-'C" RNT"'-'-" 0.7"'-5-_I>" ,9D'"

"._
30
~.-
<
60
/-C
87
F2A
L..:::....J
'3'
11G
VT 2.5
Mill)
I @47Q ~SL47F
I ~ (~47E I
I
IANril rmlSf1EU. I I rMl l
I
~ ~~II~I
I
i~US.CA. II
1
I
Ilill!!QJAlI- I I
I
L_''L __ !l...
..J L f!'.-...J
751
187
GRjVT 0.75 Vi 0.5
MilS
"~~,,,,)~-,-,-,a,,-,.7,,-5 _+-~~-I2..!5,7.QJ-".~/vT
+-
J,..l~
:152Ar
;!LQ:.L
r----r---nr9-'
RD/VT1.a
r ....
181'
~_ r;~
I '0 122A
~ L::...J
r;:;I
+15
13
~ VT 2.~> I'J~",~:
10
31
21
85
110
ci
66
195
GN/VT 0.5
0.75
~'----~-~~~-...12!UE!.t:fl....!ill~j7--18-----I'
~
751 aRM 0.75
.. 152C
'95
CNjvT 0.5
30A
30A
lil
29
.--
302
'"
r--
I~
87 85
~ /erA".~
292
In
257
<;>
747A
RO/VT 0.75
B+ 0+
..
..
302A
!l6
~30
293
187A
VT 0.75
-4
85 87
744 BL 0.75
745
731
Bl/VT 0.75
CL '.D
~
,-'
,;
in
7<2
~n~
.-
0.75
303A
on
.-
on""
,;
""~
~'"
>
"'<
00
~
12
r::::~
27
203
,;
ffi
"
~7
93(M89)
>
a
N
~3VT
lQ
in
.-
93(M89) 300:
~
297
,;
on
":on
a"
z>
t''''t.......;...-,
~~
523
1' - - - , '
105
294
5.'"
(o,Lr\5
1'J7
397
300
[~U.59
J'tr...{
7<6
sv 4.0
3038
.-
on
on
.,;
,;
on
,;
'"
ffi
ffi
a
a
00
.-
8 1
/
t.
62.
:-0
M90
"''''
~\.~-\'L
<
~
0- -6
'--~
4 1.co-iCO 2
35
'6
on
LU
22.
OI~
,;
,;
00
.-
Q)
291
'7
.-
00
.-
i<
26
'0
32
"
,;
ti7300
[~~59
f0
91.
~2 ~59
o
J
<?I.
~59
029
,;
~r.~---'
2 J
L::::===Qa@
@aa===::'J
298D
298C
Saab900
59
Operation
The Anti-lock Srake System (ASS) is controlled and
monitored electrically.
Only the electrical operation of the system is described in this manual, whereas the mechanical and
hydraulic components are discussed in the SerVice
Manual, Group 5:2 Anti-lock braking system (ASS).
Asensor at each wheel of the car supplies the control
unit with information on the speed of rotation of the
corresponding wheel. If any of the wheels should
tend to lock, the control unit will adjust the braking
effort, i.e. the hydraulic fluid pressure in the brake
lines, by means of electric control valves. The braking effort on the front wheels can be controlled individually, whereas that on the rear wheels is controlled jointly.
The brake unit, which is connected to the brake pedal, does not employ the vacuum in the engine intake
manifold for the servo action. The car is equipped
instead with an electrically driven hydraulic pump
which provides the servo action. The hydraulic fluid
pressure ,is maintained at the required value by
means of a pressure switch which controls the hydraulic pump motor.
Two warning lamps on the fascia are connected to the
brake system: the ASS warning lamp (ANTI LOCK) and
the usual brake warning lamp which is also incorpo. rated into brake systems without ASS. On cars for the
US, CA and UA market, the lamp is marked with the
text SRAKE FWID instead of the symbol.
. The components of the ASS system are supplied
across the fuses on relay and fuse board 302.
Control unit 291 is protected by the 10A fuse, and
main relay 292 and pump relay 293 are protected by
the two 30A fuses.
In addition, warning lamps 47Q and 47F are supplied
(+15) when the ignition switch is in the drive or start
position.
Power supply
When the ignition switch is turned to the drive position, pin 2 ofthe control unit will be energised (+54).
The supply from pin 8 of the control unit then energises main relay292. The unit isthussupplied (+30)
so that it can operate the control va Ives ofthe hydraulic unit.
.Operation of warning lamps when the car is started
. Thewarning lamps for the brake system light up every

time the engine is started. This allows the driver to
ch~BK that the bulb filaments are intact. (How the
warning lamps light up to indicate defects is covered
in the section entitled "Monitoring functions".)
When the ignition switch is turned to the start position, the +'54 supply to main relay 292 will be interrupted, the relay will be de-energised, and ASS
warning lamp 47Q will therefore be earthed at earthing point 63/93 via diode 303A and the relay conSaab900
269
tacts. Since the relay is alwaYsd 13-energised for at

least 2 seconds when the engill~Jsstarted,the lamp
will light up during this time.(I-1?~l3y~r,the lamp may
remain alight for up to 60 sec09.8~!.until the correct
hydraUlic pressure has bee9.re~c~~cl.) ..
When the igniti~n sWitChiSjtym~9,1~ttWdrive or start
position, brakewarnin~laITlR;,~7;.f;~lllTaJso light, up,
since it will be earthed Vi(;lJR1:;9J~~~Of1pr charging
warning lamp. Whentheen~ineha.sst~rted and the
alternator begins tocharge,(the Voltageatterminal
D+ of the alternator will increase, the diodes in the
earth circuit will cut off, and the warniog lamp will be
exti ngu ished.
HydraUlic pressure
The pressure in the hydraulic unit accumulator is

maintained at the correct value by a hydraUlic pump,
which is driven by motor 297 and is controlled by
pressure switch 294.
If the pressure is less than 140 bar when the engine
is started, contacts 4-1 will be closed. The coil of
pump relay 293 is then earthed and motor 297 is
supplied across the relay contacts.
When the hydraulic pump has raised the pressure in
the accumulator to 180 bar, the contacts will open
and the motor wi II stop. If the pressure shou Id drop to
140 bar while the car is travelling, the contactswill
again close and the pump will start. The pump requires 10 - 15 seconds to raise the pressure from
140 bar to 180 bar.
fault tracing
The ASS system tester shoulcl be used for fault tracing in the ASS system. This tester carries out measurements on the entire ASS system automatically,
in accordance with a program stored in the tester.
Most ofthe measurements are taken while the car is
travelling. Detailecl fault-tracing instructions are included in the manual supplied with the tester.
In exceptional cases, conventional measuring instruments may be used for fault tracing, and the table
below includes resistance values for valve coils, etc.
and values for the output voltage from the wheel
sensors.
Remarks
CQmponent
Value
298 Wheel sensors
800 - 1400 ohm

at least 0.1 V AC vaJuewhen the wheel is
rotating at 1 rev/s
2 - 5 ohm
IFL, IFR, IR
5 - 7 ohm
OFL, OFR, OR
3 - 5 ohm
295 Master valve

296 Inlet valves
296 Outlet valves
299 Brake fluid level sensor
10 ohm
Contacts 1- 2
Contacts 3 - 4
1 ohm
contacts closed, float

in bottom position
contacts closed, float
in the top position
Test equipment
ASS system tester, part No. 89 96 514.
270
Control unit 291

Control unit 291 continually receives information on
the speed of rotation ofthe wheels from the following
four wheel sensors:
298A
298B
298C
2980
left-hand front
right-hand front
left-hand rear
right-hand rear
On the basis of the speed values obtained from the

sensors, the contrpl unit then controls the braking
effort on the wheefs via the six hydraulic valves 296
in the hydraulic unit. The front-wheel brakes are controlled indiVidually, whereas the brakes of the rear
wheels are controlled jointly. One inlet valve and one
outlet valve is provided for each function.
Left-hand front wheel
IFL
inlet valve
OFL
outlet valve
Right-hand front wheel
IFR
inlet valve
OFR
outlet valve
Rear wheels (common cirCUit)
IR
inlet valve
OR
outlet valve
In the de-energised condition, the inlet valves are
open and the outlet valves are closed.
When the ABS system is in operation, master valve
295 will be energised and is open.
Saab900
272
Power supply, hydraulic pressure

and monitoring functions
RD 16.0
+15
I
I
""'-'
<>
'"
o
.,;
o
""
OJ
131
RD/VT 1.0
".
"
rt'152A
L~
195
GN/VT 0.5
~
30A
"";;:;
30A
[}OA
29
292
""
59
".
86
I~~
30
302
""
'"
"
";"257
"'"
.--
"'"
299
30
~~
293
'"
o
744 BL 0.75
~~~'~~il~~~C
>-
>
"
745
GL 4.0
>
1Il
"'"0
~n~
303A
"
~...:
>-
~'-'
~.J
>
N
""'
".
z>
.J
CD
a:
",0
_N
OJ",
N_
1'1'
1'1'
'"~
".
".
I'
93(MS9)
'"
".
I'
I'
F----~-l
fj'7
d~:]j
300
397
"'"0
'"0
""CD
!D
"''"
0>
0>
0>
I'
14 32
>
1Il
-+__---,
.'.2.(~2)
'-'
<>
'"o
I'
105
ri7
'"0 '"0
'-'1Il
8 1
... 745B SV 0.75

74.3 SV 0.75
3038
\\!/,/~_..::.99""S,--,S,-,-V--,0"".5,-__
.~.L1;j.9,2)
'-'
203
27
'"
"'"0
746
SV 4.0
I'
'""'"
ON
.3
-2
!D
93(M89)
")
/
'"
"'"0
4 140-180 2
Il-A;;~
~ f-) \ <.!:.J 294
M)-G
~7
0
N
752
GL/VT 0.75
I'
"~
93(MS9) 300 :
>
6..~.(r,19,9)
297
'"0
>
1Il
731
BL/VT 0.75
'"
r;
"'"0
742
l87A
VT 0.75
85 87
86
D+
>-
.,;
a
747A
RD/VT 0.75
Y+
B
'"o
>
'\
0
.,;
a
a:
302A
10
26
257
224
291
624
523
35
16
17
11
33
15
34
18
015H 007
D
Saab 900

Operation
273
Summary of Indications provided by the warning

lamps:
For particulars of the operation of the lamps during

starting, see page 269.
Brake fluid warning lamp lights up

Brake warning lamp
Brake warning lamp 4 7Fwililight up under the following circumstances:

if the level in the fluid reservoir reaches the MIN
mark on the reservoir. The lamp will then be
earthed at earthing' point 300 across contacts
4 - 3 of level sensor 299.
if the pressure in the accumulator of the hydraulic
unit should drop below 105 bar. The lamp will then
be earthed at earthing point 7 across contaets
2 - 1 of pressure switch 294. The contacts close
at 105 bar and open at 134 bar. (In this case, the
ASS warning lamp will also light up.)
Both pairs of contacts are open under normal
ating conditions.
Only the brake fluid level warning lamp will light up if

the brake fluid level has dropped slightly.
Normal braking and ABS control remain unaffected.
ASS warning lamp lights up
\ANill
oper~
Only the ASS warning lamp will light up if the electronic control unit should detect a fault in the ASS
system.
Cars without ASS are also equipped with the brake

warning lamp, although it is then used only for warning the driver that the level in the brake fluid reservoir
is too low.
The ordinary brakes operate normally but the ABS

system is disconnected.
ABS warning lamp
Brake fluid level warning and ASS warning

lamps light up simultaneously
The control unit monitors the performance ofthe ASS

system and, if a fault should occur, will light up ANTI
LOCK warning lamp 47Q. When the lamp is alight, the
ABS function is inoperative, and the brake system
will perform as a conventional brake system.
BRAKE
The following faults will cause pin 27 of control unit

291 to earth the lamp, thus lighting it up:
if the level in the brake fluid reservoir should drop
below the MIN marking on the reservoir. Contacts
1 - 2 of level sensor 299. will then open, thus
opening the circuit between pins 9 and 10 of the
control unit. Under normal operating conditions,
contacts 3 - 5 of pressure switch 294 are closed.
(In this case, the brake warning lamp wmalso light
up.)
ifthe pressure in the accumulator ofthe hydraulic
unit should drop below 105 bar. Contacts 3 - 5 of
pressure switch 294 will then open. Contacts 1-2
of level sensor 299 are closed if the level in the
brake fluid reservoir is correct. (The brake warning
lamp will also light up.)
if the signal level from one of the wheel sensors
298 is too low.
.
The follOWing faults will cause pin 8 ofthe control unit
to be de-energised. ASS system relay 292 will then
trip and the lamp will be earthed at earthing point
300 across the relay contacts and diode 303A.
FLUID
IANTil
~
If both lamps are alight, this indicates eitherthatthe

brake fluid in the reservoir has dropped further or that
the hydraulic pressure has dropped to below 105 bar
(1523 psi). This means that ASS control is inoperative and only reduced braking effort is available.
Joint activation due to low brake fluid level indicates
that brake fluid is leaking out of the brake system.
Stop Immediately and don't drive the car until repairs
have been carried out.
Joint activation due to low hydraulic pressure indicates that the servo action and the brake pressure at
the rear wheels are not proportional to the pedal
pressure. Finally, when the hydraulic pressure is 0
bar, there will be no servo action and no brake pressure to the rear wheels. The front-wheel brakes will
operate normally, although without power assistance.
open-circuit in the wiring (or in the connector) to

valve block 296, wheel sensors 298 or master
valve 295.
fault in the control unit.
Saab900
Saab900

1
Battery
Alternator
on the left-hand side of the engine
20
Ignition switch
seats
21
22AFuse holder
housing
47E
47F
Brake warning lamp
47K
SHIFT UP warning lamp

47Q
ABS warning lamp

47T
SRS Airbag warning lamp

57
3-pole connector
one at the right-hand front wheel sensor
one at the left-hand front wheel sensor
58
12-pole connector
onthe inside ofthe knee shield, to the left of
the steering column
59
2-pole connector
. at the electrical distribution box at the lefthand wheel housing
on the left-hand side, under the back seat
(1990 model)
in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment (CAB)
one in the engine compartment, at the hydraulic unit
one in the engine compartment, on the
right-hand side of the bulkhead partition
side
one under the back seat, on the right-hand
side
60
in the electrical distribution box, on the lefthand wheel housing (1990 model)
65
Earthing point at the back seat (1990

model)
75
Distribution block
93
98
10-pole connector
one (black) on the inside of the knee shield,
tothe left of the steering column
o!1eat the electronic unit
123

Saab900
275
4~j:@~/8()qn~:tQtRr..... ..:'>:x;
tVV()?~t:th~.eJ~ctmniqtJrl.it"9n!3.black(Ieft- .
haIJdfr()nrsen$gr)alld9.n~gt~~(right-hand
frollfsens6ff .' . .
.'
152A
29-pole white connector. "':

152B

152C . 29-pole black connector

158

in the electrical distribution box in the engine compartment, on the left;..hand wheel
housing
211
257
291
ABS control unit

on the left-hand side of the engine compartment, forward of the wheel housing (1989
model)
(1990 model)
292
ABS system relay

left-hand wheel housing, in the ABS electrical distribution box (1989 model)
right-hand wheel housing, in the ABS electrical distrit;>ution box (1990 model)
293
ABS pump relay

,
left-hand wheel housing, in the ABS electrical distribution box (1989 model)
right-hand wheel housing, in the ABS electrical distribution box (1990 model)
294
ABS pressure switch

in the engine compartment, on the hydraulic
unit
295
ABS master valve

in the engine compartment, on the hydraulic
unit
276
296
A8S valve block

334
Earthing point for the electronic unit and

test connector
adjacent to the electronic unit
297
A8S hydraulic pump motor

in the engine compartment, on the hydraUlic
unit
335
2-pole orange connector

the pins are short-circuited-when the connector is separated
298A
Wheel sensor, left-hand front

on the left-hand steering swivel member
336
Slip-ring contact
in the steering wheel
2988
Wheel sensor, right-hand front

on the right-hand steering swivel member
397
298C
Wheel sensor, left-hand rear

on the left-hand rear wheel hub
Diagnostic test socket, A8S

in the engine compartment, in the cable
harness at the hydraulic unit (1990 model)
400
Redundant earth for the airbag

on the left-hand wheel housing, accessible
from the interior
298D
Wheel sensor, right-hand rear

on the right-hand rear wheel hub
299
A8S brake fluid level sensor

in the engine compartment, on the brake
fluid reservoir of the hydraulic unit
300
Earthing point on the hydraulic unit

in the engine compartment, on the front of
the hydraulic unit
302
A8S electrical distribution box

left-hand wheel housing (1989 model)
right-hand wheel housing (1990 model)
302A
A8S fuse holder

left-hand wheel housing, in the A8S electrical distribution box (1989 model)
right-hand wheel housing, in the A8S electrical distribution box (1990 model)
303A
3038
A8S diode
A8S diode
left-hand wheel housing, in the A8S electrical distribution box (1989 model)
right-hand wheel housing, in the A8S electrical distribution box (1990 model)
330
10-pole airbag test connector

in the centre console, under the rubber bellows, forward of the gear lever
331
Electronic unit for the airbag

in the fascia, under the left-hand speaker
grille
332A
Sensor, left-hand
3328
Sensor, right-hand
333
Airbag
.','v.:';::
Saab900

Components
292
293
1r
302A
302 ["11990
303A
30313
21
22ft.
292
293
SO2/.\ J'
303A
60 M19S0
'i52:}"
'152C
'i5S
302 f\fi'1939
30313 .
297
291
397
Saab900
277
278
,1989 model
I!I
lVe s
+30
1
1
823
GR 2.5
823A RD 2.5
+54
I
820
VT 0.5
818
RD 2.5
11M
VT 2.5
822
RD 1.0
826
RD 2.5
827
VT 0.5
r - - - 311
135
VT 1.5
87A 87
-~
>
V>
>
'"
0
0:
;;;
0>
;;;
n7
65
86
1----/
on
on
>-
I-
>
V>
>
>
<Xl
30
8 10 SV/RD 0.5
>
V>
<Xl
0>
"'
n'7
86
86
65
30
312P
on
on
;;!
0:
23
25
'"
"'
800
VT 0.5
'""'
<Xl
-01-'" -
<.:>
0:
22
10
<.:>
rt---..;;..o.-+",-5V!.l.IIR",[D,,-",0.~75"-jO'=p-
0:
5-8~8/)1
312D
on
<.:>
on
85
\--G
'"
f-
'".,;
87A 87
N
z
.\
85 87 87A
'"d
;;;
"'
;;;
~-
135A
VT 1.0
1"-
i\
'" N'"
'"
85
P ,--
19
11
18
6
~_~
L
B12 $V IRD 0.5
i-=so
BL 0.5
803 BL/RD 0.75
SV IRD 0.75
~ ~~ ~:~;
831 SV 0.5
817 SV 0.5
GL 2.5
F-'--"
SV 0.75
=r=
GN 2.5
811 SV/VT 0.5
17
806 GLIRD 0.5
--YJ
I"--'-"
GL 0.5
GN 0.5
I"--'-"
808 sv 0.75
~I
svlvT 0.75
306
L
(M)
sv 0.5
~I
I
:'."
65
12
20
13
837 VT 0.5
~~H,",~~.~
208P
+30
I
1~2'5 ~
".,;
".,;
0:
'"
"''"
"
:ri
4
30
+54
I
I
11A
~[t122A
-~.
'-~ 1528
~~ "]
+54
. '.J
.@.)
156
BR 0.75
72
11llL
t1
--'-,L
JL
~ .c:::::::: 233
L,-----,-J
82 1
f'---<
140 GL 1.5
GN/VT 0.75
[ 60
2
142 GL 1.5
835
GL 0.5
.J_+,
I~
3 ,--
I rJ12J22A
dJ98
833
BR 0.5
15
31
[J
~~0~'75 n~~::':5;;
~9
L ~::
70
Saab 900
"'-'-"
0150 092
B
83S
GL 0.5
~T 0.75
r--"-h-
~~S
I'*'~~II----r;!:r-----r;!;r
~157
IJI
58 156
[6
65
"f'-----"f"-------L'f'
~~' 0.7s
157
BR'NT 0.75
L~5 ~28
~253
20
~~VT 0.75
G'ASTEN BELTS
I \ . :
<D
15
VT 2.5
<D
852 $V 0.5
1475
n:
V 0 75
3.
I~I
824
SV 1.0
n765
852 sv 0.5
60
SV 0.5
Operation
In certain cars, passive seat belts are provided forthe
front-seat occupants. The seat belt consists of a
motor-driven, two-point diagonal strap and a
manually fastened lap strap. The diagonal strap is
controlled and monitored by logic box 306.
Regardless of the position of the ignition switch, the
seat-belt system is always supplied (+30) across
fuses 310 (0 = driver's side and P = passenger's
side). The g sensor 309 is designed to isolate the
supply to the logic box in the event of a collision
(retardation of more than 0.7 g).
Driver's side
The upper anchor point of the diagonal strap (the
carriage on the guide rail) is moved between the A
and B pillars by motor 3080, which is controlled by
the logic box via relays 3110 and 3120. The travel of
the carriage is monitored by the two limit switches
3080:A and B. Limit switch Aopens a circuit and thus
provides information to the logic box that the carriage has reached the A pillar, and limit switch B
opens the circuit when the carriage is locked at the B
pillar.
When the door is opened from the outside, the carriage is in the forward position atthe Apillar. After the
door has been closed, i.e. door switch 2080 is open
and ignition switch 20 is in the drive or start position,
the coil of relay 3110 will be earthed via pin 23 in
logic box 306. The relay is energised and one pole of
the motor is supplied via the relay contacts, while the
other pole is earthed via relay 312D. When the carriage has reached the rear limit of its travel at the B
pillar, limit switch B will open. The logic box will then
open the earth circuit to the coil of relay 3110 and
the motor wi II stop.
When the ignition is switched off or the door is
opened, the logic box will energise (via pin 22) relay
3120. The direction of rotation of the motor will then
be reversed and the carriage will move towards the A
pillar. When the carriage has reached the A pillar,
limit switch A will open and the motor will stop.
When reverse gear is engaged, reversing light switch
31 will close and a signal will be applied to the logic
box. The driver can then open the door while the
ignition is switched on, without the seat-belt carriage
moving to the forward position.
The sensor-override solenoid 3070 in the belt reel
overrides the acceleration and tipping sensors for
the diagonal strap. The solenoid is energised while
the carriage is travelling between the two limits of its
travel, to enable the belt to be withdrawn freely. In
addition, the solenoid is energised for 30 seconds
after the door has been opened or closed, to enable
the seat to be adjusted.
When the solenoid is energised, the circuit will be
closed at the upper contacts in the diagram (earth at
pin 21) to provide the logic box with information that
Saab900
279
the solenoid has actually been energised. The lower

contacts sense whether or not the strap has been
wound up fully on the reel. The contacts are open
when the strap is on the reel (not connected to the
carriage).
COmdriver's side
The diagonal strap on the co-driver's side is driven in
the same way as that on the driver's side. (When relay
311P is energised, motor 308P moves the strap from
A pillar to B pillar, and moves it in the opposite
direction when 312P is energised.) Reel 307P and
door switch 208P have the same function as the
corresponding components on the driver's side.
When the co-driver's door is opened from the outside, the seat belt may be at either the A pillar or the
B pillar. Ifthe belt is atthe B pillar, itwill move to the A
pillar when the door is opened.
When the door is closed and the ignition is switched
on or if it is already switched on, the belt will move to
the B pillar, regardless of whether or not the seat is
occupied.
When the co-driver's door is opened, the carriage will
move to the A pillar, and will remain there when the
door is closed, unless the ignition is switched on.
Warning system
Warning lamp 47S for the passive seat belts is controlled by the logic box. The lamp will flash:
when the carriage on the driver's side is moving
from A pillar to B pillar
when the carriage on the co-driver's side moves
from the A pillar to the B pillar and if it takes more
than 8 seconds to reach the B pillar
if the carriage is locked at the B pillar and a fault
has occurred on the sensor-override function
e if the carriage is not securely locked at the B pillar
Lamp 47S will light up with a steady light:
if the diagonal strap has worked loose from the
carriage.
A flashing light has priority over a steady light.
The buzzer in relay 82 is actuated by the logic box
(earth at pin 20) and by the driver's side lap strap.
The buzzer will sound:
while the carriage for the diagonal strap is moving
from the A pillar or B pillar when the ignition is
switched on
for up to 8 seconds if the lap strap has not been
fastened, i.e. if seat-belt switch 70 is still closed.
Seat-belt warning lamp 72 is not affected by the
passive seat-belt system. Lamp 72 will light up for
4 - 8 s after the ignition has been switched on.
280
Check that the supply to the seat-belt system is live.
Fuse 3100 protects the logic box and the seat belt on
the driver's side, whereas fuse 310P protects the
seat belt on the co-driver's side. (The seat belt on the
driver's side will still operate, even if fuse 310P has
blown.) Also check fuses 5, 12 and 13.
As a general rule, always disconnect the connector
from the logic box before carrying out fault-tracing on
the system. Never take any measurements with the
logic box connected or on the pins of the logic box.
The logic box is regarded as an exchange unit, and
faUlt-tracing should startby determining whether the
fault is in the logic box or in other components,
connectors, etc. Most of the signals to and from the
logic box can be checked using the system diagram
and the table below. The diagram shows the belt
system with the carriages at the A pillars, the car
doors open and the lap straps not fastened.
1.
Ensure that the ignition is switched off and disconnect the connector from the logic box. Carry
out all measurements from the rear of the connector.
2.
Turn the ignition key to the drive positiori and

use a voltmeter to check that the following pins
in the connector are at battery voltage.
Pin
Remarks
11
12
18
19
22
23
25
reverse gear engaged

ignition switch in the drive position'
via the relay coil in 312P
via the relay coil in 311P
via the relay coil in 3120
via the relay coil in 3110
via g sensor 309
3.
Use an ohmmeter to measure between the following pins and earth.
Pin
Resistance,
ohm
Remarks
1
2
4
5
0
approx.13
approx.22
open circuit
0
0
approx.22
open circuit
0
0
0
open circuit
0
open circuit
0
belt in the carriage

bulb resistance
coil resistance
carriage at A pillar
6
7
8
9
10
13
14
17
20
21
24
co-driver's door open

coil resistance
carriage at A pillar
belt in the carriage

lap strap not fastened
driver's door open
Saab900
Saab900
282
3
20
Ignition switch
seats
22A
Fuse holder
in the electrical distribution box, in the en~
housing
31

under the centre console, to the left of the
selector lever
47S
Passive seat-belt warning lamp

57
3-pole connector
58
12-pole connector
59
2-pole connector
one in the engine compartment, at the top
hinge of the left-hand door
one in the engine compartment, at the top
hinge of the right-hand door
60
two in each door, at the door switch for the
passive seat-belt system, behind the trim
front seats
152A
152B

208D
Driver's door switch, passive seat-belt system

at the driver's door lock, behind the trim.
208P
Co-driver's door switch, passive seat-belt

system
at the co-driver's door lock, behind the trim.
306

307D
Belt reel for passive seat belts, driver's side

on the inboard side of the driver's seat.
307P
Belt reel for passive seat belts, co-driver's

side
on the inboard side of the co-driver's seat
308D

behind the driver's side B pillar, behind the
side trim.
308P

behind the co-driver's side B pillar, behind
the side trim.
309
g sensor for passive seat belts

under the back seat, on the left-hand side.
Fuse (25 A) for passive seat belts, driver's
side
Fuse (25 A) for passive seat belts, codriver's side
65
Earthing point at the back seat
310D
70

seat
310P
72

311D
76
Switch for raising the idling speed (auto.)

lever
311P
82

under the back seat, on t~e left-hand side
312D
98
10-pole connector
to the left of the steering column, below the
117
Earthing point
122
8-pole connector
one under the driver's seat, on the left-hand
side, under the carpet
one und~J the co-drivers seat, on the righthand side, under the carpet
side
one under the back seat, on the right-hand
side
Saab900
312P

side
side
.
Components
310P 310D
312P 3111' 3110 3120
122
58
22ft,
98
152,e.
152B
Saab900
283
284
Airbag
Ai
12A GR VT
22
0.75
30
86
152A
21
12
GR/VT 2.5
158
,..--A--..
11C
VT 2.5
~'
VT 2.5
59
"---v---"'
'"
l1C
VT 2.5
I-
'"
--'
'"
0
lD
0;
>
'"
0-
"'~
983
358
471
L
/t-
57
""RA-'--"o"'.5_-to 1 O J - - - - - - - - - - ,
SV
0.5
1L_...l-----~G=-L~O"'.5'_______I! 3 0 1 - - - - - - - - ,
912 OR
"'"0 "'"0 "'"0
"'"ci "'"ci "'"ci

'"z '"-' '"-'
c:> c:> m
"C;; '"
<0
0.5
0>
123
'" '"
0
'"0 ...'"
'"C;; 0
ci 6
0>
'"0 '"0
0>
l-
'"0
I-
--'
c:>
lD
0;
>
.....
C;;
<0
0>
--'
--'
c:>
0>
.eJ
'"0 '"0 '"6 6'"

'"c:> > Zc:> >0
I-
Vl
0>
C;;
'"
0>
C;;
'"
0>
'"ci '"6 '"ci '"ci

z
'" c:>'" > c:> >
I-
'"0
"'
'"ci
'"zc:> '"--'c:> '"m
>
'"
'"0; 0;'"
'"ci '"ci '"ci

0
I-
<0
C;;
>
I-
Vl
'"0;
0>
C;;
N
0>
C;;
'"
0>
'"0
I-
>
I-
I-
> > >

>
m
Vl
'" '"
" ...0; '"
c:>
0>
0>
2 3
'"'"
123
'"ci '"0 '"6

l-
I-
I-
> > >

>
Vl
m
'" '"'"
" ...0; '"
0
0>
0>
334
1
17 6
16
'" 334
''"m"
1819
11 20
7 14 5
334
331
015H 199
C
400
334
334
Saab 900
Airbag
285
Operation
Supply
The steering wheel pads of cars equipped with the

Airbag system are marked "SRS"(Supplemental Restraint System).
When the ignition switch is turned to the start or drive

position, the supply (+15) is taken across pin 3 in
connector 98 to pin 18 in electronic unit 331, thus
charging the capacitor pack. The capacitor pack
serves as a power supply reserve in the event of loss
ofsupplyatthe instant of collision. Atthesametime,
SRS lamp 47T in the combined instrument will be
energised from the + 54 supply, acrosS" fuse 7.
The system consists of two front sensors, an electronic unit, a safety sensor and a steering wheel pad
containing a gas generator and an airbag.
The system will be activated when at least one of the
two front sensors and the safety sensor are sUbjected
to a retardation force equivalentto a frontal collision
at around 20 km/h (12 mph).
The supply to the system is taken from distribution
terminal +15 when the ignition switch is in the start
or drive position, and from the +50 supply when the
ignition switch is in the start position.
front sensor
SRS lamp 4 ?Twill be earthed across pin 7 in connector 98, and pin 20 in electronic unit 331, and will
light up.
When the ignition switch is turned to the start position, pin 16 in electronic unit 331 will be energised
(+50), which will start the measurement cycle, etc.
in the diagnostic unit.
Activation of the airbag
The front sensor consists of a contact roller which is

held in the rest position by a spring. When the roller is
subjected to a force of at least 16 g, it wi II roll forward
and close the circuit. The front sensor must therefore
be" mounted facing the right way.
Electronic unit
The electronic unit contains the safety sensor, a capacitor pack, and the firing and monitoring circuits.
The electronic unit must also be mounted facing the
right way.
In a collision, the airbag and the seat-belt tensioners

will be activated if the front sensors and the safety
sensor in the electronic unit sense a retardation of at
least 16 g at the front sensor and at least 2 g at the
safety sensor.
The contacts in each sensor will then close and the
capacitor pack in the electronic unit will discharge,
applying a current pulse to the electric detonators in
the airbag.
"
earthing
The gas generator and the airbag are located in the

steering wheel pad.
Do not connect earth cables of other systems to the

mounting screws of the front sensors and the electronic unit, since this may cause disturbances in the
system and fault indications from the electronic u~!t.
Gas generator
fault codes
The gas generator consists of an aluminium case

with a centre compartment and two annular compartments.
If a fault should occur in the system, the SRS lamp

will flash when the ignition switch is in the drive
position. The fault codes stored in the memory of the
system can be read by connecting the SRS tester to
test connector 330.
Steering wheel pad (Alrbag module)
The centre compartment includes an electric detonator and an explosive charge, and is in communication with the inner annular compartment.
SRS warning lamp

The SRS warning lamp is located in the combined
instrument.
The SRS lamp will light up for around 6 seconds when
the ignition key is turned to the start ordrive position,
and will then go out if there are no faults in the
system.
Saab900
For a more detailed description of tests, fault codes

and fault tracing, see Group 8:6 of the Service
Manual.
286
Airbag
1
8attery
on the left-hand side ofthe engine compartment
20
Ignition switch
seats
22A
Fuse holder
housing
47E
47K
47T

SHIFT UP warning lamp
SRS Airbag warning lamp
57
3-pole connector
one at the right-hand front sensor
one at the left-hand front sensor
58
12-pole connector
onthe inside of the knee shield, to the left of
the steering column
59
2-pole connector (Convertible)

housing
75
Distribution block
battery
98
10-pole connector
one (black) on the inside ofthe knee shield,
to the left of the steering column
one at the electronic unit
123
4-pole connector
one at the electronic unit
one black (left-hand front sensor)
one grey (right-hand front sensor)
152A
1528

158

housing
211
330
10-pole airbag test connector

in the centre console, under the rubber bellows, forward of the gear lever
331
Electronic unit for the airbag

to the left, under the fascia
Saab900
332A
Sensor, left-hand
intheengine compartment, forward of the
It;rft-hand wheel housing
3328
Sensor, right-hand
in th~engine compartment, forward of the
right-hCindwheel housing
333
Airbag
334
Earthing point for the electronic unit and

test connector
adjacent to the electronic unit
335
2-pole orange connector

the pins are short-circuited when the connector is separated
336
Slip-ring contact
400
Redundant earth for the airbag

on the left-hand wheel housing, accessib
from the interior
Airbag
Components
332A
21
22A
59
'ISlA
15213
158
21
Saab900
287
288
Headlamp beam adjustment
Headlamp
ent
am adju
11 12
+54
12 11
I
110
VT 2.5
I
I
I
281
280
784
BL 0.75
2 3
3 2
786A GN 0.75
7868 GN 0.75
784B BL 0.75
784C 8L 0.75
786
GN 1.0
784A
BL 1.0
47
1
59
BR/VT 0.75
784A BL 1.0
9
282
786 GN 1.0
10
785A
SV 0.75
23
152C
785A
SV 0.75
785C SV 0.75
7858 SV 0.75
785
SV 0.75
Saab900
015H 190
289
Operation
Fault-tracing hints
Some models for certain markets are equipped with a

headlamp beam adjustment system. A switch on the
fascia enables the driver to change the vertical alignment of the headlamps, so that they will not dazzle
oncoming drivers in situations such as when the car
is heavily loaded.
The headlanip beam adjustment system will be operative when the ignition switch is in the drive position.

terminal 9 of switch 282 is supplied across fuse 10
and the black 29-pole connector 152C. When the
switch is in position 0, the headlamps will be in their
normal setting. When the switch is moved to position
1, electric motors (stepping motors) 280 and 281
will be energised and will rotate a number of revolutions, turning the adjusting screws to lower the headlamp setting. When the switch is moved to positions
2 and 3, the setting will be lowered further, in two
steps.
Similarly, the setting can be raised in steps, from 3 to
2, 1 and O.
Saab900

live.
Check that the supply to switch 282 is live.
By operating the switch, check that the' supply to

motors 280 and 281 is live.
290
Saab900
Earthingpoinfon the radiator cross-member
11
Full beam filament

in the left-hand and right-hand headlamps
12
Dipped beam filament

in the left-hand and right-hand head lamps
22A
Fuse holder
in the electrical distribution box, in the engine compartment
47
Combined instrument
on the fascia
152C

280
Headlamp beam adjustment motor

at the left-hand head lamp
281
Headlamp beam adjustment motor

at the right-hand head lamp
282
Switch for headlamp beam control

on the fascia, to the left of the steering
column
Components
280
28'1
Saab900
232
291
292
Radio instal'<:>TI,...-n
Radio In
+x
+30
I
I
I
I
30e
RD 2.5
5E
GR 1.5
,r,
SE, FI, EU, GB,
ME, FE, AU
M90: JP
M89: ..! p
4.37
RD 1.5
..J
350
GR 1.5
59
BR/VT 0.75
58
BR/VT 0.75
340
RD 1.5
350 GR 1.5
432 ON 0.5
58 BL VT 0.75
98
341 SV 1.5
. 343 SV 0.75
342 SV 1.5
117
60
347A GN 0.75
349A BL 0.75
346A BR 0.75
. 348A RD 0.75
60
266
LH F
437
RD 1.0
432
ON 0.5
60
LH R
RH R
266
266
60
60
RD
265
347 GN VT 0.75
349 BL VJ 0.75
346 BR VT 0.75
348 RD VT 0.75
015H 192
SV
Saab900
Radio installation
Operation
.Fault-traclng hints
Space bas been reserved in the fascia for a radio

(267). Cars for certain markets and certain models
are factrory-wired for the installation of a radio, and
are. factory-fitted with speakers and an electrically
operated aerial.
1.
Two 10-pole connectors 98, i.e. one for the power

supply and one for the speakers, are fitted in the
radio compartment in the fascia. A coaxial cable is
also run to the mounting point for the aerial, on the
left-hand rear wing.
Power supply.
The follOWing cables are connected to the upper 10pole connector 98 shown on the wiring diagram:
Grey (pin 1) - Positive supply via fuse 28, which is
supplied directly from the battery (regardless of the
position of the ignition switch).
Red (pin 4) - Positive supply via the ignition switch
and fuse 20. The radio is supplied when the ignition
switch is in the parked or drive positions.
Black (pin
5Y'- Earth.
Green (pin 6)-Forcontrol of the eleetricallyoperated

.aerial (265). The motor of the electrically operated
aerial is supplied via fuse 28.
Brown/white (pin 8) - Dial lighting. The supply is'
taken from the instrument lighting rheostat 16/17.
Speakers
The speaker connections are made via the lower
10-pole connector shown. in the diagram.
Left-hand front:
Green (pin 1) Brown (pin 2) +
Right-hand front:
Red (pin 3) +
Blue (pin 4) Left-hand rear:
Green/white (pin 5) Brown/white (pin 6) +
Right~hand rear:
Red/white (pin 7) +
Blue/white (pin 8) -
. Each spea~er is connected via single-pole connector

60.
Saab900
293
Check the supply to the radio and the earth

. connection.
2.
CheGk the connectors.
3.
Check the existing cable harness for open circuits and short circuits to earth.
The locations of the components are the same forthe
sections entitled "Radio installation" and "Radio installation {US, CAt as listed on pages 296 - 297.
294
Radio installation - US, CA
Radio in
lIation - US,
+30
+x
I
I
I
I
5E
30C
RD 2.5
GR 1.5
17
59
8R/VT 0.75
M90
340
RO 1.5
437
RO 1.0
350 GR 1.5
432 GN 0.5
588L
58
8R/VT 0.75
98
T 0.75
1
341 SV 1.5
343 SV 0.75
342 SV 1.5
98
117
6 1 4 8 5 9 10
267
1\
l.1..D.
loll
6 1 4 8 5 910
>1I,~1I01l, >11>11,
....
1< >
Z i r Olr
t>t> a:lD
l/)
[~~59
59
SV
349
o EEl
9Lf.7
sv
349
lim
OO~ mmrn0r nlID ts:2l
[>
\ II II) 1.1 I,
13
~35
59
~
........
[~ !;
........
I~ !;
Zir Zir 0-' 0-'
OlD OlD
IrZ IrO -,0-,

IDt> IDa: lDa:lD
a:lD a:lD
- + - + + - + \~ 125 6 783 4
r!-+-+-~~~~~~~,""*~~ GR
GR
- + -+ +-+
~
I'll' >11 0
01
1_2_5_6_ 7_8_3_4_ --,
350
015H 432
A
437
RD 1.0
432
GN 0.5
347A GN 0.75
349A 8L 0.75
60
60
60
266
LH F
LH R
RH R
266
266
60
347 GN VT 0.75
349 8L VT 0.75
346 8R VT 0.75
348 RD VT 0.75
Saab900
60
sv
sv
sv
295
Operation
Speakers
The fascia is fitted with a radio contact box.
The speaker connections are made via the lower

10-pole connector 98 shown in the diagram.
The following variants exist:

900 116:
A radio contact box with amplifier (349)
900 T16:
A radio contact box with amplifier (349).

This contact box is equipped with a
shielded cable with an 18-pole connector, for the connection of a CD player or
equalizer. The shielded cable is fitted
with two 13-pole connectors 351 (DIN
connectors). The CD player or equalizer
can be connected by inserting it into a
contact box located in the top compartment of the centre console.
In addition, the car is factory-wired, and speakers

and an electrically operated aerial are fitted, to facilitate the installation of a radio.
The radio contact box must be connected to the aeria I
cable and to two 10-pole connectors 98 (267), one
for the power supply and the other for the speakers.
The contact box with amplifier (349) is fitted with a
3A blade fuse to the right (for the electric aerial) and
a 15A blade fuse to the left (for the amplifier, equalizer and radio).
Power supply
The following cables are connected to the upper 10pole connector 98 shown on the wiring diagram:
Grey (pin 1) - Positive supply via fuse 28, which is
supplied directly from the battery (regardless of the
position of the ignition switch).
Red (pin 4) - Positive supply via the ignition switch
and fuse 20. The radio is supplied when the ignition
switch is inthe parked or drive position.
Black (pins 5, 9 and 10) - Earth.
Green (pin 6) - For control ofthe electrically operated
aerial (265). The motor of the electrically operated
aerial is supplied via fuse 28.
Brown/white (pin 8) - Dial lighting. The supply is
taken from the instrument lighting rheostat 17.
Saab900
Left-hand front:
Green (pin 1) Brown (pin 2) +
Right-hand front:
Red (pin 3) +
Blue (pin 4) Left-hand rear:
Green/white (pin 5) Brown/white (pin 6) +
Right-hand rear:
Red/white (pin 7) +
Blue/white (pin 8) Each speaker is connected via single-pole connector
60.
Faulttracing hints
1.
Check the supply to the radio and the earth

connection.
2.
Check the connectors.
3.
Check the existing cable harness for open circuits and short circuits to earth.
296
16

17

and controls
22A
Fuse holder
housing
59
2-pole connector for electrically-operated

aerial 265
on the left-hand rear wing (in the luggage
compartment)
60
Single-pole connector for speakers 266:

two under the speaker grille, on the lefthand side of the fascia
two under the speaker grille, on the righthand side of the fascia
two on the left-hand side of the luggage
compartment, behind the trim, at the parcel
shelf
two on the left-hand side, at the back seat,
behind the trim (Convertible)
two on the right-hand side of the luggage
compartment, behind the trim, at the parcel
shelf
two on the right-hand side at the back seat,
behind the trim (Convertible)
1
98
10-pole connector for the radio

two in the radio compartment on the fascia
(267) for connecting the radio
one to the left ofthe steering column, under
the knee shield
117
Earthing point
152A

265
Electrically operated aerial

in the luggage compartment, on the lefthand side, behind the trim
266
Speaker
fascia
back seat
267
Radio connector
one in the fascia, behind the rad.io panel
349
Radio contact box with amplifier

in the radio compartment on the fascia
Saab900
350
Contact box for CD player or equalizer

in the top compartment of the centre console
351
l~-p()le connector (DIN connector)

two in the fascia
Radio installatlon
- US,_ CA_ _
2_9_7
Components
-------
349016;\, T16i\)
350(T1oi\)
Saab900
298
Bl..Irgler alarm - US, CA and 1989 for JP
Bu ar alarm-
and 1989 for JP

13~r
.J
43 BL 0.75
45 GN 0.75
85(US,CA)
11/12
I
I
31
GL 1.5
I
I
1
~ I
10~ I
I
17
+x
+x
I
---l
+30
I
I
I
30C
RO 2.5
__
51<
678
RO 0.75
GR 2.5
275276
60
60
5M CR 1.5
478 GN 0.75
152A
E
40
RO 1.5
M89
L.}__
500
GN 1.0
-".'-"..!""-'~~__Ki
l-
M2Q
152A
3
z
44
GN 0.75
42
BL 0.75
175 4
171 SV 0.75
+54
I
I
0
'"....
~
'2
152A
<0
~>
42
Bt 0.75
.... '"
"''''
0
....
:;!
<00
30
170
SV 0.75
44
GN 0.75
54
54
167E
BRjSV 0.75
54
166 SV 0.75
L...----1I---------------------------,
d9
d9
14, 15
14
Saab900
Burgler alarm - US, CA and 1989 for JP
299
Operation
Cars delivered to ceitain markets, includingthe USA

market, have provision for the installation of a burglar alarm. A special cable harness and an 8~pole
connector (289) for connecting the burglar alarm
control unit are included.
1.
Check that the supply to connector 289 (terminals 1 and 5) is live.
2.
Check ON/OFF switch 288 for the movement detector.
3.
Check the door switches, luggage compartment

l.i~nt.~witCh and bonnet switch, and the correcspondingconnections to connector 289.
The control unit is supplied (+-39Yrfgrnfuse24

across the white 29-pole conn~Gt()r;:+5gt\, pifl.i300f
relay 151 and pin 1 of controLul1it?~~.regardlessof
the position of the ignitiq!1switqh,and'from pin 5
(+X) when the ignitionswitc.tiisin the parked, drive
or start position. On the 1990model, +X is protected
by fuse 20.
To prevent the burglar alarm from being set off, the
ignition key must be turned within a certain time after
a car door has been opened.
4.
ch~t~t~;eFonr~ctors,
cable harnesses and
earth Connections:
For fault-tracing hints on the parking lights, see the
section entitled "Parking lights".
The movement detector can be switched on and off by

means of ON/OFF switch 288 connected to pin 7 of
the control unit (earth/no earth).
If the burglar alarm is activated, the alarm will be set
off if one of the following contacts should close:
8
Door switches 54 connected to pin 8.
e Luggage compartment light switch 56, luggage

compartment lighting 55 or the HOOD switch,
which are connected to pin 6.
When the alarm is set off, the siren will be supplied
via pin 4, and the parking lights via'pin 3.
The parking lights are supplied via pin 20 of white
29-pole connector 152A, and include:
13
14
15
234
Parking lights (front)

Rear lights
Side marker lights (certain markets)
Note: The wiring varies from one market to the r:lext,

and between the 3-D/5-D and 2-D/4-D models (see
the section entitled "Parking lights").
Saab900'
117
For the locations of parking light components, see

the section entitled "Parking lights".
3
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
22A
Light switch
Full beam filament
in the left-hand and right-hand headlamps
in the left-hand and right-hand head lamps
Parking lights
. Rear lights, 2-D and 4-D
'
and the hand-
122
8-pole connector
under the backs,eat
151
Time-delay relay fb'fthe interior lighting

152A
1528

in the engine compartment,in the electrical
175

234
Side marker lights

275
Extra rheostat for tile lighting of switches

and controls
Connector for the burglar alarm siren

in the luggage compartment, behind the
276
Connector for the burglar alarm bonnet

switch
in the luggage compartment, behind the
288
Selector for the movement detector

on the centre console betwE~.en the front
seats
289
Connector for the burglar alarm control unit

under the back seat
Fuse holder
housing
at the front of each door frame
55

56
Luggage compartment light switch

3-D and 5-D: at the luggage compartment
lock
2-D and 4-D: in the luggage compartment,
at the left hinge of the luggage compartment lid.
58
12-pole connector
the left of the steering column (behind the
knee shield)
60
one for the siren, in the engine compartment, behind the right-hand wheel housing
one for the bonnet switch, in the engine
compartment, behind the right-hand headlamp
85
between~he.i~flition switch
brake lever

54
82
Earthingpqint
. Seat belt/ignition switch warning relay

under the back seat, o~ the left-hand side
Extra fog ,lamps
under the front bumper
Saab900
Burgler alarm - US, CA and 1989 for JP
Components
54
56
L..-
Saab900
---J
301
302
Burgleralarm,1S89rnodeICoh\Zertible
Bu
89m
ar alann,
el C6nve ble
+30
+30
+54
1
1
"ll
N
0:
'"
~
+X
",I
61
~I
'"
'"
0:
I-
>
0
0:
u
0
/'-
15
151
~
30
29
152A
7
GR 2.5
30
of>
20
-'
lD
0
....
....
316
880 8R 0.75
54
'"d
0Ff ON)
~
305
677 0.75
'"d
57A
03
r:::
02
01
;;
695A 8L 075
.
678C RO 0.75
6758 SV 0.75
OFf
288
316
678A RO 0.75
/'-
60
15
875A SV 0.75
'"d
-'
>
>
~
2
'"d
I-
>
'"
....
'"<0
lD
<0
:;;
12
10
289
OISO 011
Saab900
BurgJer alarm, 1989 model Convertible
303
Operation
FClult..tracing hints
The car is equipped with a burglar alarm Comprising a

control unit, movement detector, siren and transm itters (switches) in the hood (bonnet), doors and luggage compartment lid. For particulars of the operation of the control unit, Le. the activation times for
the alarm, the time during which the siren will sound
when the alarm is set off, etc. see the separate
instruction manual for the burglar alarm.
The control unit is supplied (+30) from fuse 24
across the white 29-pol e connector 152A, pin 4 of
the central locking control unit 175, pin 30 of relay
151 and pin 1 of control unit 289, regardless of the
position of the ignition switch, and from pin 9 (+X)
when the ignition switch is in the parked, drive or
start position.
Start by checking that the supply to the connector

(pins 1 and 9) at control unit 289. Then follow the
faUlt-tracing instructions in the accompanying installation instructions.
If the burglar alarm is activated (LED 305 flashes),

the alarm will be set off if movement detector 304 is
activated or if one of the following contacts should
close:
Door switches 54 connected to pin 3. (Time-delay
relay 151 for the interior lighting only affects the
activation time of about 15 s for the alarm.)
II) Luggage compa rtment light switch
56 or the bonnet switch, which are connected to pin 5.
When the alarm is set off, the siren will be supplied
via pin 6 and will sound.
The movement detector can be switched off by
means of ON/OFF switch 288 connected to pin 10
(contacts will close).
If one of the seat switches 314 or 315 is closed at the
same time as the ignition switch is in the parked,
drive or start position, LED 305 will be switched off.
A receiver for remotely controlled de-activation can
be connected to white connector 57A. A transm itter
designed to intiate an alarm in a portable receiver
can be connected to red connector 578.
Saab900
304
Burgler alarm, 1990 model
Bu
convertible
m el
ar alarm,
ble
27,89
28,90
<;>
<;>
r--- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- --'- --'- ---- ---- .J
+30
+30
I
I
GR 1.5
+x
20
5K
5M
GR 2.5
JOC
GR 1.5
RD 2.5
-'
'"
160A
GL1.0
~
....
""'
~G152A
~0
'" '"
"" '"
""'
"
'"
0
..J
82
r-,
....
~0
'" '"'"
"'"
"
m
117
"""
L_..1
"d'"
0
';:
175~
54
52
'"u
"~
6778
sv 0.75
g;
....
<: ~0
..J
'" '"
" "
<D
0>
SV 0.75
2~
117
'~,,:~'""~
R:
'"
'"0
'"
55
305
'"
>
"~
e.....-
lirnJ
59
'"
~ >"d zd'"
'"...u
" "'" "'"
16
<D
..J
'"'"
'"
'"
~159
"
10
11
'"0
'"0
..J
..J
r::
>
<D
8 15
11
"""'o
>
Ul
..J
<D
59[J
'"N
....
<D
>
Ul
:'-
'"d
'01~ :-:::::
I""
<D
~l
tOle-:
Ul
<D
Ul
680 8R 0.75
l'
....~~
',M-
189C SV 0.5
54
57",231
87~
f] '
..J
'--
I' ~
>
'"
30
85
2159
171
SV 0.75
161A
GL/RO 0.75
86
~G152A
----fl..
l~:sv
GL
'-
'"
:g
::::::::".. ~'I
'"
167 SV 0.75
GL 0.7:
398
275
1\1
'"'"
'""
I~
'1
160
GL 0.75
SV 0.75
""'
30r-
'"...
i'-
150A
VT 0.75
SV 0.5
..J
131d~
>
~'52A
27 :
500
GN 1.0
151
Ul
I, ~60
1
1
656
1 ... 2
+54
'----y----- '
152A: 9
[;~] ~58
'"N u'"
'" ~
"~
..J
"
12 3
'""
>
Ul
'"
<D
':"
""
5
56
289
r.1'
DISH 011
--- I
27
28
Saab900
Burgler alarm, 1990 model Convertible
305
Operation
Fault-tracing hints
The car is equipped with a burglar alarm comprising a

control unit, movement detector, siren and transmitters (switches) in the hood (bonnet),ddqrs and luggage compartment lid. For particulars of the operation of the control unit, Le. the activation times for
the alarm, the time during which the siren will sound
when the alarm is set off, etc.. see the separate
instruction manual for the burglar alarm.
Start by checking fuses 24 and 20 and that the

supply to the connector (pins 10 and 2) at control unit
289 is live. Then follow the fault-tracing instructions
in the accompanyinginstallation instructions.
The burglar alarm is supplied (+30) from fuse 24

across the white 29-poleconnector 152A, pin 4 of
the central locking control unit 175, pin 30 of relay
151 and pin 10 of control unit 289, and (+X) from
fuse 20 across the white connector 152A to pin 2 of
control unit 289.
If the burglar alarm is activated (LED 305 flashes),
the alarm will be set off if one of the following contacts should close:
Door switches 54 connected to pin 11. (Timedelay relay 151 for the interior lighting only affects
the activation time of about 15 s for the alarm.)
Luggage compartment light switch 56 or bonnet
switch 276, which are connected to pin 3.
When the alarm is set off, the siren 275 will be
supplied via pin 12 and will sound.
A receiver for remotely controlled de-activation can
be connected to connector 399.
Saab900
306
E3l.Jrgler alarm, 1990 model Convertible
152A
For the locations of parking light components, see

the section entitled "Parking lights".
15
- distributioD??J<>pn the left-hand wheel

housing. Th~wpr~ctor is accessible from
the interior ofttre.car.

175
Ignition switch (1989 model)

seats
Control unitforthecentral locking system

under the fasciaqnthe right-hand side, behind the knee shield
275
Fuse holder
housing
Burglar alarm siren

right-hand head lamp
276
Burglar alarm bonnet switch

under the bonnet, at the extreme front ofthe
wheel housing
53

on the centre console, between the front
seats
288
Burglar alarm switch

seats
54

at the front of each door pillar
289
Burglar alarm control unit

under the back seat
55

304
Movement detector
under the back seat, at the control unit
56

at the luggage compartment lock
305
LED for burglar alarm

on the fascia, in the left-hand speaker grille
57A
57B
570

3-pole green connector
under the back seat
313
Burglar alarm relay

back seat, relay position F
314
Driver's seat switch for the burglar alarm

under the driver's seat
315
Co-driver's seat switch for the burglar alarm

under the co-driver's seat
316
Diode for the burglar alarm
20
22A
58
29-P?leW~i~~connector
in th~~ngi9~ggrrpartment, in the electrical
12-pole connector
on the angle bracket, under the.fascia to the
left of the steering column (behind the knee
shield)
59
2-pole connector
one in the luggage compartment at the lefthand lid hinge, behind the trim
one for the siren, in the engine compartment, behind the right-hand headlamp
(1990 model)
60
one for the siren in the engine compartment, behind the right-hand head lamp
(1989 model)
two for the LEOs on 'the fascia, at the lefthand speaker grille
82

in the electrical distribution bux under the
back seat, relay position E
117
- Earthing point
151

in the electrical distribution bux under the
back seat, relay position B
.
.. .
Saab900
Burgler alarm, 1990 model Convertible
Components
f=".
~ oS ~
,.~
53
56
275
54
276
151
304
GJGJ
289
l.c1!. .g]=
0'7=1 7c:::J c::::l3c:::::J It:=l
/
313
Saab900
I
32
314,315
307
308
List of components
of com
nen
Numerical Index
1
Battery
Alternator
3
Starter motor
4
Ignition coil
5
6
Earthing point on the radiator cross-mem7
ber
Lighting relay
8
9
Light switch
10
Full beam filament
11
12
Parking lights
13
Rear lights
14
15
16
17
and controls
18
19
Ignition switch
20
21
22
22A
Fuse holder
22B Relay holder
Flasher relay
23
24 ;. Direction indicator stalk switch
25
26
27
28
Brake light switch
29
Brake lamps
30
31
Reversing lamps
32
Rear fog lights
33
34
35
Selector switch for the ventilation fan
36
Radiator fan motor
37
38
Recirculation valve motor, AC
39
Horn
40
Horn switch
41
42
Handbrake switch
43
'Oil pressure transmitter
44
45
46
47
Combined instrument
47A Fuel level gauge . . ' \
47B Fuel reserve warning lamp.
47C Coolant temperature gauge
47D Oil pressure warning lamp
47E Charging warning lamp
47F Brake warning lamp
Saab900
47G
47H
471
47J
47K
47M
47N
470
47P
47Q
47S
47T
47U
47V
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
82
83
85
Full beam warningJCimp

Right-hand direction indicator warning
lamp
Rear window heater warnitlg lamp
Shift-up warning lamp
Handbrake warning lamp
Choke warning lamp
ABS warning lamp
Warning lamp for passive seat belts
Airbag warning lamp (as from 1990)
Indicating lamp for Cruise Control
Warning lamp for headlamps switched on
Cigarette lighter
Clock
Roof lamp, centre
Roof lamp, front
3-pole connector
12-pole connector
2-pole connector
Washer motor
Heating pad
Earthing point, back seat
6-pole connector
Horn relay
Co-driver's seat switch for seat-belt warning lamp
Distribution block, positive supply from
b.attery
transm.
Start inhibitor switch, auto. transm.
Dim dipped beam relay (up to and inc!.
1989)
Vacuum switch
Dim dipped beam resistor (up to and inc!.
1989)
Relay for intermittent operation of the
windscreen wipers
Extra fog lamps
List of components
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
106
107
109
110
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145

Earthing point, left:-handwheel housing
member
Starting valve
Auxiliary air valve
10-pole connector
Diode, Lambda
Fuel feed pump
Fuel pump relay
Fuel pump
Hot start relay
Time-delay relay
Tachometer
heated rear window
Float chamber valve, carburettor
Electric heater for the rear window
Switch for the electrically heated rear
window
Earthing point between ignition switch and
handbrake
Corner lights
Lambda test socket
8-pole connector
4-pole connector
Motor for the left-hand electrically operated rear-view mirror
Motor for the right-hand electrically operated rear-view mirror
Speed transmitter
Brake switch for Cruise Control
Control unit for Lambda
Lambda sensor
Engine speed relay, Turbo with manual
gearbox
Fuel shut-off valve, carburettor
AC
Boost pressure switch, Turbo
Test tapping, EZK
Saab900
146
148
149
150
151
152A
152B
152C
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
190A
191
191A
192
193
309

Air distribution switch, AC
29-pole connector, white
29-pole connector, red
29-pole connector, black
/
Spark plug
Switch for drivers door electric window
regulator
regulator
regulator
Motor for right-hand front electric window
regulator
Switch, AC
Anti-freeze thermostat (cycling clutch
contact) for the AC
Knock sensor for the APC/EZK system
Pressure transmitter for the APC system
Selector switch for central locking system,
drivers door
Cutout switch for the rear-door electric
window regUlators
regulator
regulator
regulator
regulator
Distribution block
Motor for left-hand rear electric window
regulator
310
I.;istofcomponents
Motor for right-hand rear electric window

regulator
Pressure switch for Lambda
196
Control unit for the LH/CU 14 fuel injection
200
system
201
202
Engine temperature transmitter, LH fuel
injection system
Throttle angle transmitter, LH fuel injec203
tion system
Test connector, LH fuel injectio n system
204
Air mass meter, LH fuel injection system
205
206
Fuel injection valves, LH fuel injectio n
system
207
208D Door lock reed switch (driver's side)
Door lock reed switch (co-driver's side)
208P
211
212
(auto.)
Seat-belt warning lamp (ME)
214
215
Dip switch
225
Reading lamp
Main relay for the LH fuel injection system
229
Vacuum switch, Cruise Control/APC
233
234
Side marker lights
252
254
Temperature transmitter for the driver's
seat heating pad
256
257
259
Relay, reverse current protection, dim
dipped beam (up to and incl. 1989)
265
266
Speaker
267
Radio connector
268
Connection for the AC in the back seat
269
Two-pole connector
271
Preheater, Lambda sensor
272
Idling speed adjustment motor, LH fuel
injection system
273
Motor for the hydraulic pump
275
276
277
278
279
Mercury switch
Headlamp beam control motor, left-hand
280
(as from 1990)
281
Headlamp beam control motor, right-hand
(as from 1990)
282
Headlamp beam Control switch (as from
1990)
287
Relay for automatic control of window
regUlators
288
289
Control unit for the burglar alarm
290
Fuse for Convertible top
291
ABS control unit
292
ABS system relay
ABS pump relay
294
ABS pressure switch
194
293)
295
296
297
298A
298B
298C
298D
299
300
302
302A
303A
303B
304
305
306
307D
307P
308D
308P
309
310D
310P
A~9trl~~t~~'Y9Jve
AE3SyaIY~~I~~k';..
ABS hXc1rCluJiR?p~fl1pmotor
Wheel sensot;xlgft-T~and front
Wheel sens9r,i;~igbt+hand front
Wheel sensor'!rgft~bClflc:l . rear
Wheel sensor'Ji~Rt-tJClflc:l.rear
ABS brake fluid Igvgteq!)()r
Earthing point onlhe: hydrau lic unit
ABS electrical distrib titionp ox
ABS fuse holder
ABS diode
ABS diode
Movement detector
Seat-b elt reel, driver's side, passive seat
belts
Seat-b elt reel, co-driver's side, passive
seat belts
Motor with limit switches, passive seat
Fuse for passive seat belts, driver's side
Fuse for passive seat belts, co-driver's
side
311D

side
311P
312D Motor relay for passive seat belts, driver's
side
312P
313
Burglar alarm relay
314
315
Co-driver's seat switch for the burglar
alarm
316
320
Ignition coil with integra ted amplif ier (up
to and incl. 1989)
321
322
Connector, Auto/Man, LH 2.4
323
330
Airbag test connector (as from 1990)
331
Electronic control unit for the airbag (as
from 1990)
332A Sensor for airbag, left-hand (as from
1990)
332B Sensor for airbag, righ-hand (as from
1990)
333
Airbag (as from 1990)
334
Earthing point for electronic control unit
and airbag test connector (as from 1990)
335
2-pole connector for the airbag (as from
1990)
336
Slip-ring contact for the airbag (as from
1990)
339
Diode for CI Lambda
345
Crankshaft sensor
Saab900
List of components
347
349
350
351
352
368
389
390
391
392
393
395
396
397

13-pole connector
Slip ring switch for horn
Connector, cOld-starting valve, LH 2.4
NTC resistor for LH 2.4 (as from 1990)
Modulating valve for LH 2.4 (as from
1990)
Test connector for CU 14 (as from 1990)
Pressure switch forCU 14 (as from 1990)
Temperature switch III, Lambda ,(as from
1990)
Resistor for CU 14 (as from 1990)
Relay for radiator fan (as from 1990)
Test connector for ABS diagnostics (as
from 1990)
Alphabetic index
ABS brake fluid level sensor
ABS control unit
ABS diode
ABS diode
ABS electrical distribution box
ABS fuse holder
ABS hydraulic pump motor
ABS master valve
ABS pressure switch
ABS pump relay
ABS system relay
ABS valve block
ABS warning lamp
Air distribution switch, AC
Air mass meter, LH fuel injection system
Airbag (as from 1990)
Airbag test connector (as from 1990)
Airbag warning lamp (as from 1990)
Alternator
Anti-freeze thermostat (cycling clutch
contact) for the AC
Auxiliary air valve
Battery
Boost pressure switch, Turbo
Brake lamps
Brake light switch
Brake switch for Cruise Control
Brake warning lamp
Burglar alarm relay
Choke warning lamp
Cigarette lighter
Clock
299
291
303A
303B
302
302A
297
295
294
293
292
296
47Q
150
205
333
330
47T
2
146
171
148
95
1
144
30
29
134
47F
42
276
313
129
47E
47P
34
470
48
49
133
311
Co-driver's seat switch for seat-belt warning

69
lamp
315
Co-driver's seat switch for the burglar alarm
47
Combined instrument
I'
18 ' /
..170
268
Connection for the AC inthe back seat
275
322
Connector, Auto/Man, LH 2.4
368
Connector, cold-starting valve, LH 2.4
350
96
131
135
Control unit for Lambda
177
Control unitfor the APC system
176
Control unit for the LH/CU 14 fuel injection
200
system
289
Control unit for the burglar alarm
175
47C
Coolant temperature gauge
168
45
130
118
Corner lights
345
Crankshaft sensor
Cutout switch for the rear-door electric
189
window regulators
Dim dipped beam relay (up to and
78
incl. 1989)
Dim dipped beam resistor (up to and
80
incl. 1989)
339
Diode for CI Lambda
173
316
100
Diode, Lambda
215
Dip switch
12
27
28
24
192
Distribution block
Distribution block, positive supply from
75
battery
159
208P
Door lock reed switch (co-driver's side)
208D
Door lock reed switch (driver's side)
54
252
314
Earthing point between ignition switch and
117
handbrake
Earthing point for electronic control unit and
334
airbag test connector (as from 1990)
3
9
257
201
211
Earthing point oh the gearbox
300
Earthing point on the hydraulic unit
Earthing point on the radiator cross7
member
Saab900
312
I
i
I
I
I"
/"
I..istof components
Earthing point, back seat

Earthing point, left-hand wheel housing
member
Electric heater for the rear window
Electronic control unit for the airbag (as
from 1990)
Engine speed relay, Turbo with manual
gearbox
Engine temperature transmitter, LH fuel
injection system
Extra fog lamps
and controls
Flasher relay
Float chamber valve, carburettor
Fuel feed pump
Fuel injection valves, LH fuel injection
system
Fuel level gauge
Fuel pump
Fuel pump relay
Fuel reserve warning lamp
Fuel shut-off valve, carburettor
Full beam filament
Fuse for Convertible top
Fuse for passive seat belts, co-driver's side
Fuse for passive seat belts, driver's side
Fuse holder
Handbrake switch
Handbrake warning .lamp
Headlamp beam control motor, left-hand
(as from 1990)
Headlamp beam control motor, right-hand
(as from 1990)
Headlamp beam control switch
(as from 1990)
Heating pad
Horn
Horn relay
Hom switch
Hot start relay
Idling speed adjustment motor, LH fuel
injection system
Ignition coil
Ignition coil with integrated amplifier (up to
and inc!. 1989)
Ignition switch
"65
93
115
22
265
207
331
138
202
85
17
23
114
101
206
47A
46
103
102
323
478
140
11
47G
290
310P
3100
22A
91
19
309
43
47M
25
280
281
282
66
64
109
40
68
41
104
272
5
320
6
20
52
21
Indicating lampforGruise Control

Instrument lighting,rheostat
Interior lighting sWitch
Knock sensor for the APC/EZK system
Lambda sensor
Lambda test socket
Left-hand direction indicatorwarning lamp
Light switch
Lighting relay
Main relay for the LH fuel injection system
Mercury switch
Modulating valve for LH 2.4 (as from 1990)
regulator
Motor for left-hand rear electric window
regulator
Motor for right-hC!nd front electric window
regulator
Motor for right-hand rear electric window
regulator
Motor for the co-driver's door lock
Motor forthe hydraulic pump
rear-view mirror
Motor for the right-hand electrically
operated rear-view mirror
side
side
Movement detector
NTC resistor for LH 2.4" (as from 1990)
Oil pressure transmitter
Oil pressure warning lamp
Parking lights
Preheater, Lambda sensor
Pressure switch for CU 14 (as from 1990)
Pressure switch for Lambda
Pressure transmitter for the APC system
Saab900
47U
16
53
178
136
120
305
47H
10
154
153
8
306
55
56
229
149
279
390
193
165
194
184
182
273
126
186
127
185
188
36
311P
312P
3110
3120
308P
3080
304
158
389
15
44
470
13
271
392
196
166
180
4
4
List of components
172
37
Radiator fan motor
267
Radio connector
349
225
Reading lamp
47N
33
Rear fog lights
14
Rear lights
47J
Rear window heater warning lamp
143
38
Recirculation valve motor, AC
Relay for automatic control of window
287
regulators
174
107
Relay for intermittent operation of the
83
wi ndscreen wi pers
278
Relay for radiator fan (as from 1990)
396
277
156
155
228
Relay holder
Relay, reverse current protection, dim
259
dipped beam (up to and incl. 1989)
113
heated rear window
395
Resistor for CU 14 (as from 1990)
74
32
Reversing lamps
31
471
50
Roof lamp, centre
51
Roof lamp, front
82
Seat-belt reel, co-driver's side, passive seat
307P
belts
Seat-belt reel, driver's side, passive seat
307D
belts
71
70
72
214
Seat-belt warning lamp (ME)
121
141
288
Selector switch for central locking system,
driver's door
183
35
Selector switch for the ventilation fan
Sensor for airbag, left-hand (as from 1990) 332A
Sensor for airbag, righ-hand (as from 1990) 3328
Shift-up warning lamp
47K
89
90
Side marker lights
234
119
60
Slip ring switch for horn
352
Slip-ring contact for the airbag
(as from 1990)
336
(auto.)
212
Solenoidvalveforraisingtheidlingspeed,AC
Spark plug
Speaker
Speed transmitter
Start inhibitor switch, auto. transm.
Starter motor
Starting valve
regulator
Switch for driver's door electric window
regulator
regulator
regulator
transm.
regulator
regulator
Switch for the electrically heated rear
window
Switch for the left-hand electrically
Switch for the right-hand electrically
Switch, AC
Tachometer
Temperature switch III, Lambda
(as from 1990)
Temperature transmitter for the driver's seat
heating pad
Test connector for A8S diagnostics
(as from 1990)
Test connector for CU 14 (as from 1990)
Test connector, LH fuel injection system
Test tapping, EZK
Throttle angle transmitter, LH fuel injection
system
Time-delay relay
Two-pole connector
Vacuum switch
Vacuum switch, Cruise Control/APC
Warning lamp for headlamps switched on
Saab900
313
142
179
157
266
132
256
77
4
94
163
162
88
160
190
190A
76
191
191A
116
181
124
161
125
169
110
97
99
393
39
92
254
397
391
204
347
145
203
26
106
151
73
139
269
187
79
233
321
47V
314
L.isto f components
Warning lamp for passive seat belts

Washer motor
Wheel sensor, left-hand front
Wheel sensor, left-hand rear
Wheel sensor, right-hand front
Wheel sensor, right-hand rear
2-pole connector
2-pole connector for the airbag (as from
1990)
3-pole connector
4-pole connector
6-pole connector
8-pole connector
10-pole connector
12-pole connector
13-pole connector
29-pole connector, black
29-pole connector, red
29-pole connector, white
475
63
298A
298C
298B
298D
62
61
59
335
57
123
67
122
98
58
351
152C
152B
152A
Saab900
ci
'"
'"
ai
:0
0
.9
::>
.':,
.0
'"'"
(J)
c:
'"
"0
'"
;t
(J)
oS
"0
'"
(t
0
:;::::;
'6
Q)
.!!l
OJ
e9'UUI
Saab Automobile AS .
w
-i
.....
..0
~
C")
OJ
C
.~
-e
Trollhattan, Sweden
...
Printed in. Sweden, Graphic Systems AB. Gbg 1992.19832

3.2 - Electrical System, System Diagrams (OCR)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

3.2 - Electrical System, System Diagrams (OCR)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Saab 900

3:2 Electrical system, system diagrams,

Instruments and warning systems

Heating and ventilation systems

3:2 Electrical system,

Equivalent unit ?and

Production: Technical Publications, Saab Automobile' AB, Trollhiiltan, Sweden

Windscreen and headlamp wipers

Instruments and warnll'lg.,systems

Heating and ventilation systems

Cooling system fan, 1989 models ............

CautIon - hIgh voltage.

Disconnect the cable from one terminal of the

This Manual is applicable to cars delivered to all

Each wiring diagram generally consists of two

As a general rule, each cable in the electrical system

The Manual includes the following abbreviations:

Cross-sectional area of the conductor, mm 2

Anti-lock Brake System

Example: T8 indicates that the engine is turbocharged and has 8 valves

In the wiring diagrams, every sub-system

Most of the earthing points in the car

Component number. Every component has an identity

The engine Is equipped with an Automalic Perlorm

Always lake the following mea5\Jres before fault-lrac-

anceControl (APe) system. Which enablestheenglne

ing in the APe S)'Slem:

supplied to it at any particular time.

1. Disconnect the connector from the conuol unit.

DiSConnect the connector from the component

Use an ohmmeter to check the wifing ror any

the cable harness.

The SISplifier 146 are fed continuously Into the con.

The cable code consists of:

Cross-sectional area of the conductor in mm 2

Earthingpoinlon the radiatOfcross-member

in the electrical diSUibutionbol. lntheeo.

.Brake light switch

EaMing poii'll on the lefthanlJ wheel hous-

Amplifier for the elecuonic jgnnion system

29poIe white conneclor

29pole black connector

gine compartment, on the lefthand

Vacuum pump for Cruise Control

lbehind the knee shield)

Using a universal instrument for

The ohmmeter is used for carrying out measurements

Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the

If a reading is obtained on the voltmeter, this

Checking the voltage drop

Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the

Connect the negative lead of the voltmeter to

When the circuit is energised, i.e. when current

Hold the ohmmeter cables in contact with one

Connect one of the ohmmeter leads to the fuse

Connect the other ohmmeter h~ad to a reliable

Checking for open-circuit

Hold the ohmmete"r cables in contact with one

Disconnect the battery of the car.

Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one end of

Connect the other ohmmeter lead to the other

If the ohmmeter reads a low resistance or none

The three connectors designated 152A, 1528 and